From f8050a8d1ab674e1089d28ff5a6378126b68db2d Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Kurt Zenker Date: Fri, 11 Sep 2009 17:55:45 +0000 Subject: CWS-TOOLING: integrate CWS hcshared23 2009-09-09 15:34:15 +0200 ufi r275999 : again 2009-09-08 16:41:34 +0200 ufi r275941 : vor bauen 2009-09-08 16:35:18 +0200 ufi r275940 : vor bauen 2009-09-07 11:12:35 +0200 ufi r275878 : test --- helpcontent2/helpers/help_hid.lst | 187 +- .../source/text/sbasic/shared/01040000.xhp | 421 ++-- helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/02140000.xhp | 4 +- helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04050000.xhp | 1 - helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060101.xhp | 288 +-- helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060103.xhp | 270 +-- helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060106.xhp | 2231 ++++++++++---------- helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060109.xhp | 10 +- helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060110.xhp | 959 +++++---- helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060116.xhp | 30 +- helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060181.xhp | 3 +- helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060183.xhp | 8 +- helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060184.xhp | 589 +++--- helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/05100000.xhp | 18 +- helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/05120000.xhp | 79 +- helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12090102.xhp | 136 +- helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/text2columns.xhp | 74 +- .../source/text/scalc/guide/address_auto.xhp | 4 +- helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/auto_off.xhp | 6 +- .../source/text/scalc/guide/autofilter.xhp | 4 +- .../source/text/scalc/guide/autoformat.xhp | 12 +- .../source/text/scalc/guide/background.xhp | 10 +- helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/borders.xhp | 16 +- helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/calc_date.xhp | 8 +- .../source/text/scalc/guide/calc_series.xhp | 8 +- helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/calculate.xhp | 8 +- .../source/text/scalc/guide/cell_protect.xhp | 16 +- .../source/text/scalc/guide/cell_unprotect.xhp | 6 +- helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/cellcopy.xhp | 2 +- .../text/scalc/guide/cellreference_dragdrop.xhp | 4 +- .../source/text/scalc/guide/cellreferences.xhp | 8 +- .../source/text/scalc/guide/cellreferences_url.xhp | 136 +- .../text/scalc/guide/cellstyle_by_formula.xhp | 8 +- .../text/scalc/guide/cellstyle_conditional.xhp | 22 +- .../text/scalc/guide/cellstyle_minusvalue.xhp | 4 +- .../source/text/scalc/guide/consolidate.xhp | 24 +- helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/csv_files.xhp | 155 +- .../source/text/scalc/guide/csv_formula.xhp | 20 +- .../source/text/scalc/guide/currency_format.xhp | 65 +- .../source/text/scalc/guide/database_define.xhp | 6 +- .../source/text/scalc/guide/database_filter.xhp | 4 +- .../source/text/scalc/guide/database_sort.xhp | 2 +- .../text/scalc/guide/datapilot_createtable.xhp | 12 +- .../text/scalc/guide/datapilot_deletetable.xhp | 2 +- .../text/scalc/guide/datapilot_edittable.xhp | 4 +- .../text/scalc/guide/datapilot_filtertable.xhp | 2 +- helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/filters.xhp | 73 +- .../source/text/scalc/guide/formula_value.xhp | 2 +- helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/main.xhp | 1 + helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/makefile.mk | 1 + .../source/text/scalc/guide/multitables.xhp | 99 +- .../source/text/scalc/guide/numbers_text.xhp | 95 + .../source/text/scalc/guide/table_cellmerge.xhp | 85 +- .../source/text/scalc/guide/text_numbers.xhp | 71 +- .../source/text/scalc/guide/text_rotate.xhp | 77 +- helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/04/01020000.xhp | 12 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000406.xhp | 32 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00040500.xhp | 18 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00040502.xhp | 52 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01050000.xhp | 3 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01100200.xhp | 28 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01180000.xhp | 57 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02100000.xhp | 42 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02100001.xhp | 2 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02180000.xhp | 18 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02220100.xhp | 12 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/03010000.xhp | 109 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05020200.xhp | 4 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05030100.xhp | 38 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05210300.xhp | 24 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06040600.xhp | 117 +- .../source/text/shared/01/password_dlg.xhp | 8 +- .../source/text/shared/01/ref_pdf_export.xhp | 156 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170101.xhp | 1518 +++++++------ helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170103.xhp | 147 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170202.xhp | 256 +-- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12090100.xhp | 79 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12100200.xhp | 38 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/04/01010000.xhp | 122 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/05/00000001.xhp | 2 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/05/00000110.xhp | 349 +-- .../shared/explorer/database/dabaadvpropdat.xhp | 101 +- .../text/shared/explorer/database/dabadoc.xhp | 50 +- .../text/shared/explorer/database/rep_main.xhp | 409 ++-- .../text/shared/explorer/database/rep_sort.xhp | 127 +- .../source/text/shared/guide/breaking_lines.xhp | 113 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/keyboard.xhp | 2 +- .../source/text/shared/guide/protection.xhp | 4 +- .../source/text/shared/guide/startcenter.xhp | 88 +- .../source/text/shared/optionen/01020400.xhp | 2 +- .../source/text/shared/optionen/improvement.xhp | 8 +- helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/00/00000402.xhp | 2 +- helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/06050000.xhp | 30 +- .../text/simpress/guide/line_arrow_styles.xhp | 4 +- helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/00/00000403.xhp | 8 +- helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/00/00000405.xhp | 28 +- helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04090001.xhp | 403 ++-- helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04090200.xhp | 14 +- helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120229.xhp | 6 +- helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04200000.xhp | 10 +- helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05040600.xhp | 20 +- helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05060800.xhp | 16 +- helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05140000.xhp | 6 +- helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06100000.xhp | 30 +- .../source/text/swriter/guide/auto_numbering.xhp | 4 +- .../source/text/swriter/guide/auto_off.xhp | 14 +- .../source/text/swriter/guide/auto_spellcheck.xhp | 6 +- .../source/text/swriter/guide/autocorr_except.xhp | 6 +- .../source/text/swriter/guide/autotext.xhp | 16 +- .../source/text/swriter/guide/background.xhp | 18 +- .../source/text/swriter/guide/border_object.xhp | 10 +- .../source/text/swriter/guide/border_page.xhp | 22 +- helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/borders.xhp | 14 +- .../source/text/swriter/guide/calculate.xhp | 2 +- .../text/swriter/guide/calculate_clipboard.xhp | 4 +- .../text/swriter/guide/calculate_intable.xhp | 4 +- .../source/text/swriter/guide/calculate_intext.xhp | 2 +- .../text/swriter/guide/calculate_intext2.xhp | 2 +- .../text/swriter/guide/calculate_multitable.xhp | 2 +- .../source/text/swriter/guide/captions.xhp | 4 +- .../source/text/swriter/guide/captions_numbers.xhp | 10 +- .../source/text/swriter/guide/change_header.xhp | 8 +- .../text/swriter/guide/chapter_numbering.xhp | 6 +- .../source/text/swriter/guide/conditional_text.xhp | 6 +- .../text/swriter/guide/conditional_text2.xhp | 2 +- .../source/text/swriter/guide/delete_from_dict.xhp | 4 +- .../source/text/swriter/guide/even_odd_sdw.xhp | 18 +- .../source/text/swriter/guide/field_convert.xhp | 4 +- helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/fields.xhp | 6 +- .../source/text/swriter/guide/fields_date.xhp | 2 +- .../source/text/swriter/guide/fields_enter.xhp | 4 +- .../source/text/swriter/guide/fields_userdata.xhp | 6 +- helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/finding.xhp | 42 +- .../source/text/swriter/guide/footer_nextpage.xhp | 12 +- .../text/swriter/guide/footer_pagenumber.xhp | 6 +- .../source/text/swriter/guide/footnote_usage.xhp | 14 +- .../text/swriter/guide/footnote_with_line.xhp | 10 +- .../source/text/swriter/guide/globaldoc.xhp | 2 +- .../source/text/swriter/guide/globaldoc_howtos.xhp | 22 +- .../source/text/swriter/guide/header_footer.xhp | 6 +- .../text/swriter/guide/header_pagestyles.xhp | 10 +- .../text/swriter/guide/header_with_chapter.xhp | 6 +- .../source/text/swriter/guide/hidden_text.xhp | 24 +- .../text/swriter/guide/hidden_text_display.xhp | 2 +- .../source/text/swriter/guide/hyperlinks.xhp | 2 +- .../source/text/swriter/guide/indenting.xhp | 2 +- .../source/text/swriter/guide/indices_delete.xhp | 4 +- .../source/text/swriter/guide/indices_edit.xhp | 2 +- .../source/text/swriter/guide/indices_enter.xhp | 10 +- .../source/text/swriter/guide/indices_form.xhp | 22 +- .../source/text/swriter/guide/indices_index.xhp | 10 +- .../text/swriter/guide/indices_literature.xhp | 16 +- .../source/text/swriter/guide/indices_multidoc.xhp | 2 +- .../source/text/swriter/guide/indices_toc.xhp | 10 +- .../source/text/swriter/guide/indices_userdef.xhp | 6 +- .../text/swriter/guide/insert_graphic_dialog.xhp | 4 +- .../text/swriter/guide/insert_graphic_scan.xhp | 4 +- .../source/text/swriter/guide/jump2statusbar.xhp | 2 +- .../source/text/swriter/guide/keyboard.xhp | 6 +- .../source/text/swriter/guide/load_styles.xhp | 8 +- .../source/text/swriter/guide/navigator.xhp | 4 +- .../text/swriter/guide/nonprintable_text.xhp | 4 +- .../source/text/swriter/guide/number_sequence.xhp | 2 +- .../source/text/swriter/guide/numbering_lines.xhp | 24 +- .../source/text/swriter/guide/numbering_paras.xhp | 6 +- .../source/text/swriter/guide/page_break.xhp | 6 +- .../source/text/swriter/guide/pagebackground.xhp | 24 +- .../source/text/swriter/guide/pagenumbers.xhp | 22 +- .../source/text/swriter/guide/pageorientation.xhp | 32 +- .../source/text/swriter/guide/pagestyles.xhp | 16 +- .../source/text/swriter/guide/print_brochure.xhp | 12 +- .../source/text/swriter/guide/print_preview.xhp | 8 +- .../source/text/swriter/guide/print_small.xhp | 4 +- .../source/text/swriter/guide/printer_tray.xhp | 6 +- .../source/text/swriter/guide/printing_order.xhp | 4 +- .../source/text/swriter/guide/protection.xhp | 20 +- .../source/text/swriter/guide/references.xhp | 32 +- .../text/swriter/guide/references_modify.xhp | 6 +- .../source/text/swriter/guide/registertrue.xhp | 8 +- .../text/swriter/guide/removing_line_breaks.xhp | 6 +- .../source/text/swriter/guide/reset_format.xhp | 2 +- helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/ruler.xhp | 4 +- .../source/text/swriter/guide/search_regexp.xhp | 107 +- .../source/text/swriter/guide/section_edit.xhp | 6 +- .../source/text/swriter/guide/section_insert.xhp | 12 +- .../source/text/swriter/guide/send2html.xhp | 4 +- .../source/text/swriter/guide/smarttags.xhp | 4 +- .../text/swriter/guide/spellcheck_dialog.xhp | 8 +- .../text/swriter/guide/stylist_fillformat.xhp | 8 +- .../text/swriter/guide/stylist_fromselect.xhp | 10 +- .../source/text/swriter/guide/table_cellmerge.xhp | 4 +- .../source/text/swriter/guide/table_delete.xhp | 2 +- .../source/text/swriter/guide/table_insert.xhp | 12 +- .../guide/table_repeat_multiple_headers.xhp | 4 +- .../source/text/swriter/guide/table_sizing.xhp | 16 +- .../source/text/swriter/guide/tablemode.xhp | 6 +- .../source/text/swriter/guide/template_create.xhp | 4 +- .../source/text/swriter/guide/template_default.xhp | 14 +- .../source/text/swriter/guide/text_animation.xhp | 2 +- .../source/text/swriter/guide/text_capital.xhp | 2 +- .../source/text/swriter/guide/text_centervert.xhp | 4 +- .../text/swriter/guide/text_direct_cursor.xhp | 2 +- .../source/text/swriter/guide/text_emphasize.xhp | 6 +- .../source/text/swriter/guide/text_frame.xhp | 8 +- .../source/text/swriter/guide/text_nav_keyb.xhp | 2 +- .../source/text/swriter/guide/text_rotate.xhp | 2 +- .../source/text/swriter/guide/textdoc_inframe.xhp | 12 +- .../source/text/swriter/guide/using_hyphen.xhp | 18 +- .../text/swriter/guide/using_numbered_lists.xhp | 2 +- .../text/swriter/guide/using_numbered_lists2.xhp | 8 +- .../source/text/swriter/guide/using_numbering.xhp | 8 +- .../source/text/swriter/guide/using_thesaurus.xhp | 4 +- .../source/text/swriter/guide/word_completion.xhp | 2 +- .../text/swriter/guide/word_completion_adjust.xhp | 10 +- .../source/text/swriter/guide/words_count.xhp | 4 +- helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/wrap.xhp | 8 +- 216 files changed, 6367 insertions(+), 5796 deletions(-) create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/numbers_text.xhp diff --git a/helpcontent2/helpers/help_hid.lst b/helpcontent2/helpers/help_hid.lst index 66edabe518..fc0a3ac4d2 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/helpers/help_hid.lst +++ b/helpcontent2/helpers/help_hid.lst @@ -1,7 +1,6 @@ ,, -0,0, 1,1, -DEV300.m53,010101010101010, +DEV300.m57,010101010101010, DLG_INSERT_PAGES_OBJS,938, DLG_JOIN_TABADD,19214, FID_ADJUST_PRINTZOOM,26652,.uno:AdjustPrintZoom @@ -1859,7 +1858,11 @@ HID_FILL_ATTR_LISTBOX,39869, HID_FILL_TYPE_LISTBOX,39870, HID_FILTER_NAVIGATOR,38072, HID_FILTER_NAVIGATOR_WIN,38073, +HID_FILTER_PDF_INITIAL_VIEW,64150, +HID_FILTER_PDF_LINKS,64153, HID_FILTER_PDF_OPTIONS,64149, +HID_FILTER_PDF_SECURITY,64152, +HID_FILTER_PDF_USER_INTERFACE,64151, HID_FIRSTSTART_CANCEL,42781, HID_FIRSTSTART_DIALOG,42773, HID_FIRSTSTART_FINISH,42782, @@ -2871,7 +2874,6 @@ HID_OPTIONS_GENERAL,33811, HID_OPTIONS_GRID,33816, HID_OPTIONS_JAVA,39996, HID_OPTIONS_JAVA_CLASSPATH,39999, -HID_OPTIONS_JAVA_LIST,39997, HID_OPTIONS_JAVA_PARAMETER,39998, HID_OPTIONS_LINGU,33812, HID_OPTIONS_MAIL,33842, @@ -2908,6 +2910,7 @@ HID_PACKAGE_MANAGER_MENU_ITEM,42772, HID_PACKAGE_MANAGER_PROGRESS,42770, HID_PACKAGE_MANAGER_PROGRESS_CANCEL,42771, HID_PACKAGE_MANAGER_TREELISTBOX,42769, +HID_PACKAGE_MANAGER_UPD_REQ,42797, HID_PAGEPREVIEW,52835, HID_PAGE_CONNECTION,33857, HID_PAGE_CONNECTION_CTL_PREVIEW,33858, @@ -2988,63 +2991,178 @@ HID_PRINTDIALOG_TOFILE,33021, HID_PRINTMONITOR,33072, HID_PRINT_AS_MERGE,54949, HID_PRINT_OPTIONS,33124, +HID_PROP_ALIGN,37816, +HID_PROP_ALLOW_ADDITIONS,37784, +HID_PROP_ALLOW_DELETIONS,37786, +HID_PROP_ALLOW_EDITS,37785, HID_PROP_ANCHOR_TYPE,38111, +HID_PROP_AUTOCOMPLETE,37848, HID_PROP_AUTOLINEBREAK,37932, +HID_PROP_BACKGROUNDCOLOR,37811, HID_PROP_BINDING_NAME,38019, HID_PROP_BIND_EXPRESSION,37998, HID_PROP_BLOCKINCREMENT,37892, +HID_PROP_BORDER,37815, HID_PROP_BORDERCOLOR,38105, +HID_PROP_BOUNDCOLUMN,37801, HID_PROP_BOUND_CELL,37900, +HID_PROP_BUTTONTYPE,37823, HID_PROP_CELL_EXCHANGE_TYPE,37902, +HID_PROP_CLASSID,37796, +HID_PROP_CONTROLLABEL,37879, +HID_PROP_CONTROLSOURCE,37771, +HID_PROP_CURRENCYSYMBOL,37844, +HID_PROP_CURRSYM_POSITION,37880, +HID_PROP_CURSORSOURCE,37777, +HID_PROP_CURSORSOURCETYPE,37778, +HID_PROP_CURSORTYPE,37779, +HID_PROP_CYCLE,37783, +HID_PROP_DATAENTRY,37781, +HID_PROP_DATASOURCE,37776, +HID_PROP_DATE,37833, +HID_PROP_DATEFORMAT,37836, +HID_PROP_DATEMAX,37835, +HID_PROP_DATEMIN,37834, +HID_PROP_DECIMAL_ACCURACY,37861, +HID_PROP_DECORATION,38020, +HID_PROP_DEFAULTVALUE,37827, +HID_PROP_DEFAULT_BUTTON,37863, +HID_PROP_DEFAULT_DATE,37871, +HID_PROP_DEFAULT_LONG_VALUE,37869, HID_PROP_DEFAULT_SCROLLVALUE,37905, +HID_PROP_DEFAULT_SELECT_SEQ,37831, HID_PROP_DEFAULT_SPINVALUE,37911, +HID_PROP_DEFAULT_STATE,37829, +HID_PROP_DEFAULT_TIME,37870, +HID_PROP_DIRTY,37787, +HID_PROP_DROPDOWN,37817, +HID_PROP_ECHO_CHAR,37859, +HID_PROP_EDITABLE,38025, +HID_PROP_EDITMASK,37845, +HID_PROP_EFFECTIVEDEFAULT,37878, +HID_PROP_EFFECTIVEMAX,37877, +HID_PROP_EFFECTIVEMIN,37876, +HID_PROP_EMPTY_IS_NULL,37860, +HID_PROP_ENABLED,37847, HID_PROP_ENABLE_VISIBLE,37862, +HID_PROP_ESCAPE_PROCESSING,37881, +HID_PROP_FILLCOLOR,37812, +HID_PROP_FILTER,37867, +HID_PROP_FILTERPROPOSAL,37875, HID_PROP_FOCUSONCLICK,38102, +HID_PROP_FONT,37809, +HID_PROP_FORMATKEY,37791, +HID_PROP_GROUPBOX,37770, +HID_PROP_HEIGHT,37799, +HID_PROP_HELPTEXT,37872, +HID_PROP_HELPURL,37873, +HID_PROP_HIDDEN_VALUE,37864, HID_PROP_HIDEINACTIVESELECTION,38103, +HID_PROP_HSCROLL,37819, HID_PROP_ICONSIZE,37927, HID_PROP_IMAGEPOSITION,38107, +HID_PROP_IMAGE_URL,37830, HID_PROP_INPUT_REQUIRED,37769, +HID_PROP_INVOKES_STOP_NOT_EDITING,38026, +HID_PROP_LABEL,37806, +HID_PROP_LEFT,37797, +HID_PROP_LINECOLOR,37814, +HID_PROP_LINECOUNT,37849, HID_PROP_LINEEND_FORMAT,37934, HID_PROP_LINEINCREMENT,37891, +HID_PROP_LISTINDEX,37804, +HID_PROP_LISTSOURCE,37803, +HID_PROP_LISTSOURCETYPE,37802, HID_PROP_LIST_BINDING,38018, HID_PROP_LIST_CELL_RANGE,37901, +HID_PROP_LITERALMASK,37846, +HID_PROP_LOCKED,37790, +HID_PROP_MASTERFIELDS,37774, +HID_PROP_MAXTEXTLEN,37850, +HID_PROP_MULTILINE,37818, +HID_PROP_MULTISELECTION,37832, +HID_PROP_NAME,37772, +HID_PROP_NAVIGATION,37782, +HID_PROP_NAVIGATIONBAR,37866, HID_PROP_NOLABEL,38108, +HID_PROP_OLDVALUE,37788, HID_PROP_ORIENTATION,37894, HID_PROP_POSITIONX,37895, HID_PROP_POSITIONY,37896, +HID_PROP_PRINTABLE,37855, HID_PROP_PROGRESSVALUE,37886, HID_PROP_PROGRESSVALUE_MAX,37888, HID_PROP_PROGRESSVALUE_MIN,37887, HID_PROP_PUSHBUTTONTYPE,37897, +HID_PROP_READONLY,37780, +HID_PROP_RECORDMARKER,37874, +HID_PROP_REFVALUE,37822, HID_PROP_REPEAT,37913, HID_PROP_REPEAT_DELAY,37906, +HID_PROP_REQUIRED,37792, +HID_PROP_RIGHT,37798, +HID_PROP_ROOT_DISPLAYED,38022, +HID_PROP_ROWHEIGHT,37810, +HID_PROP_ROW_HEIGHT,38027, HID_PROP_SCALEIMAGE,37899, HID_PROP_SCROLLVALUE,37889, HID_PROP_SCROLLVALUE_MAX,37890, HID_PROP_SCROLLVALUE_MIN,37904, +HID_PROP_SEARCHING,37808, HID_PROP_SELECTEDITEMS,37903, +HID_PROP_SELECTION_TYPE,38021, +HID_PROP_SHOWS_HANDLES,38023, +HID_PROP_SHOWS_ROOT_HANDLES,38024, +HID_PROP_SHOWTHOUSANDSEP,37853, HID_PROP_SHOW_FILTERSORT,37931, HID_PROP_SHOW_NAVIGATION,37929, HID_PROP_SHOW_POSITION,37928, HID_PROP_SHOW_RECORDACTIONS,37930, HID_PROP_SHOW_SCROLLBARS,37915, +HID_PROP_SLAVEFIELDS,37775, +HID_PROP_SORT_CRITERIA,37868, +HID_PROP_SPIN,37851, HID_PROP_SPININCREMENT,37912, HID_PROP_SPINVALUE,37908, HID_PROP_SPINVALUE_MAX,37910, HID_PROP_SPINVALUE_MIN,37909, HID_PROP_STATE,37898, HID_PROP_STEP,37884, +HID_PROP_STRICTFORMAT,37852, +HID_PROP_STRINGITEMLIST,37807, HID_PROP_SUBMISSION_ID,37942, +HID_PROP_SUBMIT_ACTION,37824, +HID_PROP_SUBMIT_ENCODING,37826, +HID_PROP_SUBMIT_METHOD,37825, +HID_PROP_SUBMIT_TARGET,37828, HID_PROP_SYMBOLCOLOR,37907, +HID_PROP_TABINDEX,37773, HID_PROP_TABORDER_CONTROLS,37916, +HID_PROP_TABSTOP,37821, +HID_PROP_TAG,37858, +HID_PROP_TARGET_FRAME,37857, +HID_PROP_TARGET_URL,37856, +HID_PROP_TEXT,37805, HID_PROP_TEXTTYPE,37933, +HID_PROP_TIME,37837, +HID_PROP_TIMEFORMAT,37840, +HID_PROP_TIMEMAX,37839, +HID_PROP_TIMEMIN,37838, HID_PROP_TITLE,37883, HID_PROP_TOGGLE,38101, +HID_PROP_TRISTATE,37865, HID_PROP_UNCHECKEDREFVALUE,37941, +HID_PROP_UNIQUE,37795, HID_PROP_VALUE,37789, +HID_PROP_VALUEMAX,37842, +HID_PROP_VALUEMIN,37841, +HID_PROP_VALUESTEP,37843, +HID_PROP_VERTICAL_ALIGN,37854, HID_PROP_VISIBLESIZE,37893, HID_PROP_VISUALEFFECT,38104, +HID_PROP_VSCROLL,37820, HID_PROP_WHEEL_BEHAVIOR,37793, +HID_PROP_WIDTH,37800, HID_PROP_WORDBREAK,37914, HID_PROP_WRITING_MODE,38109, HID_PROP_XML_DATA_MODEL,37997, @@ -3065,6 +3183,7 @@ HID_PROP_XSD_RELEVANT,38000, HID_PROP_XSD_REQUIRED,37999, HID_PROP_XSD_TOTAL_DIGITS,37935, HID_PROP_XSD_WHITESPACES,38005, +HID_PROTOCOLS,34768, HID_PVIEW_TOOLBOX,54841, HID_PVIEW_ZOOM_LB,54945, HID_QRYDGN_ROW_ALIAS,38867, @@ -4317,8 +4436,6 @@ MSC_Super_ID,123456, MSC_Super_ID2,1234567, MSC_Super_ID3,12345678, MSG_QUERY_LOAD_TEMPLATE,2065, -PDF1TBO,867876864, -PDF2TBO,867860480, RID_ENVTOOLBOX,560, RID_MATH_TOOLBOX,20050, RID_MN_FORMAT_STYLE,25031, @@ -5840,7 +5957,9 @@ SID_TABLE_DELETE_ROW,11078, SID_TABLE_DISTRIBUTE_COLUMNS,11086, SID_TABLE_DISTRIBUTE_ROWS,11087, SID_TABLE_INSERT_COL,11077, +SID_TABLE_INSERT_COL_DLG,10426, SID_TABLE_INSERT_ROW,11076, +SID_TABLE_INSERT_ROW_DLG,10427, SID_TABLE_MERGE_CELLS,11070, SID_TABLE_SELECT_ALL,11080, SID_TABLE_SELECT_COL,11081, @@ -6415,7 +6534,6 @@ dbaccess_PushButton_PAGE_CONNECTION_PB_TESTDRIVERCLASS,851546625, dbaccess_PushButton_PAGE_GENERAL_PB_OPENDOCUMENT,851448326, dbaccess_PushButton_PAGE_MYSQL_JDBC_PB_TESTDRIVERCLASS,851776005, dbaccess_PushButton_PAGE_ORACLE_JDBC_PB_TESTDRIVERCLASS,851890693, -dbaccess_PushButton_RID_EXTENSION_NOT_PRESENT_DLG_PB_DOWNLOAD,1388810762, dbaccess_PushButton_TAB_WIZ_NAME_MATCHING_PB_ALL,851628560, dbaccess_PushButton_TAB_WIZ_NAME_MATCHING_PB_NONE,851628561, dbaccess_PushButton_TAB_WIZ_TYPE_SELECT_PB_AUTO,851612165, @@ -6458,16 +6576,11 @@ desktop_MultiLineEdit_RID_DLG_LICENSE_ML_LICENSE,1180240435, desktop_MultiLineEdit_RID_DLG_UPDATEINSTALL_RID_DLG_UPDATE_INSTALL_INFO,1106840076, desktop_MultiLineEdit_RID_DLG_UPDATE_RID_DLG_UPDATE_DESCRIPTIONS,1106676231, desktop_MultiLineEdit_TP_LICENSE_ML_LICENSE,586140166, -desktop_PushButton_RID_DLG_EXTENSION_MANAGER_RID_EM_BTN_ADD,2180354572, -desktop_PushButton_RID_DLG_EXTENSION_MANAGER_RID_EM_BTN_CHECK_UPDATES,2180354573, +desktop_PushButton_RID_DLG_EXTENSION_MANAGER_RID_EM_BTN_ADD,2180256268, +desktop_PushButton_RID_DLG_EXTENSION_MANAGER_RID_EM_BTN_CHECK_UPDATES,2180256269, desktop_PushButton_RID_DLG_LICENSE_PB_LICENSE_DOWN,1180242482, -desktop_PushButton_RID_DLG_PACKAGE_MANAGER_RID_BTN_ADD,2180256276, -desktop_PushButton_RID_DLG_PACKAGE_MANAGER_RID_BTN_CHECK_UPDATES,2180256281, -desktop_PushButton_RID_DLG_PACKAGE_MANAGER_RID_BTN_DISABLE,2180256279, -desktop_PushButton_RID_DLG_PACKAGE_MANAGER_RID_BTN_ENABLE,2180256278, -desktop_PushButton_RID_DLG_PACKAGE_MANAGER_RID_BTN_EXPORT,2180256280, -desktop_PushButton_RID_DLG_PACKAGE_MANAGER_RID_BTN_OPTIONS,2180256282, -desktop_PushButton_RID_DLG_PACKAGE_MANAGER_RID_BTN_REMOVE,2180256277, +desktop_PushButton_RID_DLG_UPDATE_REQUIRED_RID_EM_BTN_CHECK_UPDATES,1106694669, +desktop_PushButton_RID_DLG_UPDATE_REQUIRED_RID_EM_BTN_CLOSE,1106694666, desktop_PushButton_RID_DLG_UPDATE_RID_DLG_UPDATE_OK,1106678282, desktop_PushButton_TP_LICENSE_PB_LICENSE_DOWN,586142215, desktop_RadioButton_TP_REGISTRATION_RB_REGISTRATION_LATER,586088966, @@ -6950,7 +7063,7 @@ sc_CheckBox_RID_SCDLG_PIVOT_LAYOUT_BTN_FILTER,2567504925, sc_CheckBox_RID_SCDLG_PIVOT_LAYOUT_BTN_IGNEMPTYROWS,2567504921, sc_CheckBox_RID_SCDLG_PIVOT_LAYOUT_BTN_TOTALCOL,2567504923, sc_CheckBox_RID_SCDLG_PIVOT_LAYOUT_BTN_TOTALROW,2567504924, -sc_CheckBox_RID_SCDLG_RETYPEPASS_INPUT_BTN_MATCH_OLD_PASSWORD,1495663921, +sc_CheckBox_RID_SCDLG_RETYPEPASS_INPUT_BTN_MATCH_OLD_PASSWORD,1495680305, sc_CheckBox_RID_SCDLG_ROW_MAN_BTN_DEFVAL,1494942721, sc_CheckBox_RID_SCDLG_ROW_OPT_BTN_DEFVAL,1494959105, sc_CheckBox_RID_SCDLG_SHAREDOCUMENT_CB_SHARE,1495598081, @@ -6960,7 +7073,7 @@ sc_CheckBox_RID_SCDLG_SPEC_FILTER_BTN_DEST_PERS,2567095308, sc_CheckBox_RID_SCDLG_SPEC_FILTER_BTN_HEADER,2567095300, sc_CheckBox_RID_SCDLG_SPEC_FILTER_BTN_REGEXP,2567095299, sc_CheckBox_RID_SCDLG_SPEC_FILTER_BTN_UNIQUE,2567095297, -sc_CheckBox_RID_SCDLG_TABPROTECTION_BTN_PROTECT,1495614468, +sc_CheckBox_RID_SCDLG_TABPROTECTION_BTN_PROTECT,1495630852, sc_CheckBox_RID_SCPAGE_CALC_BTN_CALC,957252625, sc_CheckBox_RID_SCPAGE_CALC_BTN_CASE,957252623, sc_CheckBox_RID_SCPAGE_CALC_BTN_ITERATE,957252609, @@ -7076,8 +7189,8 @@ sc_Edit_RID_SCDLG_OPTSOLVER_ED_TARGET,2569209858, sc_Edit_RID_SCDLG_OPTSOLVER_ED_VARIABLECELLS,2569209859, sc_Edit_RID_SCDLG_PIVOT_LAYOUT_ED_INAREA,2567505962, sc_Edit_RID_SCDLG_PIVOT_LAYOUT_ED_OUTAREA,2567505943, -sc_Edit_RID_SCDLG_RETYPEPASS_INPUT_ED_PASSWORD1,1495664942, -sc_Edit_RID_SCDLG_RETYPEPASS_INPUT_ED_PASSWORD2,1495664944, +sc_Edit_RID_SCDLG_RETYPEPASS_INPUT_ED_PASSWORD1,1495681326, +sc_Edit_RID_SCDLG_RETYPEPASS_INPUT_ED_PASSWORD2,1495681328, sc_Edit_RID_SCDLG_SIMPLEREF_ED_ASSIGN,2568996875, sc_Edit_RID_SCDLG_SOLVER_DOUBLE_ED_VALUE,1495517185, sc_Edit_RID_SCDLG_SOLVER_ED_FORMULACELL,2567374849, @@ -7089,8 +7202,8 @@ sc_Edit_RID_SCDLG_STRINPUT_ED_INPUT,1493469194, sc_Edit_RID_SCDLG_TABOP_ED_COLCELL,2567899139, sc_Edit_RID_SCDLG_TABOP_ED_FORMULARANGE,2567899137, sc_Edit_RID_SCDLG_TABOP_ED_ROWCELL,2567899138, -sc_Edit_RID_SCDLG_TABPROTECTION_ED_PASSWORD1,1495615494, -sc_Edit_RID_SCDLG_TABPROTECTION_ED_PASSWORD2,1495615496, +sc_Edit_RID_SCDLG_TABPROTECTION_ED_PASSWORD1,1495631878, +sc_Edit_RID_SCDLG_TABPROTECTION_ED_PASSWORD2,1495631880, sc_Edit_RID_SCPAGE_CALC_ED_EPS,957253637, sc_Edit_RID_SCPAGE_SORT_OPTIONS_ED_OUTAREA,956450820, sc_Edit_RID_SCPAGE_USERLISTS_ED_COPYFROM,956844035, @@ -7248,11 +7361,11 @@ sc_ModalDialog_RID_SCDLG_GROUP,1493549056, sc_ModalDialog_RID_SCDLG_INSERT_TABLE,1493893120, sc_ModalDialog_RID_SCDLG_LINKAREA,1495367680, sc_ModalDialog_RID_SCDLG_NEWSCENARIO,1493843968, -sc_ModalDialog_RID_SCDLG_RETYPEPASS,1495646208, -sc_ModalDialog_RID_SCDLG_RETYPEPASS_INPUT,1495662592, +sc_ModalDialog_RID_SCDLG_RETYPEPASS,1495662592, +sc_ModalDialog_RID_SCDLG_RETYPEPASS_INPUT,1495678976, sc_ModalDialog_RID_SCDLG_SORT_WARNING,1495613440, sc_ModalDialog_RID_SCDLG_STRINPUT,1493467136, -sc_ModalDialog_RID_SCDLG_TABPROTECTION,1495613440, +sc_ModalDialog_RID_SCDLG_TABPROTECTION,1495629824, sc_ModelessDialog_RID_SCDLG_SIMPLEREF,2568994816, sc_MoreButton_RID_SCDLG_AUTOFORMAT_BTN_MORE,1493545576, sc_MoreButton_RID_SCDLG_CONSOLIDATE_BTN_MORE,2567533060, @@ -7311,11 +7424,11 @@ sc_PushButton_RID_SCDLG_OPTSOLVER_BTN_SOLVE,2569212420, sc_PushButton_RID_SCDLG_PIVOTSUBT_BTN_OPTIONS,1493832197, sc_PushButton_RID_SCDLG_PIVOT_LAYOUT_BTN_OPTIONS,2567508486, sc_PushButton_RID_SCDLG_PIVOT_LAYOUT_BTN_REMOVE,2567508485, -sc_PushButton_RID_SCDLG_RETYPEPASS_BTN_RETYPE_DOC,1495650829, -sc_PushButton_RID_SCDLG_RETYPEPASS_BTN_RETYPE_SHEET1,1495650931, -sc_PushButton_RID_SCDLG_RETYPEPASS_BTN_RETYPE_SHEET2,1495650934, -sc_PushButton_RID_SCDLG_RETYPEPASS_BTN_RETYPE_SHEET3,1495650937, -sc_PushButton_RID_SCDLG_RETYPEPASS_BTN_RETYPE_SHEET4,1495650940, +sc_PushButton_RID_SCDLG_RETYPEPASS_BTN_RETYPE_DOC,1495667213, +sc_PushButton_RID_SCDLG_RETYPEPASS_BTN_RETYPE_SHEET1,1495667315, +sc_PushButton_RID_SCDLG_RETYPEPASS_BTN_RETYPE_SHEET2,1495667318, +sc_PushButton_RID_SCDLG_RETYPEPASS_BTN_RETYPE_SHEET3,1495667321, +sc_PushButton_RID_SCDLG_RETYPEPASS_BTN_RETYPE_SHEET4,1495667324, sc_PushButton_RID_SCDLG_SOLVEROPTIONS_BTN_EDIT,1495486977, sc_PushButton_RID_SCDLG_SORT_WARNING_BTN_CURSORT,1495618052, sc_PushButton_RID_SCDLG_SORT_WARNING_BTN_EXTSORT,1495618051, @@ -7384,8 +7497,8 @@ sc_RadioButton_RID_SCDLG_OPTSOLVER_RB_VALUE,2569208323, sc_RadioButton_RID_SCDLG_PIVOTSUBT_RB_AUTO,1493828098, sc_RadioButton_RID_SCDLG_PIVOTSUBT_RB_NONE,1493828097, sc_RadioButton_RID_SCDLG_PIVOTSUBT_RB_USER,1493828099, -sc_RadioButton_RID_SCDLG_RETYPEPASS_INPUT_BTN_REMOVE_PASSWORD,1495663411, -sc_RadioButton_RID_SCDLG_RETYPEPASS_INPUT_BTN_RETYPE_PASSWORD,1495663410, +sc_RadioButton_RID_SCDLG_RETYPEPASS_INPUT_BTN_REMOVE_PASSWORD,1495679795, +sc_RadioButton_RID_SCDLG_RETYPEPASS_INPUT_BTN_RETYPE_PASSWORD,1495679794, sc_RadioButton_RID_SCPAGE_CALC_BTN_DATE1904,957252107, sc_RadioButton_RID_SCPAGE_CALC_BTN_DATESC10,957252106, sc_RadioButton_RID_SCPAGE_CALC_BTN_DATESTD,957252105, @@ -7993,6 +8106,7 @@ svx_CheckBox_OFA_TP_MISC_CB_TOOLTIP,810484747, svx_CheckBox_OFA_TP_VIEW_CB_FONTANTIALIASING,810517567, svx_CheckBox_OFA_TP_VIEW_CB_FONT_HISTORY,810517566, svx_CheckBox_OFA_TP_VIEW_CB_FONT_SHOW,810517564, +svx_CheckBox_OFA_TP_VIEW_CB_SELECTION,810517575, svx_CheckBox_OFA_TP_VIEW_CB_SYSTEM_FONT,810517561, svx_CheckBox_OFA_TP_VIEW_CB_USE_ANTIALIASE,810517573, svx_CheckBox_OFA_TP_VIEW_CB_USE_HARDACCELL,810517572, @@ -8001,7 +8115,7 @@ svx_CheckBox_RID_OFAPAGE_AUTOCOMPLETE_OPTIONS_CB_ACTIV,809157753, svx_CheckBox_RID_OFAPAGE_AUTOCOMPLETE_OPTIONS_CB_APPEND_SPACE,809157755, svx_CheckBox_RID_OFAPAGE_AUTOCOMPLETE_OPTIONS_CB_AS_TIP,809157757, svx_CheckBox_RID_OFAPAGE_AUTOCOMPLETE_OPTIONS_CB_COLLECT,809157754, -svx_CheckBox_RID_OFAPAGE_AUTOCOMPLETE_OPTIONS_CB_KEEP_LIST,809157756, +svx_CheckBox_RID_OFAPAGE_AUTOCOMPLETE_OPTIONS_CB_REMOVE_LIST,809157756, svx_CheckBox_RID_OFAPAGE_AUTOCORR_EXCEPT_CB_AUTOABBREV,808911915, svx_CheckBox_RID_OFAPAGE_AUTOCORR_EXCEPT_CB_AUTOCAPS,808911916, svx_CheckBox_RID_OFAPAGE_AUTOCORR_QUOTE_CB_TYPO,808993803, @@ -8603,6 +8717,7 @@ svx_MetricBox_RID_SVXPAGE_CHAR_NAME_LB_EAST_SIZE,704636532, svx_MetricBox_RID_SVXPAGE_CHAR_NAME_LB_WEST_SIZE,704636522, svx_MetricBox_RID_SVXPAGE_CHAR_NAME_LB_WEST_SIZE_NOCJK,704636844, svx_MetricBox_RID_SVXPAGE_TABULATOR_ED_TABPOS,700753418, +svx_MetricField_OFA_TP_VIEW_MF_SELECTION,810523208, svx_MetricField_OFA_TP_VIEW_MF_WINDOWSIZE,810523158, svx_MetricField_RID_OFADLG_PRCNT_SET_ED_RIGHT_MARGIN,1345903204, svx_MetricField_RID_SVXDLG_BMPMASK_SP_1,3391953410, @@ -8758,6 +8873,7 @@ svx_MetricField_RID_SVX_MDLG_FONTWORK_CHARSPACING_MF_VALUE,1237899783, svx_ModalDialog_DLG_CHINESEDICTIONARY,1078673408, svx_ModalDialog_DLG_CHINESETRANSLATION,1078657024, svx_ModalDialog_DLG_DOCUMENTLINK,1346109440, +svx_ModalDialog_DLG_INS_ROW_COL,1240137728, svx_ModalDialog_MD_ICONCHANGE,1080606720, svx_ModalDialog_MD_INSERT_OBJECT_APPLET,1598177280, svx_ModalDialog_MD_INSERT_OBJECT_IFRAME,1598210048, @@ -8799,6 +8915,7 @@ svx_MultiListBox_RID_OFAPAGE_AUTOCOMPLETE_OPTIONS_LB_ENTRIES,809159812, svx_MultiListBox_RID_SVXPAGE_NUM_OPTIONS_LB_LEVEL,704302232, svx_MultiListBox_RID_SVXPAGE_NUM_POSITION_LB_LEVEL,704318616, svx_MultiListBox_RID_SVXTABPAGE_GALLERYTHEME_FILES_LBX_FOUND,706677761, +svx_NumericField_DLG_INS_ROW_COL_ED_COUNT,1240143874, svx_NumericField_MD_INSERT_OBJECT_IFRAME_NM_MARGINHEIGHT,1598216200, svx_NumericField_MD_INSERT_OBJECT_IFRAME_NM_MARGINWIDTH,1598216202, svx_NumericField_OFA_TP_MEMORY_ED_UNDO,811309068, @@ -9035,6 +9152,8 @@ svx_PushButton_RID_SVX_MDLG_HANGULHANJA_OPT_PB_HHO_DELETE,1237651971, svx_PushButton_RID_SVX_MDLG_HANGULHANJA_OPT_PB_HHO_EDIT,1237651970, svx_PushButton_RID_SVX_MDLG_HANGULHANJA_OPT_PB_HHO_NEW,1237651969, svx_PushButton_RID_SVX_MDLG_HANGULHANJA_PB_FIND,1237602817, +svx_RadioButton_DLG_INS_ROW_COL_CB_POS_AFTER,1240138251, +svx_RadioButton_DLG_INS_ROW_COL_CB_POS_BEFORE,1240138250, svx_RadioButton_MD_INSERT_OBJECT_IFRAME_RB_FRMBORDER_OFF,1598210580, svx_RadioButton_MD_INSERT_OBJECT_IFRAME_RB_FRMBORDER_ON,1598210578, svx_RadioButton_MD_INSERT_OBJECT_IFRAME_RB_SCROLLINGAUTO,1598210575, @@ -9819,7 +9938,6 @@ sw_MetricField_TP_TOX_ENTRY_MF_TABPOS,879155764, sw_ModalDialog_DLG_CHANGE_DB,1419591680, sw_ModalDialog_DLG_DBSELECTION,1435009024, sw_ModalDialog_DLG_INS_FOOTNOTE,1428652032, -sw_ModalDialog_DLG_INS_ROW_COL,1425227776, sw_ModalDialog_DLG_JAVAEDIT,1419608064, sw_ModalDialog_DLG_MAILMERGEWIZARD,1435058176, sw_MoreButton_DLG_AUTOFMT_TABLE_BTN_MORE,1425338984, @@ -9842,7 +9960,6 @@ sw_NumericField_DLG_INSERT_ABSTRACT_NF_PARA,1404835843, sw_NumericField_DLG_INSERT_TABLE_ED_COL,1425184772, sw_NumericField_DLG_INSERT_TABLE_ED_ROW,1425184773, sw_NumericField_DLG_INSERT_TABLE_NF_REPEAT_HEADER,1425184787, -sw_NumericField_DLG_INS_ROW_COL_ED_COUNT,1425233922, sw_NumericField_DLG_MAILMERGE_NF_FROM,1446615045, sw_NumericField_DLG_MAILMERGE_NF_TO,1446615047, sw_NumericField_DLG_MM_CREATEADDRESSLIST_NF_SETNO,1435244554, @@ -10022,8 +10139,6 @@ sw_RadioButton_DLG_INS_FOOTNOTE_RB_NUMBER_AUTO,1428652545, sw_RadioButton_DLG_INS_FOOTNOTE_RB_NUMBER_CHAR,1428652546, sw_RadioButton_DLG_INS_FOOTNOTE_RB_TYPE_ENDNOTE,1428652552, sw_RadioButton_DLG_INS_FOOTNOTE_RB_TYPE_FTN,1428652551, -sw_RadioButton_DLG_INS_ROW_COL_CB_POS_AFTER,1425228299, -sw_RadioButton_DLG_INS_ROW_COL_CB_POS_BEFORE,1425228298, sw_RadioButton_DLG_JAVAEDIT_RB_EDIT,1419608588, sw_RadioButton_DLG_JAVAEDIT_RB_URL,1419608595, sw_RadioButton_DLG_MAILMERGE_RB_ALL,1446609410, diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/01040000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/01040000.xhp index e6084ada87..42123c8cc2 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/01040000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/01040000.xhp @@ -1,8 +1,8 @@ - - + + + - - -Event-Driven Macros -/text/sbasic/shared/01040000.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe -dedr: fixed #i30797# - - - -
+ + Event-Driven Macros + /text/sbasic/shared/01040000.xhp + + + +
deleting; macro assignments to events -macros; assigning to events -assigning macros to events -events; assigning macros + macros; assigning to events + assigning macros to events + events; assigning macros -Event-Driven Macros -This section describes how to assign Basic programs to program events. -
-You can automatically execute a macro when a specified software event occurs by assigning the desired macro to the event. The following table provides an overview of program events and at what point an assigned macro is executed. - - - -Event - - -An assigned macro is executed... - - - - -Program Start - - -... after a $[officename] application is started. - - - - -Program End - - -...before a $[officename] application is terminated. - - - - -Create Document - - -...after a new document is created with File - New or with the New icon. - - - - -Open Document - - -...after a document is opened with File - Open or with the Open icon. - - - - -Save Document As - - -...before a document is saved under a specified name (with File - Save As, or with File - Save or the Save icon, if a document name has not yet been specified). - - - - -Document has been saved as - - -... after a document was saved under a specified name (with File - Save As, or with File - Save or with the Save icon, if a document name has not yet been specified). - - - - -Save Document - - -...before a document is saved with File - Save or the Save icon, provided that a document name has already been specified. - - - - -Document has been saved - - -...after a document is saved with File - Save or the Save icon, provided that a document name has already been specified. - - - - -Close Document - - -...before a document is closed. - - - - -Document is being closed - - -...after a document was closed. Note that the "Save Document" event may also occur when the document is saved before closing. - - - - -Activate Document - - -...after a document is brought to the foreground. - - - - -Deactivate Document - - -...after another document is brought to the foreground. - - - - -Print Document - - -...after the Print dialog is closed, but before the actual print process begins. - - - - -JavaScript run-time error - - -...when a JavaScript run-time error occurs. - - - - -Print Mail Merge - - -...after the Print dialog is closed, but before the actual print process begins. This event occurs for each copy printed. - - - - -Change of the page count - - -...when the page count changes. - - - - -Message received - - -...if a message was received. - - -
+Event-Driven Macros + This section describes how to assign Basic programs to program events. +
+ You can automatically execute a macro when a specified software event occurs by assigning the desired macro to the event. The following table provides an overview of program events and at what point an assigned macro is executed. + + + + Event + + + An assigned macro is executed... + + + + + Program Start + + + ... after a $[officename] application is started. + + + + + Program End + + + ...before a $[officename] application is terminated. + + + + + Create Document + + + ...after a new document is created with File - New or with the New icon. + + + + + Open Document + + + ...after a document is opened with File - Open or with the Open icon. + + + + + Save Document As + + + ...before a document is saved under a specified name (with File - Save As, or with File - Save or the Save icon, if a document name has not yet been specified). + + + + + Document has been saved as + + + ... after a document was saved under a specified name (with File - Save As, or with File - Save or with the Save icon, if a document name has not yet been specified). + + + + + Save Document + + + ...before a document is saved with File - Save or the Save icon, provided that a document name has already been specified. + + + + + Document has been saved + + + ...after a document is saved with File - Save or the Save icon, provided that a document name has already been specified. + + + + + Document is closingi104852 + + + ...before a document is closed. + + + + + Document closed + + + ...after a document was closed. Note that the "Save Document" event may also occur when the document is saved before closing. + + + + + Activate Document + + + ...after a document is brought to the foreground. + + + + + Deactivate Document + + + ...after another document is brought to the foreground. + + + + + Print Document + + + ...after the Print dialog is closed, but before the actual print process begins. + + + + + JavaScript run-time error + + + ...when a JavaScript run-time error occurs. + + + + + Print Mail Merge + + + ...after the Print dialog is closed, but before the actual print process begins. This event occurs for each copy printed. + + + + + Change of the page count + + + ...when the page count changes. + + + + + Message received + + + ...if a message was received. + + +
-Assigning a Macro to an Event - - -Choose Tools - Customize and click the Events tab. - - -Select whether you want the assignment to be globally valid or just valid in the current document in the Save In listbox. - - -Select the event from the Event list. - - -Click Macro and select the macro to be assigned to the selected event. - - -Click OK to assign the macro. - - -Click OK to close the dialog. - - -Removing the Assignment of a Macro to an Event - - -Choose Tools - Customize and click the Events tab. - - -Select whether you want to remove a global assignment or an assignment that is just valid in the current document by selecting the option in the Save In listbox. - - -Select the event that contains the assignment to be removed from the Event list. - - -Click Remove. - - -Click OK to close the dialog. - - - - + Assigning a Macro to an Event + + + Choose Tools - Customize and click the Events tab. + + + Select whether you want the assignment to be globally valid or just valid in the current document in the Save In listbox. + + + Select the event from the Event list. + + + Click Macro and select the macro to be assigned to the selected event. + + + Click OK to assign the macro. + + + Click OK to close the dialog. + + + Removing the Assignment of a Macro to an Event + + + Choose Tools - Customize and click the Events tab. + + + Select whether you want to remove a global assignment or an assignment that is just valid in the current document by selecting the option in the Save In listbox. + + + Select the event that contains the assignment to be removed from the Event list. + + + Click Remove. + + + Click OK to close the dialog. + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/02140000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/02140000.xhp index 099e15ed31..3cec3cfc64 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/02140000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/02140000.xhp @@ -62,8 +62,8 @@ Series - Filling cells using context menus: - +Filling cells using context menus: + Call the context menu when positioned in a cell and choose Selection List. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04050000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04050000.xhp index 9dfb952df9..78ad2f2957 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04050000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04050000.xhp @@ -42,7 +42,6 @@ sheets;creating -sheets;inserting diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060101.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060101.xhp index acbe5c86d1..30bbd09e1c 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060101.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060101.xhp @@ -79,28 +79,28 @@ - Name - +Name + - Grade - +Grade + - Age - +Age + - Distance to School - +Distance to School + - Weight - +Weight + @@ -109,28 +109,28 @@ - Andy - +Andy + - 3 - +3 + - 9 - +9 + - 150 - +150 + - 40 - +40 + @@ -139,28 +139,28 @@ - Betty - +Betty + - 4 - +4 + - 10 - +10 + - 1000 - +1000 + - 42 - +42 + @@ -169,28 +169,28 @@ - Charles - +Charles + - 3 - +3 + - 10 - +10 + - 300 - +300 + - 51 - +51 + @@ -199,28 +199,28 @@ - Daniel - +Daniel + - 5 - +5 + - 11 - +11 + - 1200 - +1200 + - 48 - +48 + @@ -229,28 +229,28 @@ - Eva - +Eva + - 2 - +2 + - 8 - +8 + - 650 - +650 + - 33 - +33 + @@ -259,31 +259,31 @@ - F - rank - +F +rank + - 2 - +2 + - 7 - +7 + - 3 - 00 - +3 +00 + - 4 - 2 - +4 +2 + @@ -292,28 +292,28 @@ - Greta - +Greta + - 1 - +1 + - 7 - +7 + - 200 - +200 + - 36 - +36 + @@ -322,28 +322,28 @@ - Harry - +Harry + - 3 - +3 + - 9 - +9 + - 1200 - +1200 + - 44 - +44 + @@ -352,28 +352,28 @@ - Irene - +Irene + - 2 - +2 + - 8 - +8 + - 1000 - +1000 + - 42 - +42 + @@ -412,28 +412,28 @@ - Name - +Name + - Grade - +Grade + - Age - +Age + - Distance to School - +Distance to School + - Weight - +Weight + @@ -448,8 +448,8 @@ - >600 - +>600 + @@ -475,13 +475,13 @@ - DCOUNT - +DCOUNT + - 5 - +5 + @@ -497,12 +497,12 @@ oldref="192">Database Function Parameters: The following items are the parameter definitions for all database functions: - Database is the cell range defining the database. +Database is the cell range defining the database. - DatabaseField specifies the column where the function operates on after the search criteria of the first parameter is applied and the data rows are selected. It is not related to the search criteria itself. Use the number 0 to specify the whole data range. To reference a column by means of the column header name, place quotation marks around the header name. +DatabaseField specifies the column where the function operates on after the search criteria of the first parameter is applied and the data rows are selected. It is not related to the search criteria itself. Use the number 0 to specify the whole data range. To reference a column by means of the column header name, place quotation marks around the header name. - SearchCriteria is the cell range containing search criteria. If you write several criteria in one row they are connected by AND. If you write the criteria in different rows they are connected by OR. Empty cells in the search criteria range will be ignored. +SearchCriteria is the cell range containing search criteria. If you write several criteria in one row they are connected by AND. If you write the criteria in different rows they are connected by OR. Empty cells in the search criteria range will be ignored. Choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - Calculate to define how $[officename] Calc acts when searching for identical entries. See also the Wiki page about Conditional Counting and Summation. @@ -519,12 +519,12 @@ oldref="90">Syntax DCOUNT(Database; DatabaseField; SearchCriteria) For the DatabaseField parameter you can enter a cell to specify the column, or enter the number 0 for the entire database. The parameter cannot be empty. - + Example In the example above (scroll up, please), we want to know how many children have to travel more than 600 meters to school. The result is to be stored in cell B16. Set the cursor in cell B16. Enter the formula =DCOUNT(A1:E10;0;A13:E14) in B16. The Function Wizard helps you to input ranges. - Database is the range of data to be evaluated, including its headers: in this case A1:E10. DatabaseField specifies the column for the search criteria: in this case, the whole database. SearchCriteria is the range where you can enter the search parameters: in this case, A13:E14. +Database is the range of data to be evaluated, including its headers: in this case A1:E10. DatabaseField specifies the column for the search criteria: in this case, the whole database. SearchCriteria is the range where you can enter the search parameters: in this case, A13:E14. To learn how many children in second grade are over 7 years of age, delete the entry >600 in cell D14 and enter 2 in cell B14 under Grade, and enter >7 in cell C14 to the right. The result is 2. Two children are in second grade and over 7 years of age. As both criteria are in the same row, they are connected by AND.
@@ -563,13 +563,13 @@ oldref="108">Example In the above example (scroll up, please), we want to determine what grade a child is in, whose name was entered in cell A14. The formula is entered in cell B16 and differs slightly from the earlier examples because only one column (one database field) can be entered for DatabaseField. Enter the following formula: - =DGET(A1:E10;"Grade";A13:E14) - +=DGET(A1:E10;"Grade";A13:E14) + Enter the name Frank in A14, and you see the result 2. Frank is in second grade. Enter "Age" instead of "Grade" and you will get Frank's age. Or enter the value 11 in cell C14 only, and delete the other entries in this row. Edit the formula in B16 as follows: - =DGET(A1:E10;"Name";A13:E14) - +=DGET(A1:E10;"Name";A13:E14) + Instead of the grade, the name is queried. The answer appears at once: Daniel is the only child aged 11.
@@ -590,8 +590,8 @@ oldref="119">Example To find out how much the heaviest child in each grade weighed in the above example (scroll up, please), enter the following formula in B16: - =DMAX(A1:E10;"Weight";A13:E14) - +=DMAX(A1:E10;"Weight";A13:E14) + Under Grade, enter 1, 2, 3, and so on, one after the other. After entering a grade number, the weight of the heaviest child in that grade appears.
@@ -612,8 +612,8 @@ oldref="127">Example To find the shortest distance to school for the children in each grade in the above example (scroll up, please), enter the following formula in B16: - =DMIN(A1:E10;"Distance to School";A13:E14) - +=DMIN(A1:E10;"Distance to School";A13:E14) + In row 14, under Grade, enter 1, 2, 3, and so on, one after the other. The shortest distance to school for each grade appears.
@@ -634,8 +634,8 @@ oldref="135">Example To find the average weight of all children of the same age in the above example (scroll up, please), enter the following formula in B16: - =DAVERAGE(A1:E10;"Weight";A13:E14) - +=DAVERAGE(A1:E10;"Weight";A13:E14) + In row 14, under Age, enter 7, 8, 9, and so on, one after the other. The average weight of all children of the same age appears.
@@ -672,8 +672,8 @@ oldref="149">Example To find the standard deviation of the weight for all children of the same age in the example (scroll up, please), enter the following formula in B16: - =DSTDEV(A1:E10;"Weight";A13:E14) - +=DSTDEV(A1:E10;"Weight";A13:E14) + In row 14, under Age, enter 7, 8, 9, and so on, one after the other. The result shown is the standard deviation of the weight of all children of this age.
@@ -693,8 +693,8 @@ oldref="157">Example To find the standard deviation of the weight for all children of the same age at Joe's birthday party (scroll up, please), enter the following formula in B16: - =DSTDEVP(A1:E10;"Weight";A13:E14) - +=DSTDEVP(A1:E10;"Weight";A13:E14) + In row 14, under Age, enter 7, 8, 9, and so on, one after the other. The result is the standard deviation of the weight for all same-aged children whose weight was checked.
@@ -715,8 +715,8 @@ oldref="165">Example To find the length of the combined distance to school of all children at Joe's birthday party (scroll up, please) who are in second grade, enter the following formula in B16: - =DSUM(A1:E10;"Distance to School";A13:E14) - +=DSUM(A1:E10;"Distance to School";A13:E14) + Enter 2 in row 14 under Grade. The sum (1950) of the distances to school of all the children who are in second grade is displayed.
@@ -736,8 +736,8 @@ oldref="174">Example To find the variance of the weight of all children of the same age of the above example (scroll up, please), enter the following formula in B16: - =DVAR(A1:E10;"Weight";A13:E14) - +=DVAR(A1:E10;"Weight";A13:E14) + In row 14, under Age, enter 7, 8, 9, and so on, one after the other. You will see as a result the variance of the weight values for all children of this age.
@@ -757,8 +757,8 @@ oldref="182">Example To find the variance of the weight for all children of the same age at Joe's birthday party (scroll up, please), enter the following formula in B16: - =DVARP(A1:E10;"Weight";A13:E14) - +=DVARP(A1:E10;"Weight";A13:E14) + In row 14, under Age, enter 7, 8, 9, and so on, one after the other. The variance of the weight values for all children of this age attending Joe's birthday party appears.
diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060103.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060103.xhp index dcf75321b0..dd0f670eec 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060103.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060103.xhp @@ -62,17 +62,17 @@ oldref="361">Syntax AMORDEGRC(Cost; DatePurchased; FirstPeriod; Salvage; Period; Rate; Basis) - Cost is the acquisition costs. +Cost is the acquisition costs. - DatePurchased is the date of acquisition. +DatePurchased is the date of acquisition. - FirstPeriod is the end date of the first settlement period. +FirstPeriod is the end date of the first settlement period. - Salvage is the salvage value of the capital asset at the end of the depreciable life. +Salvage is the salvage value of the capital asset at the end of the depreciable life. - Period is the settlement period to be considered. +Period is the settlement period to be considered. - Rate is the rate of depreciation. +Rate is the rate of depreciation.
@@ -87,17 +87,17 @@ oldref="371">Syntax AMORLINC(Cost; DatePurchased; FirstPeriod; Salvage; Period; Rate; Basis) - Cost means the acquisition costs. +Cost means the acquisition costs. - DatePurchased is the date of acquisition. +DatePurchased is the date of acquisition. - FirstPeriod is the end date of the first settlement period. +FirstPeriod is the end date of the first settlement period. - Salvage is the salvage value of the capital asset at the end of the depreciable life. +Salvage is the salvage value of the capital asset at the end of the depreciable life. - Period is the settlement period to be considered. +Period is the settlement period to be considered. - Rate is the rate of depreciation. +Rate is the rate of depreciation.
@@ -113,17 +113,17 @@ oldref="337">Syntax ACCRINT(Issue; FirstInterest; Settlement; Rate; Par; Frequency; Basis) - Issue is the issue date of the security. +Issue is the issue date of the security. - FirstInterest is the first interest date of the security. +FirstInterest is the first interest date of the security. - Settlement is the date at which the interest accrued up until then is to be calculated. +Settlement is the date at which the interest accrued up until then is to be calculated. - Rate is the annual nominal rate of interest (coupon interest rate) +Rate is the annual nominal rate of interest (coupon interest rate) - Par is the par value of the security. +Par is the par value of the security. - Frequency is the number of interest payments per year (1, 2 or 4). +Frequency is the number of interest payments per year (1, 2 or 4). Example @@ -143,13 +143,13 @@ oldref="350">Syntax ACCRINTM(Issue; Settlement; Rate; Par; Basis) - Issue is the issue date of the security. +Issue is the issue date of the security. - Settlement is the date at which the interest accrued up until then is to be calculated. +Settlement is the date at which the interest accrued up until then is to be calculated. - Rate is the annual nominal rate of interest (coupon interest rate). +Rate is the annual nominal rate of interest (coupon interest rate). - Par is the par value of the security. +Par is the par value of the security. Example @@ -169,13 +169,13 @@ oldref="392">Syntax RECEIVED("Settlement"; "Maturity"; Investment; Discount; Basis) - Settlement is the date of purchase of the security. +Settlement is the date of purchase of the security. - Maturity is the date on which the security matures (expires). +Maturity is the date on which the security matures (expires). - Investment is the purchase sum. +Investment is the purchase sum. - Discount is the percentage discount on acquisition of the security. +Discount is the percentage discount on acquisition of the security. Example @@ -197,23 +197,23 @@ Syntax PV(Rate; NPer; Pmt; FV; Type) - Rate defines the interest rate per period. +Rate defines the interest rate per period. - NPer is the total number of periods (payment period). +NPer is the total number of periods (payment period). - Pmt is the regular payment made per period. +Pmt is the regular payment made per period. - FV (optional) defines the future value remaining after the final installment has been made. +FV (optional) defines the future value remaining after the final installment has been made. - Type (optional) denotes due date for payments. Type = 1 means due at the beginning of a period and Type = 0 (default) means due at the end of the period. +Type (optional) denotes due date for payments. Type = 1 means due at the beginning of a period and Type = 0 (default) means due at the end of the period. - - + + Example What is the present value of an investment, if 500 currency units are paid out monthly and the annual interest rate is 8%? The payment period is 48 months and 20,000 currency units are to remain at the end of the payment period. - =PV(8%/12;48;500;20000) = -35,019.37 currency units. Under the named conditions, you must deposit 35,019.37 currency units today, if you want to receive 500 currency units per month for 48 months and have 20,000 currency units left over at the end. Cross-checking shows that 48 x 500 currency units + 20,000 currency units = 44,000 currency units. The difference between this amount and the 35,000 currency units deposited represents the interest paid. +=PV(8%/12;48;500;20000) = -35,019.37 currency units. Under the named conditions, you must deposit 35,019.37 currency units today, if you want to receive 500 currency units per month for 48 months and have 20,000 currency units left over at the end. Cross-checking shows that 48 x 500 currency units + 20,000 currency units = 44,000 currency units. The difference between this amount and the 35,000 currency units deposited represents the interest paid. If you enter references instead of these values into the formula, you can calculate any number of "If-then" scenarios. Please note: references to constants must be defined as absolute references. Examples of this type of application are found under the depreciation functions.
@@ -231,18 +231,18 @@ oldref="22">Syntax SYD(Cost; Salvage; Life; Period) - Cost is the initial cost of an asset. +Cost is the initial cost of an asset. - Salvage is the value of an asset after depreciation. +Salvage is the value of an asset after depreciation. - Life is the period fixing the time span over which an asset is depreciated. +Life is the period fixing the time span over which an asset is depreciated. - Period defines the period for which the depreciation is to be calculated. +Period defines the period for which the depreciation is to be calculated. Example A video system initially costing 50,000 currency units is to be depreciated annually for the next 5 years. The salvage value is to be 10,000 currency units. You want to calculate depreciation for the first year. - =SYD(50000;10000;5;1)=13,333.33 currency units. The depreciation amount for the first year is 13,333.33 currency units. +=SYD(50000;10000;5;1)=13,333.33 currency units. The depreciation amount for the first year is 13,333.33 currency units. To have an overview of depreciation rates per period, it is best to define a depreciation table. By entering the different depreciation formulas available in %PRODUCTNAME Calc next to each other, you can see which depreciation form is the most appropriate. Enter the table as follows: @@ -250,28 +250,28 @@ - A - +A + - B - +B + - C - +C + - D - +D + - E - +E + @@ -280,28 +280,28 @@ - Initial Cost - +Initial Cost + - Salvage Value - +Salvage Value + - Useful Life - +Useful Life + - Time Period - +Time Period + - Deprec. SYD - +Deprec. SYD + @@ -310,28 +310,28 @@ - 50,000 currency units - +50,000 currency units + - 10,000 currency units - +10,000 currency units + - 5 - +5 + - 1 - +1 + - 13,333.33 currency units - +13,333.33 currency units + @@ -346,8 +346,8 @@ - 2 - +2 + @@ -367,13 +367,13 @@ - 3 - +3 + - 8,000.00 currency units - +8,000.00 currency units + @@ -388,13 +388,13 @@ - 4 - +4 + - 5,333.33 currency units - +5,333.33 currency units + @@ -409,13 +409,13 @@ - 5 - +5 + - 2,666.67 currency units - +2,666.67 currency units + @@ -430,13 +430,13 @@ - 6 - +6 + - 0.00 currency units - +0.00 currency units + @@ -451,8 +451,8 @@ - 7 - +7 + @@ -469,8 +469,8 @@ - 8 - +8 + @@ -487,8 +487,8 @@ - 9 - +9 + @@ -505,8 +505,8 @@ - 10 - +10 + @@ -532,8 +532,8 @@ - >0 - +>0 + @@ -541,26 +541,26 @@ - Total - +Total + - 40,000.00 currency units - +40,000.00 currency units +
The formula in E2 is as follows: - =SYD($A$2;$B$2;$C$2;D2) - +=SYD($A$2;$B$2;$C$2;D2) + This formula is duplicated in column E down to E11 (select E2, then drag down the lower right corner with the mouse). Cell E13 contains the formula used to check the total of the depreciation amounts. It uses the SUMIF function as the negative values in E8:E11 must not be considered. The condition >0 is contained in cell A13. The formula in E13 is as follows: - =SUMIF(E2:E11;A13) - +=SUMIF(E2:E11;A13) + Now view the depreciation for a 10 year period, or at a salvage value of 1 currency unit, or enter a different initial cost, and so on.
@@ -576,13 +576,13 @@ oldref="381">Syntax DISC("Settlement"; "Maturity"; Price; Redemption; Basis) - Settlement is the date of purchase of the security. +Settlement is the date of purchase of the security. - Maturity is the date on which the security matures (expires). +Maturity is the date on which the security matures (expires). - Price is the price of the security per 100 currency units of par value. +Price is the price of the security per 100 currency units of par value. - Redemption is the redemption value of the security per 100 currency units of par value. +Redemption is the redemption value of the security per 100 currency units of par value. Example @@ -604,15 +604,15 @@ oldref="404">Syntax DURATION_ADD("Settlement"; "Maturity"; Coupon; Yield; Frequency; Basis) - Settlement is the date of purchase of the security. +Settlement is the date of purchase of the security. - Maturity is the date on which the security matures (expires). +Maturity is the date on which the security matures (expires). - Coupon is the annual coupon interest rate (nominal rate of interest) +Coupon is the annual coupon interest rate (nominal rate of interest) - Yield is the annual yield of the security. +Yield is the annual yield of the security. - Frequency is the number of interest payments per year (1, 2 or 4). +Frequency is the number of interest payments per year (1, 2 or 4). Example @@ -636,14 +636,14 @@ oldref="91">Syntax EFFECTIVE(Nom; P) - Nom is the nominal interest. +Nom is the nominal interest. - P is the number of interest payment periods per year. +P is the number of interest payment periods per year. Example If the annual nominal interest rate is 9.75% and four interest calculation periods are defined, what is the actual interest rate (effective rate)? - =EFFECTIVE(9.75%;4) = 10.11% The annual effective rate is therefore 10.11%. +=EFFECTIVE(9.75%;4) = 10.11% The annual effective rate is therefore 10.11%.
effective interest rates @@ -658,9 +658,9 @@ oldref="416">Syntax EFFECT_ADD(NominalRate; NPerY) - NominalRate is the annual nominal rate of interest. +NominalRate is the annual nominal rate of interest. - NPerY is the number of interest payments per year. +NPerY is the number of interest payments per year. Example What is the effective annual rate of interest for a 5.25% nominal rate and quarterly payment. @@ -682,15 +682,15 @@ oldref="102">Syntax DDB(Cost; Salvage; Life; Period; Factor) - Cost fixes the initial cost of an asset. +Cost fixes the initial cost of an asset. - Salvage fixes the value of an asset at the end of its life. +Salvage fixes the value of an asset at the end of its life. Life is the number of periods (for example, years or months) defining how long the asset is to be used. Period states the period for which the value is to be calculated. - Factor (optional) is the factor by which depreciation decreases. If a value is not entered, the default is factor 2. +Factor (optional) is the factor by which depreciation decreases. If a value is not entered, the default is factor 2. Example A computer system with an initial cost of 75,000 currency units is to be depreciated monthly over 5 years. The value at the end of the depreciation is to be 1 currency unit. The factor is 2. @@ -712,20 +712,20 @@ oldref="116">Syntax DB(Cost; Salvage; Life; Period; Month) - Cost is the initial cost of an asset. +Cost is the initial cost of an asset. - Salvage is the value of an asset at the end of the depreciation. +Salvage is the value of an asset at the end of the depreciation. - Life defines the period over which an asset is depreciated. +Life defines the period over which an asset is depreciated. - Period is the length of each period. The length must be entered in the same date unit as the depreciation period. +Period is the length of each period. The length must be entered in the same date unit as the depreciation period. - Month (optional) denotes the number of months for the first year of depreciation. If an entry is not defined, 12 is used as the default. +Month (optional) denotes the number of months for the first year of depreciation. If an entry is not defined, 12 is used as the default. Example A computer system with an initial cost of 25,000 currency units is to be depreciated over a three year period. The salvage value is to be 1,000 currency units. One period is 30 days. - =DB(25000;1000;36;1;6) = 1,075.00 currency units +=DB(25000;1000;36;1;6) = 1,075.00 currency units The fixed-declining depreciation of the computer system is 1,075.00 currency units.
@@ -741,9 +741,9 @@ oldref="130">Syntax IRR(Values; Guess) - Values represents an array containing the values. +Values represents an array containing the values. - Guess (optional) is the estimated value. An iterative method is used to calculate the internal rate of return. If you can provide only few values, you should provide an initial guess to enable the iteration. +Guess (optional) is the estimated value. An iterative method is used to calculate the internal rate of return. If you can provide only few values, you should provide an initial guess to enable the iteration. Example Under the assumption that cell contents are A1=-10000, A2=3500, A3=7600 and A4=1000, the formula =IRR(A1:A4) gives a result of 80.24%. @@ -761,18 +761,18 @@ oldref="316">Syntax ISPMT(Rate; Period; TotalPeriods; Invest) - Rate sets the periodic interest rate. +Rate sets the periodic interest rate. - Period is the number of installments for calculation of interest. +Period is the number of installments for calculation of interest. - TotalPeriods is the total number of installment periods. +TotalPeriods is the total number of installment periods. - Invest is the amount of the investment. +Invest is the amount of the investment. Example For a credit amount of 120,000 currency units with a two-year term and monthly installments, at a yearly interest rate of 12% the level of interest after 1.5 years is required. - =ISPMT(1%;18;24;120000) = -300 currency units. The monthly interest after 1.5 years amounts to 300 currency units. +=ISPMT(1%;18;24;120000) = -300 currency units. The monthly interest after 1.5 years amounts to 300 currency units.
Financial Functions Part Two diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060106.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060106.xhp index 52357b0a82..0774564c79 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060106.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060106.xhp @@ -3,1458 +3,1425 @@ - +* +* DO NOT ALTER OR REMOVE COPYRIGHT NOTICES OR THIS FILE HEADER. +* +* Copyright 2008 by Sun Microsystems, Inc. +* +* OpenOffice.org - a multi-platform office productivity suite +* +* $RCSfile: soffice2xmlhelp.xsl,v $ +* $Revision: 1.12 $ +* +* This file is part of OpenOffice.org. +* +* OpenOffice.org is free software: you can redistribute it and/or modify +* it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public License version 3 +* only, as published by the Free Software Foundation. +* +* OpenOffice.org is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, +* but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of +* MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the +* GNU Lesser General Public License version 3 for more details +* (a copy is included in the LICENSE file that accompanied this code). +* +* You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public License +* version 3 along with OpenOffice.org. If not, see +* +* for a copy of the LGPLv3 License. +* +************************************************************************ +--> - - Mathematical Functions - /text/scalc/01/04060106.xhp - - - + +Mathematical Functions +/text/scalc/01/04060106.xhp + + + mathematical functions - Function Wizard; mathematical - functions; mathematical functions - trigonometric functions -mw added "trigonometric..." +Function Wizard; mathematical +functions; mathematical functions +trigonometric functions + Mathematical Functions - This category contains the Mathematical functions for Calc. +This category contains the Mathematical functions for Calc. To open the Function Wizard, choose Insert - Function.
ABS function - absolute values - values;absolute +absolute values +values;absolute mw added two entries ABS - Returns the absolute value of a number. - Syntax - ABS(Number) - - Number is the number whose absolute value is to be calculated. The absolute value of a number is its value without the +/- sign. - Example - - =ABS(-56) returns 56. - - =ABS(12) returns 12. - - =ABS(0) returns 0.see also SIGN -
-
+oldref="33">ABS +Returns the absolute value of a number. +Syntax +ABS(Number) +Number is the number whose absolute value is to be calculated. The absolute value of a number is its value without the +/- sign. +Example + +=ABS(-56) returns 56. + +=ABS(12) returns 12. + +=ABS(0) returns 0.see also SIGN +
+
COUNTBLANK function - counting;empty cells - empty cells;counting +counting;empty cells +empty cells;counting mw added two entries COUNTBLANK - Returns the number of empty cells. - Syntax - COUNTBLANK(Range) - Returns the number of empty cells in the cell range Range. - Example - - =COUNTBLANK(A1:B2) returns 4 if cells A1, A2, B1, and B2 are all empty.see also COUNTIF -
-
+oldref="42">COUNTBLANK +Returns the number of empty cells. +Syntax +COUNTBLANK(Range) + Returns the number of empty cells in the cell range Range. +Example + +=COUNTBLANK(A1:B2) returns 4 if cells A1, A2, B1, and B2 are all empty.see also COUNTIF +
+
ACOS function ACOS - Returns the inverse trigonometric cosine of a number. - Syntax - ACOS(Number) - This function returns the inverse trigonometric cosine of Number, that is the angle (in radians) whose cosine is Number. The angle returned is between 0 and PI. - To return the angle in degrees, use the DEGREES function. - Example - - =ACOS(-1) returns 3.14159265358979 (PI radians) - - =DEGREES(ACOS(0.5)) returns 60. The cosine of 60 degrees is 0.5.see also COS, SIN, TAN, COT, -ASIN, ATAN, ATAN2, ACOT -
-
+oldref="50">ACOS +Returns the inverse trigonometric cosine of a number. +Syntax +ACOS(Number) + This function returns the inverse trigonometric cosine of Number, that is the angle (in radians) whose cosine is Number. The angle returned is between 0 and PI. +To return the angle in degrees, use the DEGREES function. +Example + +=ACOS(-1) returns 3.14159265358979 (PI radians) + +=DEGREES(ACOS(0.5)) returns 60. The cosine of 60 degrees is 0.5.see also COS, SIN, TAN, COT, ASIN, ATAN, ATAN2, ACOT +
+
ACOSH function ACOSH - Returns the inverse hyperbolic cosine of a number. - Syntax - ACOSH(Number) - This function returns the inverse hyperbolic cosine of Number, that is the number whose hyperbolic cosine is Number. - Number must be greater than or equal to 1. - Example - - =ACOSH(1) returns 0. - - =ACOSH(COSH(4)) returns 4.see also ASINH, ATANH, ACOTH, -COSH, SINH, TANH, COTH +oldref="60">ACOSH +Returns the inverse hyperbolic cosine of a number. +Syntax +ACOSH(Number) + This function returns the inverse hyperbolic cosine of Number, that is the number whose hyperbolic cosine is Number. + Number must be greater than or equal to 1. +Example + +=ACOSH(1) returns 0. + +=ACOSH(COSH(4)) returns 4.see also ASINH, ATANH, ACOTH, COSH, SINH, TANH, COTH
-
+
ACOT function ACOT - Returns the inverse cotangent (the arccotangent) of the given number. - Syntax - ACOT(Number) - This function returns the inverse trigonometric cotangent of Number, that is the angle (in radians) whose cotangent is Number. The angle returned is between 0 and PI. - To return the angle in degrees, use the DEGREES function. - Example - - =ACOT(1) returns 0.785398163397448 (PI/4 radians). - - =DEGREES(ACOT(1)) returns 45. The tangent of 45 degrees is 1. see also COS, SIN, TAN, COT, -ACOS, ASIN, ATAN, ATAN2 -
-
+oldref="70">ACOT +Returns the inverse cotangent (the arccotangent) of the given number. +Syntax +ACOT(Number) + This function returns the inverse trigonometric cotangent of Number, that is the angle (in radians) whose cotangent is Number. The angle returned is between 0 and PI. +To return the angle in degrees, use the DEGREES function. +Example + +=ACOT(1) returns 0.785398163397448 (PI/4 radians). + +=DEGREES(ACOT(1)) returns 45. The tangent of 45 degrees is 1. see also COS, SIN, TAN, COT, ACOS, ASIN, ATAN, ATAN2 +
+
ACOTH function ACOTH - Returns the inverse hyperbolic cotangent of the given number. - Syntax - ACOTH(Number) - This function returns the inverse hyperbolic cotangent of Number, that is the number whose hyperbolic cotangent is Number. - An error results if Number is between -1 and 1 inclusive. - Example - - =ACOTH(1.1) returns inverse hyperbolic cotangent of 1.1, approximately 1.52226.see also ACOSH, ASINH, ATANH, -COSH, SINH, TANH, COTH +oldref="80">ACOTH +Returns the inverse hyperbolic cotangent of the given number. +Syntax +ACOTH(Number) + This function returns the inverse hyperbolic cotangent of Number, that is the number whose hyperbolic cotangent is Number. +An error results if Number is between -1 and 1 inclusive. +Example + +=ACOTH(1.1) returns inverse hyperbolic cotangent of 1.1, approximately 1.52226.see also ACOSH, ASINH, ATANH, COSH, SINH, TANH, COTH
-
+
ASIN function ASIN - Returns the inverse trigonometric sine of a number. - Syntax - ASIN(Number) - This function returns the inverse trigonometric sine of Number, that is the angle (in radians) whose sine is Number. The angle returned is between -PI/2 and +PI/2. - To return the angle in degrees, use the DEGREES function. - Example - - =ASIN(0) returns 0. - - =ASIN(1) returns 1.5707963267949 (PI/2 radians). - - =DEGREES(ASIN(0.5)) returns 30. The sine of 30 degrees is 0.5.see also COS, SIN, TAN, COT, -ACOS, ATAN, ATAN2, ACOT -
-
+oldref="90">ASIN +Returns the inverse trigonometric sine of a number. +Syntax +ASIN(Number) + This function returns the inverse trigonometric sine of Number, that is the angle (in radians) whose sine is Number. The angle returned is between -PI/2 and +PI/2. +To return the angle in degrees, use the DEGREES function. +Example + +=ASIN(0) returns 0. + +=ASIN(1) returns 1.5707963267949 (PI/2 radians). + +=DEGREES(ASIN(0.5)) returns 30. The sine of 30 degrees is 0.5.see also COS, SIN, TAN, COT, ACOS, ATAN, ATAN2, ACOT +
+
ASINH function ASINH - Returns the inverse hyperbolic sine of a number. - Syntax - ASINH(Number) - This function returns the inverse hyperbolic sine of Number, that is the number whose hyperbolic sine is Number. - Example - - =ASINH(-90) returns approximately -5.1929877. - - =ASINH(SINH(4)) returns 4.see also ACOSH, ATANH, ACOTH, +oldref="100">ASINH +Returns the inverse hyperbolic sine of a number. +Syntax +ASINH(Number) + This function returns the inverse hyperbolic sine of Number, that is the number whose hyperbolic sine is Number. +Example + +=ASINH(-90) returns approximately -5.1929877. + +=ASINH(SINH(4)) returns 4.see also ACOSH, ATANH, ACOTH, COSH, SINH, TANH, COTH
-
+
ATAN function ATAN - Returns the inverse trigonometric tangent of a number. - Syntax - ATAN(Number) - This function returns the inverse trigonometric tangent of Number, that is the angle (in radians) whose tangent is Number. The angle returned is between -PI/2 and PI/2. - To return the angle in degrees, use the DEGREES function. - Example - - =ATAN(1) returns 0.785398163397448 (PI/4 radians). - - =DEGREES(ATAN(1)) returns 45. The tangent of 45 degrees is 1.see also COS, SIN, TAN, COT, +oldref="110">ATAN +Returns the inverse trigonometric tangent of a number. +Syntax +ATAN(Number) + This function returns the inverse trigonometric tangent of Number, that is the angle (in radians) whose tangent is Number. The angle returned is between -PI/2 and PI/2. +To return the angle in degrees, use the DEGREES function. +Example + +=ATAN(1) returns 0.785398163397448 (PI/4 radians). + +=DEGREES(ATAN(1)) returns 45. The tangent of 45 degrees is 1.see also COS, SIN, TAN, COT, ACOS, ASIN, ATAN2, ACOT
-
+
ATAN2 function ATAN2 - Returns the inverse trigonometric tangent of the specified x and y coordinates. - Syntax - ATAN2(NumberX; NumberY) - - NumberX is the value of the x coordinate. - - NumberY is the value of the y coordinate. - ATAN2 returns the inverse trigonometric tangent, that is, the angle (in radians) between the x-axis and a line from point NumberX, NumberY to the origin. The angle returned is between -PI and PI. - To return the angle in degrees, use the DEGREES function. - Example - - =ATAN2(20;20) returns 0.785398163397448 (PI/4 radians). - - =DEGREES(ATAN2(12.3;12.3)) returns 45. The tangent of 45 degrees is 1.see also COS, SIN, TAN, COT, +oldref="120">ATAN2 +Returns the inverse trigonometric tangent of the specified x and y coordinates. +Syntax +ATAN2(NumberX; NumberY) +NumberX is the value of the x coordinate. +NumberY is the value of the y coordinate. +ATAN2 returns the inverse trigonometric tangent, that is, the angle (in radians) between the x-axis and a line from point NumberX, NumberY to the origin. The angle returned is between -PI and PI. +To return the angle in degrees, use the DEGREES function. +Example + +=ATAN2(20;20) returns 0.785398163397448 (PI/4 radians). + +=DEGREES(ATAN2(12.3;12.3)) returns 45. The tangent of 45 degrees is 1.see also COS, SIN, TAN, COT, ACOS, ASIN, ATAN, ACOT
-
+
ATANH function ATANH - Returns the inverse hyperbolic tangent of a number. - Syntax - ATANH(Number) - This function returns the inverse hyperbolic tangent of Number, that is the number whose hyperbolic tangent is Number. - Number must obey the condition -1 < number < 1. - Example - - =ATANH(0) returns 0.see also ACOSH, ASINH, ACOTH, +oldref="130">ATANH +Returns the inverse hyperbolic tangent of a number. +Syntax +ATANH(Number) + This function returns the inverse hyperbolic tangent of Number, that is the number whose hyperbolic tangent is Number. + Number must obey the condition -1 < number < 1. +Example + +=ATANH(0) returns 0.see also ACOSH, ASINH, ACOTH, COSH, SINH, TANH, COTH
-
+
COS function COS - Returns the cosine of the given angle (in radians). - Syntax - COS(Number) - Returns the (trigonometric) cosine of Number, the angle in radians. - To return the cosine of an angle in degrees, use the RADIANS function. - Examples - - =COS(PI()/2) returns 0, the cosine of PI/2 radians. - - =COS(RADIANS(60)) returns 0.5, the cosine of 60 degrees.see also SIN, TAN, COT, +oldref="149">COS +Returns the cosine of the given angle (in radians). +Syntax +COS(Number) + Returns the (trigonometric) cosine of Number, the angle in radians. +To return the cosine of an angle in degrees, use the RADIANS function. +Examples + +=COS(PI()/2) returns 0, the cosine of PI/2 radians. + +=COS(RADIANS(60)) returns 0.5, the cosine of 60 degrees.see also SIN, TAN, COT, ACOS, ASIN, ATAN, ATAN2, ACOT
-
+
COSH function COSH - Returns the hyperbolic cosine of a number. - Syntax - COSH(Number) - Returns the hyperbolic cosine of Number. - Example - - =COSH(0) returns 1, the hyperbolic cosine of 0.see also SINH, TANH, COTH, +oldref="159">COSH +Returns the hyperbolic cosine of a number. +Syntax +COSH(Number) +Returns the hyperbolic cosine of Number. +Example + +=COSH(0) returns 1, the hyperbolic cosine of 0.see also SINH, TANH, COTH, ACOSH, ASINH, ATANH, ACOTH,
-
+
COT function COT - Returns the cotangent of the given angle (in radians). - Syntax - COT(Number) - Returns the (trigonometric) cotangent of Number, the angle in radians. - To return the cotangent of an angle in degrees, use the RADIANS function. - The cotangent of an angle is equivalent to 1 divided by the tangent of that angle. - Examples: - - =COT(PI()/4) returns 1, the cotangent of PI/4 radians. - - =COT(RADIANS(45)) returns 1, the cotangent of 45 degrees.see also COS, SIN, TAN, +oldref="169">COT +Returns the cotangent of the given angle (in radians). +Syntax +COT(Number) + Returns the (trigonometric) cotangent of Number, the angle in radians. +To return the cotangent of an angle in degrees, use the RADIANS function. +The cotangent of an angle is equivalent to 1 divided by the tangent of that angle. +Examples: + +=COT(PI()/4) returns 1, the cotangent of PI/4 radians. + +=COT(RADIANS(45)) returns 1, the cotangent of 45 degrees.see also COS, SIN, TAN, ACOS, ASIN, ATAN, ATAN2, ACOT
-
+
COTH function COTH - Returns the hyperbolic cotangent of a given number (angle). - Syntax - COTH(Number) - Returns the hyperbolic cotangent of Number. - Example - - =COTH(1) returns the hyperbolic cotangent of 1, approximately 1.3130.see also COSH, SINH, TANH, +oldref="178">COTH +Returns the hyperbolic cotangent of a given number (angle). +Syntax +COTH(Number) + Returns the hyperbolic cotangent of Number. +Example + +=COTH(1) returns the hyperbolic cotangent of 1, approximately 1.3130.see also COSH, SINH, TANH, ACOSH, ASINH, ATANH, ACOTH,
-
+
DEGREES function - converting;radians, into degrees +converting;radians, into degrees mw added one entry DEGREES - Converts radians into degrees. - Syntax - DEGREES(Number) - - Number is the angle in radians to be converted to degrees. - Example - - =DEGREES(PI()) returns 180 degrees.see also RADIANS -
-
+oldref="188">DEGREES +Converts radians into degrees. +Syntax +DEGREES(Number) +Number is the angle in radians to be converted to degrees. +Example + +=DEGREES(PI()) returns 180 degrees.see also RADIANS +
+
EXP function EXP - Returns e raised to the power of a number. The constant e has a value of approximately 2.71828182845904. - Syntax - EXP(Number) - - Number is the power to which e is to be raised. - Example - - =EXP(1) returns 2.71828182845904, the mathematical constant e to Calc's accuracy.see also POWER, LN, -
-
+oldref="198">EXP +Returns e raised to the power of a number. The constant e has a value of approximately 2.71828182845904. +Syntax +EXP(Number) +Number is the power to which e is to be raised. +Example + +=EXP(1) returns 2.71828182845904, the mathematical constant e to Calc's accuracy.see also POWER, LN, +
+
FACT function - factorials;numbers +factorials;numbers mw added one entry FACT - Returns the factorial of a number. - Syntax - FACT(Number) - Returns Number!, the factorial of Number, calculated as 1*2*3*4* ... * Number. - =FACT(0) returns 1 by definition. - The factorial of a negative number returns the "invalid argument" error. - Example - - =FACT(3) returns 6. - - =FACT(0) returns 1.see also FACTDOUBLE, MULTINOMIAL, PRODUCT -
-
+oldref="208">FACT +Returns the factorial of a number. +Syntax +FACT(Number) + Returns Number!, the factorial of Number, calculated as 1*2*3*4* ... * Number. +=FACT(0) returns 1 by definition. +The factorial of a negative number returns the "invalid argument" error. +Example + +=FACT(3) returns 6. + +=FACT(0) returns 1.see also FACTDOUBLE, MULTINOMIAL, PRODUCT +
+
INT function - numbers;rounding down to next integer - rounding;down to next integer +numbers;rounding down to next integer +rounding;down to next integer mw added two entries INT - Rounds a number down to the nearest integer. - Syntax - INT(Number) - Returns Number rounded down to the nearest integer. - Negative numbers round down to the integer below. - Example - - =INT(5.7) returns 5. - - =INT(-1.3) returns -2.see also TRUNC, ROUND, ROUNDDOWN, ROUNDUP, +oldref="218">INT +Rounds a number down to the nearest integer. +Syntax +INT(Number) +Returns Number rounded down to the nearest integer. +Negative numbers round down to the integer below. +Example + +=INT(5.7) returns 5. + +=INT(-1.3) returns -2.see also TRUNC, ROUND, ROUNDDOWN, ROUNDUP, CEILING, FLOOR, EVEN, ODD, MROUND,
-
+
EVEN function - numbers;rounding up/down to even integers - rounding;up/down to even integers +numbers;rounding up/down to even integers +rounding;up/down to even integers mw added two entries EVEN - Rounds a positive number up to the next even integer and a negative number down to the next even integer. - Syntax - EVEN(Number) - Returns Number rounded to the next even integer up, away from zero. - Examples - - =EVEN(2.3) returns 4. - - =EVEN(2) returns 2. - - =EVEN(0) returns 0. - - =EVEN(-0.5) returns -2.see also CEILING, FLOOR, ODD, MROUND, +oldref="227">EVEN +Rounds a positive number up to the next even integer and a negative number down to the next even integer. +Syntax +EVEN(Number) + Returns Number rounded to the next even integer up, away from zero. +Examples + +=EVEN(2.3) returns 4. + +=EVEN(2) returns 2. + +=EVEN(0) returns 0. + +=EVEN(-0.5) returns -2.see also CEILING, FLOOR, ODD, MROUND, INT, TRUNC, ROUND, ROUNDDOWN, ROUNDUP
-
+
GCD function - greatest common divisor +greatest common divisor mw added one entry GCD - Returns the greatest common divisor of two or more integers. - The greatest common divisor is the positive largest integer which will divide, without remainder, each of the given integers. - Syntax - GCD(Integer1; Integer2; ...; Integer30) - - Integer1 To 30 are up to 30 integers whose greatest common divisor is to be calculated. - Example - - =GCD(16;32;24) gives the result 8, because 8 is the largest number that can divide 16, 24 and 32 without a remainder. - - =GCD(B1:B3) where cells B1, B2, B3 contain 9, 12, 9 gives 3. -
-
+oldref="237">GCD +Returns the greatest common divisor of two or more integers. +The greatest common divisor is the positive largest integer which will divide, without remainder, each of the given integers. +Syntax +GCD(Integer1; Integer2; ...; Integer30) +Integer1 To 30 are up to 30 integers whose greatest common divisor is to be calculated. +Example + +=GCD(16;32;24) gives the result 8, because 8 is the largest number that can divide 16, 24 and 32 without a remainder. + +=GCD(B1:B3) where cells B1, B2, B3 contain 9, 12, 9 gives 3. +
+
GCD_ADD function GCD_ADD - The result is the greatest common divisor of a list of numbers. - - Syntax - GCD_ADD(Number(s)) - - Number(s) is a list of up to 30 numbers. - Example - - =GCD_ADD(5;15;25) returns 5. -
-
+oldref="677">GCD_ADD + The result is the greatest common divisor of a list of numbers. + +Syntax +GCD_ADD(Number(s)) +Number(s) is a list of up to 30 numbers. +Example + +=GCD_ADD(5;15;25) returns 5. +
+
ISEVEN function - even integers +even integers mw added one entry ISEVENlink from Information cat - Returns TRUE if the value is an even integer, or FALSE if the value is odd. - Syntax - ISEVEN(Value) - - Value is the value to be checked. - If Value is not an integer any digits after the decimal point are ignored. The sign of Value is also ignored. - Example - - =ISEVEN(48) returns TRUE - - =ISEVEN(33) returns FALSE - - =ISEVEN(0) returns TRUE - - =ISEVEN(-2.1) returns TRUE - - =ISEVEN(3.999) returns FALSEsee also ISODD -
-
+oldref="245">ISEVENlink from Information cat +Returns TRUE if the value is an even integer, or FALSE if the value is odd. +Syntax +ISEVEN(Value) +Value is the value to be checked. +If Value is not an integer any digits after the decimal point are ignored. The sign of Value is also ignored. +Example + +=ISEVEN(48) returns TRUE + +=ISEVEN(33) returns FALSE + +=ISEVEN(0) returns TRUE + +=ISEVEN(-2.1) returns TRUE + +=ISEVEN(3.999) returns FALSEsee also ISODD +
+
ISODD function - odd integers +odd integers mw added one entry ISODDlink from Information cat - Returns TRUE if the value is odd, or FALSE if the number is even. - Syntax - ISODD(value) - - Value is the value to be checked. - If Value is not an integer any digits after the decimal point are ignored. The sign of Value is also ignored. - Example - - =ISODD(33) returns TRUE - - =ISODD(48) returns FALSE - - =ISODD(3.999) returns TRUE - - =ISODD(-3.1) returns TRUEsee also ISEVEN -
-
+oldref="255">ISODDlink from Information cat +Returns TRUE if the value is odd, or FALSE if the number is even. +Syntax +ISODD(value) +Value is the value to be checked. +If Value is not an integer any digits after the decimal point are ignored. The sign of Value is also ignored. +Example + +=ISODD(33) returns TRUE + +=ISODD(48) returns FALSE + +=ISODD(3.999) returns TRUE + +=ISODD(-3.1) returns TRUEsee also ISEVEN +
+
LCM function - least common multiples - lowest common multiples +least common multiples +lowest common multiples mw added two entries LCM - Returns the least common multiple of one or more integers. - Syntax - LCM(Integer1; Integer2; ...; Integer30) - - Integer1 to 30 are up to 30 integers whose lowest common multiple is to be calculated. - Example - If you enter the numbers 512;1024 and 2000 in the Integer 1;2 and 3 text boxes, 128000 will be returned as the result. -
-
+oldref="265">LCM +Returns the least common multiple of one or more integers. +Syntax +LCM(Integer1; Integer2; ...; Integer30) +Integer1 to 30 are up to 30 integers whose lowest common multiple is to be calculated. +Example +If you enter the numbers 512;1024 and 2000 in the Integer 1;2 and 3 text boxes, 128000 will be returned as the result. +
+
LCM_ADD function LCM_ADD - The result is the lowest common multiple of a list of numbers. - - Syntax - LCM_ADD(Number(s)) - - Number(s) is a list of up to 30 numbers. - Example - - =LCM_ADD(5;15;25) returns 75. -
-
+oldref="684">LCM_ADD + The result is the lowest common multiple of a list of numbers. + +Syntax +LCM_ADD(Number(s)) +Number(s) is a list of up to 30 numbers. +Example + +=LCM_ADD(5;15;25) returns 75. +
+
COMBIN function - number of combinations +number of combinations mw added one entry COMBINshould be statistical-->add a link there - Returns the number of combinations for elements without repetition. - Syntax - COMBIN(Count1; Count2) - - Count1 is the number of items in the set. - - Count2 is the number of items to choose from the set. - COMBIN returns the number of ordered ways to choose these items. For example if there are 3 items A, B and C in a set, you can choose 2 items in 3 different ways, namely AB, AC and BC. - COMBIN implements the formula: Count1!/(Count2!*(Count1-Count2)!) - Example - - =COMBIN(3;2) returns 3.see also COMBINA -
-
+oldref="273">COMBINshould be statistical-->add a link there +Returns the number of combinations for elements without repetition. +Syntax +COMBIN(Count1; Count2) +Count1 is the number of items in the set. +Count2 is the number of items to choose from the set. +COMBIN returns the number of ordered ways to choose these items. For example if there are 3 items A, B and C in a set, you can choose 2 items in 3 different ways, namely AB, AC and BC. +COMBIN implements the formula: Count1!/(Count2!*(Count1-Count2)!) +Example + +=COMBIN(3;2) returns 3.see also COMBINA +
+
COMBINA function - number of combinations with repetitions +number of combinations with repetitions mw added one entry COMBINAshould be statistical-->add a link there - Returns the number of combinations of a subset of items including repetitions. - Syntax - COMBINA(Count1; Count2) - - Count1 is the number of items in the set. - - Count2 is the number of items to choose from the set. - COMBINA returns the number of unique ways to choose these items, where the order of choosing is irrelevant, and repetition of items is allowed. For example if there are 3 items A, B and C in a set, you can choose 2 items in 6 different ways, namely AB, BA, AC, CA, BC and CB. - COMBINA implements the formula: (Count1+Count2-1)! / (Count2!(Count1-1)!)i88052 - Example - - =COMBINA(3;2) returns 6.see also COMBIN -
-
+oldref="282">COMBINAshould be statistical-->add a link there +Returns the number of combinations of a subset of items including repetitions. +Syntax +COMBINA(Count1; Count2) +Count1 is the number of items in the set. +Count2 is the number of items to choose from the set. +COMBINA returns the number of unique ways to choose these items, where the order of choosing is irrelevant, and repetition of items is allowed. For example if there are 3 items A, B and C in a set, you can choose 2 items in 6 different ways, namely AB, BA, AC, CA, BC and CB. +COMBINA implements the formula: (Count1+Count2-1)! / (Count2!(Count1-1)!)i88052 +Example + +=COMBINA(3;2) returns 6.see also COMBIN +
+
TRUNC function - decimal places;cutting off +decimal places;cutting off mw added one entry TRUNC - Truncates a number by removing decimal places. - Syntax - TRUNC(Number; Count) - Returns Number with at most Count decimal places. Excess decimal places are simply removed, irrespective of sign. - - TRUNC(Number; 0) behaves as INT(Number) for positive numbers, but effectively rounds towards zero for negative numbers. - The visible decimal places of the result are specified in Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - Calculate. - Example - - =TRUNC(1.239;2) returns 1.23. The 9 is lost. - - =TRUNC(-1.234999;3) returns -1.234. All the 9s are lost.see also INT, ROUND, ROUNDDOWN, ROUNDUP, +oldref="291">TRUNC +Truncates a number by removing decimal places. +Syntax +TRUNC(Number; Count) +Returns Number with at most Count decimal places. Excess decimal places are simply removed, irrespective of sign. + +TRUNC(Number; 0) behaves as INT(Number) for positive numbers, but effectively rounds towards zero for negative numbers. +The visible decimal places of the result are specified in Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - Calculate. +Example + +=TRUNC(1.239;2) returns 1.23. The 9 is lost. + +=TRUNC(-1.234999;3) returns -1.234. All the 9s are lost.see also INT, ROUND, ROUNDDOWN, ROUNDUP, CEILING, FLOOR, EVEN, ODD, MROUND
-
+
LN function - natural logarithm +natural logarithm mw added one entry LN - Returns the natural logarithm based on the constant e of a number. The constant e has a value of approximately 2.71828182845904. - Syntax - LN(Number) - - Number is the value whose natural logarithm is to be calculated. - Example - - =LN(3) returns the natural logarithm of 3 (approximately 1.0986). - - =LN(EXP(321)) returns 321.see also LOG, LOG10, EXP, -
-
+oldref="301">LN +Returns the natural logarithm based on the constant e of a number. The constant e has a value of approximately 2.71828182845904. +Syntax +LN(Number) +Number is the value whose natural logarithm is to be calculated. +Example + +=LN(3) returns the natural logarithm of 3 (approximately 1.0986). + +=LN(EXP(321)) returns 321.see also LOG, LOG10, EXP, +
+
LOG function - logarithms +logarithms mw added one entry LOG - Returns the logarithm of a number to the specified base. - Syntax - LOG(Number; Base) - - Number is the value whose logarithm is to be calculated. - - Base (optional) is the base for the logarithm calculation. If omitted, Base 10 is assumed. - Example - - =LOG(10;3) returns the logarithm to base 3 of 10 (approximately 2.0959). - - =LOG(7^4;7) returns 4.see also LOG10, LN, POWER, -
-
+oldref="311">LOG +Returns the logarithm of a number to the specified base. +Syntax +LOG(Number; Base) +Number is the value whose logarithm is to be calculated. +Base (optional) is the base for the logarithm calculation. If omitted, Base 10 is assumed. +Example + +=LOG(10;3) returns the logarithm to base 3 of 10 (approximately 2.0959). + +=LOG(7^4;7) returns 4.see also LOG10, LN, POWER, +
+
LOG10 function - base-10 logarithm +base-10 logarithm mw added one entry LOG10 - Returns the base-10 logarithm of a number. - Syntax - LOG10(Number) - Returns the logarithm to base 10 of Number. - Example - - =LOG10(5) returns the base-10 logarithm of 5 (approximately 0.69897).see also LOG, LN, POWER -
-
+oldref="322">LOG10 +Returns the base-10 logarithm of a number. +Syntax +LOG10(Number) +Returns the logarithm to base 10 of Number. +Example + +=LOG10(5) returns the base-10 logarithm of 5 (approximately 0.69897).see also LOG, LN, POWER +
+
CEILING function - rounding;up to multiples of significance +rounding;up to multiples of significance mw added one entry CEILING - Rounds a number up to the nearest multiple of Significance. - Syntax - CEILING(Number; Significance; Mode) - - Number is the number that is to be rounded up. - - Significance is the number to whose multiple the value is to be rounded up. - - Mode is an optional value. If the Mode value is given and not equal to zero, and if Number and Significance are negative, then rounding is done based on the absolute value of Number. This parameter is ignored when exporting to MS Excel as Excel does not know any third parameter. - If both parameters Number and Significance are negative and the Mode value is equal to zero or is not given, the results in $[officename] and Excel will differ after the import has been completed. If you export the spreadsheet to Excel, use Mode=1 to see the same results in Excel as in Calc. - Example - - =CEILING(-11;-2) returns -10 - - =CEILING(-11;-2;0) returns -10 - - =CEILING(-11;-2;1) returns -12see also FLOOR, EVEN, ODD, MROUND, +oldref="332">CEILING +Rounds a number up to the nearest multiple of Significance. +Syntax +CEILING(Number; Significance; Mode) +Number is the number that is to be rounded up. +Significance is the number to whose multiple the value is to be rounded up. +Mode is an optional value. If the Mode value is given and not equal to zero, and if Number and Significance are negative, then rounding is done based on the absolute value of Number. This parameter is ignored when exporting to MS Excel as Excel does not know any third parameter. +If both parameters Number and Significance are negative and the Mode value is equal to zero or is not given, the results in $[officename] and Excel will differ after the import has been completed. If you export the spreadsheet to Excel, use Mode=1 to see the same results in Excel as in Calc. +Example + +=CEILING(-11;-2) returns -10 + +=CEILING(-11;-2;0) returns -10 + +=CEILING(-11;-2;1) returns -12see also FLOOR, EVEN, ODD, MROUND, INT, TRUNC, ROUND, ROUNDDOWN, ROUNDUP
-
+
PI function PI - Returns 3.14159265358979, the value of the mathematical constant PI to 14 decimal places. - Syntax - PI() - Example - - =PI() returns 3.14159265358979. -
-
+oldref="343">PI +Returns 3.14159265358979, the value of the mathematical constant PI to 14 decimal places. +Syntax +PI() +Example + +=PI() returns 3.14159265358979. +
+
MULTINOMIAL function MULTINOMIAL - Returns the factorial of the sum of the arguments divided by the product of the factorials of the arguments. - Syntax - MULTINOMIAL(Number(s)) - - Number(s) is a list of up to 30 numbers. - Example - - =MULTINOMIAL(F11:H11) returns 1260, if F11 to H11 contain the values 2, 3 and 4. This corresponds to the formula =(2+3+4)! / (2!*3!*4!) -
-
+oldref="635">MULTINOMIAL + Returns the factorial of the sum of the arguments divided by the product of the factorials of the arguments. +Syntax +MULTINOMIAL(Number(s)) +Number(s) is a list of up to 30 numbers. +Example + +=MULTINOMIAL(F11:H11) returns 1260, if F11 to H11 contain the values 2, 3 and 4. This corresponds to the formula =(2+3+4)! / (2!*3!*4!) +
+
POWER function POWER - Returns a number raised to a power. - Syntax - POWER(Base; Power) - Returns Base raised to the power of Power. - The same result may be achieved by using the exponentiation operator ^: - - Base^Power - - Example - - =POWER(4;3) returns 64, which is 4 to the power of 3. - =4^3 also returns 4 to the power of 3.see also EXP, LOG, SQRT -
-
+oldref="350">POWER +Returns a number raised to a power. +Syntax +POWER(Base; Power) +Returns Base raised to the power of Power. +The same result may be achieved by using the exponentiation operator ^: + +Base^Power + +Example + +=POWER(4;3) returns 64, which is 4 to the power of 3. +=4^3 also returns 4 to the power of 3.see also EXP, LOG, SQRT +
+
SERIESSUM function SERIESSUM - Sums the first terms of a power series. - SERIESSUM(x;n;m;coefficients) = coefficient_1*x^n + coefficient_2*x^(n+m) + coefficient_3*x^(n+2m) +...+ coefficient_i*x^(n+(i-1)m) - Syntax - SERIESSUM(X; N; M; Coefficients) - - X is the input value for the power series. - - N is the initial power - - M is the increment to increase N - - Coefficients is a series of coefficients. For each coefficient the series sum is extended by one section. -
-
+oldref="642">SERIESSUM +Sums the first terms of a power series. +SERIESSUM(x;n;m;coefficients) = coefficient_1*x^n + coefficient_2*x^(n+m) + coefficient_3*x^(n+2m) +...+ coefficient_i*x^(n+(i-1)m) +Syntax +SERIESSUM(X; N; M; Coefficients) +X is the input value for the power series. +N is the initial power +M is the increment to increase N +Coefficients is a series of coefficients. For each coefficient the series sum is extended by one section. +
+
PRODUCT function - numbers;multiplying - multiplying;numbers +numbers;multiplying +multiplying;numbers mw added two entries PRODUCT - Multiplies all the numbers given as arguments and returns the product. - Syntax - PRODUCT(Number1; Number2; ...; Number30) - - Number1 to 30 are up to 30 arguments whose product is to be calculated. - PRODUCT returns number1 * number2 * number3 * ... - Example - - =PRODUCT(2;3;4) returns 24.see also FACT, SUM -
-
+oldref="361">PRODUCT +Multiplies all the numbers given as arguments and returns the product. +Syntax +PRODUCT(Number1; Number2; ...; Number30) +Number1 to 30 are up to 30 arguments whose product is to be calculated. +PRODUCT returns number1 * number2 * number3 * ... +Example + +=PRODUCT(2;3;4) returns 24.see also FACT, SUM +
+
SUMSQ function - square number additions - sums;of square numbers +square number additions +sums;of square numbers mw added two entries SUMSQ - If you want to calculate the sum of the squares of numbers (totaling up of the squares of the arguments), enter these into the text fields. - Syntax - SUMSQ(Number1; Number2; ...; Number30) - - Number1 to 30 are up to 30 arguments the sum of whose squares is to be calculated. - Example - If you enter the numbers 2; 3 and 4 in the Number 1; 2 and 3 text boxes, 29 is returned as the result. -
-
+oldref="369">SUMSQ +If you want to calculate the sum of the squares of numbers (totaling up of the squares of the arguments), enter these into the text fields. +Syntax +SUMSQ(Number1; Number2; ...; Number30) +Number1 to 30 are up to 30 arguments the sum of whose squares is to be calculated. +Example +If you enter the numbers 2; 3 and 4 in the Number 1; 2 and 3 text boxes, 29 is returned as the result. +
+
MOD function - remainders of divisions +remainders of divisions mw added one entry MOD - Returns the remainder when one integer is divided by another. - Syntax - MOD(Dividend; Divisor) - For integer arguments this function returns Dividend modulo Divisor, that is the remainder when Dividend is divided by Divisor. - This function is implemented as Dividend - Divisor * INT(Dividend/Divisor) , and this formula gives the result if the arguments are not integer. - Example - - =MOD(22;3) returns 1, the remainder when 22 is divided by 3. - - =MOD(11.25;2.5) returns 1.25.see also QUOTIENT, INT, -
-
+oldref="387">MOD +Returns the remainder when one integer is divided by another. +Syntax +MOD(Dividend; Divisor) + For integer arguments this function returns Dividend modulo Divisor, that is the remainder when Dividend is divided by Divisor. +This function is implemented as Dividend - Divisor * INT(Dividend/Divisor) , and this formula gives the result if the arguments are not integer. +Example + +=MOD(22;3) returns 1, the remainder when 22 is divided by 3. + +=MOD(11.25;2.5) returns 1.25.see also QUOTIENT, INT, +
+
QUOTIENT function - divisions +divisions mw added one entry QUOTIENT - Returns the integer part of a division operation. - Syntax - QUOTIENT(Numerator; Denominator) - Returns the integer part of Numerator divided by Denominator. - QUOTIENT is equivalent to INT(numerator/denominator), except that it may report errors with different error codes. - Example - - =QUOTIENT(11;3) returns 3. The remainder of 2 is lost.see also MOD, INT -
-
+oldref="652">QUOTIENT +Returns the integer part of a division operation. +Syntax +QUOTIENT(Numerator; Denominator) +Returns the integer part of Numerator divided by Denominator. +QUOTIENT is equivalent to INT(numerator/denominator), except that it may report errors with different error codes. +Example + +=QUOTIENT(11;3) returns 3. The remainder of 2 is lost.see also MOD, INT +
+
RADIANS function - converting;degrees, into radians +converting;degrees, into radians mw added one entry RADIANS - Converts degrees to radians. - Syntax - RADIANS(Number) - - Number is the angle in degrees to be converted to radians. - Example - - =RADIANS(90) returns 1.5707963267949, which is PI/2 to Calc's accuracy.see also DEGREES -
-
+oldref="377">RADIANS +Converts degrees to radians. +Syntax +RADIANS(Number) +Number is the angle in degrees to be converted to radians. +Example + +=RADIANS(90) returns 1.5707963267949, which is PI/2 to Calc's accuracy.see also DEGREES +
+
ROUND function -ROUND -Rounds a number to a certain number of decimal places. -Syntax -ROUND(Number; Count) -Returns Number rounded to Count decimal places. If Count is omitted or zero, the function rounds to the nearest integer. If Count is negative, the function rounds to the nearest 10, 100, 1000, etc. -This function rounds to the nearest number. See ROUNDDOWN and ROUNDUP for alternatives. -Example - +ROUND +Rounds a number to a certain number of decimal places. +Syntax +ROUND(Number; Count) +Returns Number rounded to Count decimal places. If Count is omitted or zero, the function rounds to the nearest integer. If Count is negative, the function rounds to the nearest 10, 100, 1000, etc. +This function rounds to the nearest number. See ROUNDDOWN and ROUNDUP for alternatives. +Example + =ROUND(2.348;2) returns 2.35 - + =ROUND(-32.4834;3) returns -32.483. Change the cell format to see all decimals. - + =ROUND(2.348;0) returns 2. - + =ROUND(2.5) returns 3. - + =ROUND(987.65;-2) returns 1000.see also INT, TRUNC, ROUNDDOWN, ROUNDUP, CEILING, FLOOR, EVEN, ODD, MROUND
-
+
ROUNDDOWN function ROUNDDOWN - Rounds a number down, toward zero, to a certain precision. - Syntax - ROUNDDOWN(Number; Count) - Returns Number rounded down (towards zero) to Count decimal places. If Count is omitted or zero, the function rounds down to an integer. If Count is negative, the function rounds down to the next 10, 100, 1000, etc. - This function rounds towards zero. See ROUNDUP and ROUND for alternatives. - Example - - =ROUNDDOWN(1.234;2) returns 1.23. - - =ROUNDDOWN(45.67;0) returns 45. - - =ROUNDDOWN(-45.67) returns -45. - - =ROUNDDOWN(987.65;-2) returns 900.see also INT, TRUNC, ROUND, ROUNDUP, +oldref="24">ROUNDDOWN +Rounds a number down, toward zero, to a certain precision. +Syntax +ROUNDDOWN(Number; Count) +Returns Number rounded down (towards zero) to Count decimal places. If Count is omitted or zero, the function rounds down to an integer. If Count is negative, the function rounds down to the next 10, 100, 1000, etc. +This function rounds towards zero. See ROUNDUP and ROUND for alternatives. +Example + +=ROUNDDOWN(1.234;2) returns 1.23. + +=ROUNDDOWN(45.67;0) returns 45. + +=ROUNDDOWN(-45.67) returns -45. + +=ROUNDDOWN(987.65;-2) returns 900.see also INT, TRUNC, ROUND, ROUNDUP, CEILING, FLOOR, EVEN, ODD, MROUND
-
+
ROUNDUP function ROUNDUP - Rounds a number up, away from zero, to a certain precision. - Syntax - ROUNDUP(Number; Count) - Returns Number rounded up (away from zero) to Count decimal places. If Count is omitted or zero, the function rounds up to an integer. If Count is negative, the function rounds up to the next 10, 100, 1000, etc. - This function rounds away from zero. See ROUNDDOWN and ROUND for alternatives. - Example - - =ROUNDUP(1.1111;2) returns 1.12. - - =ROUNDUP(1.2345;1) returns 1.3. - - =ROUNDUP(45.67;0) returns 46. - - =ROUNDUP(-45.67) returns -46. - - =ROUNDUP(987.65;-2) returns 1000.see also INT, TRUNC, ROUND, ROUNDDOWN, +oldref="140">ROUNDUP +Rounds a number up, away from zero, to a certain precision. +Syntax +ROUNDUP(Number; Count) +Returns Number rounded up (away from zero) to Count decimal places. If Count is omitted or zero, the function rounds up to an integer. If Count is negative, the function rounds up to the next 10, 100, 1000, etc. +This function rounds away from zero. See ROUNDDOWN and ROUND for alternatives. +Example + +=ROUNDUP(1.1111;2) returns 1.12. + +=ROUNDUP(1.2345;1) returns 1.3. + +=ROUNDUP(45.67;0) returns 46. + +=ROUNDUP(-45.67) returns -46. + +=ROUNDUP(987.65;-2) returns 1000.see also INT, TRUNC, ROUND, ROUNDDOWN, CEILING, FLOOR, EVEN, ODD, MROUND
-
+
SIN function SIN - Returns the sine of the given angle (in radians). - Syntax - SIN(Number) - Returns the (trigonometric) sine of Number, the angle in radians. - To return the sine of an angle in degrees, use the RADIANS function. - Example - - =SIN(PI()/2) returns 1, the sine of PI/2 radians. - - =SIN(RADIANS(30)) returns 0.5, the sine of 30 degrees.see also COS, TAN, COT, +oldref="408">SIN +Returns the sine of the given angle (in radians). +Syntax +SIN(Number) +Returns the (trigonometric) sine of Number, the angle in radians. +To return the sine of an angle in degrees, use the RADIANS function. +Example + +=SIN(PI()/2) returns 1, the sine of PI/2 radians. + +=SIN(RADIANS(30)) returns 0.5, the sine of 30 degrees.see also COS, TAN, COT, ACOS, ASIN, ATAN, ATAN2, ACOT
-
+
SINH function SINH - Returns the hyperbolic sine of a number. - Syntax - SINH(Number) - Returns the hyperbolic sine of Number. - Example - - =SINH(0) returns 0, the hyperbolic sine of 0.see also COSH, TANH, COTH, +oldref="418">SINH +Returns the hyperbolic sine of a number. +Syntax +SINH(Number) +Returns the hyperbolic sine of Number. +Example + +=SINH(0) returns 0, the hyperbolic sine of 0.see also COSH, TANH, COTH, ACOSH, ASINH, ATANH, ACOTH
-
+
SUM function - adding;numbers in cell ranges +adding;numbers in cell ranges mw added one entry SUM - Adds all the numbers in a range of cells. - Syntax - SUM(Number1; Number2; ...; Number30) - - Number 1 to Number 30 are up to 30 arguments whose sum is to be calculated. - Example - If you enter the numbers 2; 3 and 4 in the Number 1; 2 and 3 text boxes, 9 will be returned as the result. - - =SUM(A1;A3;B5) calculates the sum of the three cells. =SUM (A1:E10) calculates the sum of all cells in the A1 to E10 cell range. - Conditions linked by AND can be used with the function SUM() in the following manner: - Example assumption: You have entered invoices into a table. Column A contains the date value of the invoice, column B the amounts. You want to find a formula that you can use to return the total of all amounts only for a specific month, e.g. only the amount for the period >=2008-01-01 to <2008-02-01. The range with the date values covers A1:A40, the range containing the amounts to be totaled is B1:B40. C1 contains the start date, 2008-01-01, of the invoices to be included and C2 the date, 2008-02-01, that is no longer included. - Enter the following formula as an array formula: - - =SUM((A1:A40>=C1)*(A1:A40<C2)*B1:B40) - - In order to enter this as an array formula, you must press the Shift+Command +oldref="428">SUM +Adds all the numbers in a range of cells. +Syntax +SUM(Number1; Number2; ...; Number30) +Number 1 to Number 30 are up to 30 arguments whose sum is to be calculated. +Example +If you enter the numbers 2; 3 and 4 in the Number 1; 2 and 3 text boxes, 9 will be returned as the result. + +=SUM(A1;A3;B5) calculates the sum of the three cells. =SUM (A1:E10) calculates the sum of all cells in the A1 to E10 cell range. +Conditions linked by AND can be used with the function SUM() in the following manner: +Example assumption: You have entered invoices into a table. Column A contains the date value of the invoice, column B the amounts. You want to find a formula that you can use to return the total of all amounts only for a specific month, e.g. only the amount for the period >=2008-01-01 to <2008-02-01. The range with the date values covers A1:A40, the range containing the amounts to be totaled is B1:B40. C1 contains the start date, 2008-01-01, of the invoices to be included and C2 the date, 2008-02-01, that is no longer included. +Enter the following formula as an array formula: + +=SUM((A1:A40>=C1)*(A1:A40<C2)*B1:B40) + +In order to enter this as an array formula, you must press the Shift+Command + Ctrl+ Enter keys instead of simply pressing the Enter key to close the formula. The formula will then be shown in the Formula bar enclosed in braces. - {=SUM((A1:A40>=C1)*(A1:A40<C2)*B1:B40)} - The formula is based on the fact that the result of a comparison is 1 if the criterion is met and 0 if it is not met. The individual comparison results will be treated as an array and used in matrix multiplication, and at the end the individual values will be totaled to give the result matrix. -
-
+{=SUM((A1:A40>=C1)*(A1:A40<C2)*B1:B40)} +The formula is based on the fact that the result of a comparison is 1 if the criterion is met and 0 if it is not met. The individual comparison results will be treated as an array and used in matrix multiplication, and at the end the individual values will be totaled to give the result matrix. +
+
SUMIF function - adding;specified numbers +adding;specified numbers mw added one entry SUMIF - Adds the cells specified by a given criteria. This function is used to browse a range when you search for a certain value. - - Syntax - SUMIF(Range; Criteria; SumRange) - - Range is the range to which the criteria are to be applied. - - Criteria is the cell in which the search criterion is shown, or the search criterion itself. If the criteria is written into the formula, it has to be surrounded by double quotes. - - SumRange is the range from which values are summed. If this parameter has not been indicated, the values found in the Range are summed. - SUMIF supports the reference concatenation operator (~) only in the Criteria parameter, and only if the optional SumRange parameter is not given. - Example - To sum up only negative numbers: =SUMIF(A1:A10;"<0") - - - =SUMIF(A1:A10;">0";B1:10) - sums values from the range B1:B10 only if the corresponding values in the range A1:A10 are >0. - See COUNTIF() for some more syntax examples that can be used with SUMIF(). -
-
+oldref="436">SUMIF +Adds the cells specified by a given criteria. This function is used to browse a range when you search for a certain value. + +Syntax +SUMIF(Range; Criteria; SumRange) +Range is the range to which the criteria are to be applied. +Criteria is the cell in which the search criterion is shown, or the search criterion itself. If the criteria is written into the formula, it has to be surrounded by double quotes. +SumRange is the range from which values are summed. If this parameter has not been indicated, the values found in the Range are summed. +SUMIF supports the reference concatenation operator (~) only in the Criteria parameter, and only if the optional SumRange parameter is not given. +Example +To sum up only negative numbers: =SUMIF(A1:A10;"<0") + + +=SUMIF(A1:A10;">0";B1:10) - sums values from the range B1:B10 only if the corresponding values in the range A1:A10 are >0. +See COUNTIF() for some more syntax examples that can be used with SUMIF(). +
+
TAN function TAN - Returns the tangent of the given angle (in radians). - Syntax - TAN(Number) - Returns the (trigonometric) tangent of Number, the angle in radians. - To return the tangent of an angle in degrees, use the RADIANS function. - Example - - =TAN(PI()/4) returns 1, the tangent of PI/4 radians. - - =TAN(RADIANS(45)) returns 1, the tangent of 45 degrees.see also COS, SIN, COT, +oldref="446">TAN +Returns the tangent of the given angle (in radians). +Syntax +TAN(Number) +Returns the (trigonometric) tangent of Number, the angle in radians. +To return the tangent of an angle in degrees, use the RADIANS function. +Example + +=TAN(PI()/4) returns 1, the tangent of PI/4 radians. + +=TAN(RADIANS(45)) returns 1, the tangent of 45 degrees.see also COS, SIN, COT, ACOS, ASIN, ATAN, ATAN2, ACOT
-
+
TANH function TANH - Returns the hyperbolic tangent of a number. - Syntax - TANH(Number) - Returns the hyperbolic tangent of Number. - Example - - =TANH(0) returns 0, the hyperbolic tangent of 0.see also COSH, SINH, COTH, +oldref="456">TANH +Returns the hyperbolic tangent of a number. +Syntax +TANH(Number) +Returns the hyperbolic tangent of Number. +Example + +=TANH(0) returns 0, the hyperbolic tangent of 0.see also COSH, SINH, COTH, ACOSH, ASINH, ATANH, ACOTH
-
+
AutoFilter function; subtotals - sums;of filtered data - filtered data; sums - SUBTOTAL function +sums;of filtered data +filtered data; sums +SUBTOTAL function mw made "sums..." a two level entry SUBTOTAL - Calculates subtotals. If a range already contains subtotals, these are not used for further calculations. Use this function with the AutoFilters to take only the filtered records into account. - Syntax - SUBTOTAL(Function; Range) - - Function is a number that stands for one of the following functions: - - - - Function index - - - Function - - - - - 1 - - - AVERAGE - - - - - 2 - - - COUNT - - - - - 3 - - - COUNTA - - - - - 4 - - - MAX - - - - - 5 - - - MIN - - - - - 6 - - - PRODUCT - - - - - 7 - - - STDEV - - - - - 8 - - - STDEVP - - - - - 9 - - - SUM - - - - - 10 - - - VAR - - - - - 11 - - - VARP - - -
+oldref="466">SUBTOTAL +Calculates subtotals. If a range already contains subtotals, these are not used for further calculations. Use this function with the AutoFilters to take only the filtered records into account. +Syntax +SUBTOTAL(Function; Range) +Function is a number that stands for one of the following functions: + + + +Function index + + +Function + + + + +1 + + +AVERAGE + + + + +2 + + +COUNT + + + + +3 + + +COUNTA + + + + +4 + + +MAX + + + + +5 + + +MIN + + + + +6 + + +PRODUCT + + + + +7 + + +STDEV + + + + +8 + + +STDEVP + + + + +9 + + +SUM + + + + +10 + + +VAR + + + + +11 + + +VARP + + +
- - Range is the range whose cells are included. - Example - You have a table in the cell range A1:B5 containing cities in column A and accompanying figures in column B. You have used an AutoFilter so that you only see rows containing the city Hamburg. You want to see the sum of the figures that are displayed; that is, just the subtotal for the filtered rows. In this case the correct formula would be: - - =SUBTOTAL(9;B2:B5) - -
-
+Range is the range whose cells are included. +Example +You have a table in the cell range A1:B5 containing cities in column A and accompanying figures in column B. You have used an AutoFilter so that you only see rows containing the city Hamburg. You want to see the sum of the figures that are displayed; that is, just the subtotal for the filtered rows. In this case the correct formula would be: + +=SUBTOTAL(9;B2:B5) + +
+
Euro; converting - EUROCONVERT function +EUROCONVERT function EUROCONVERTinsert link in financial - Converts between old European national currency and to and from Euros. - - Syntax - - EUROCONVERT(Value; "From_currency"; "To_currency", full_precision, triangulation_precision) - - Value is the amount of the currency to be converted. - - From_currency and To_currency are the currency units to convert from and to respectively. These must be text, the official abbreviation for the currency (for example, "EUR"). The rates (shown per Euro) were set by the European Commission. - - Full_precision is optional. If omitted or False, the result is rounded according to the decimals of the To currency. If Full_precision is True, the result is not rounded. - - Triangulation_precision is optional. If Triangulation_precision is given and >=3, the intermediate result of a triangular conversion (currency1,EUR,currency2) is rounded to that precision. If Triangulation_precision is omitted, the intermediate result is not rounded. Also if To currency is "EUR", Triangulation_precision is used as if triangulation was needed and conversion from EUR to EUR was applied. - - Examples - - - =EUROCONVERT(100;"ATS";"EUR") converts 100 Austrian Schillings into Euros. - - =EUROCONVERT(100;"EUR";"DEM") converts 100 Euros into German Marks. -
-
+oldref="564">EUROCONVERTinsert link in financial +Converts between old European national currency and to and from Euros. +Syntax + +EUROCONVERT(Value; "From_currency"; "To_currency", full_precision, triangulation_precision) +Value is the amount of the currency to be converted. +From_currency and To_currency are the currency units to convert from and to respectively. These must be text, the official abbreviation for the currency (for example, "EUR"). The rates (shown per Euro) were set by the European Commission. +Full_precision is optional. If omitted or False, the result is rounded according to the decimals of the To currency. If Full_precision is True, the result is not rounded. +Triangulation_precision is optional. If Triangulation_precision is given and >=3, the intermediate result of a triangular conversion (currency1,EUR,currency2) is rounded to that precision. If Triangulation_precision is omitted, the intermediate result is not rounded. Also if To currency is "EUR", Triangulation_precision is used as if triangulation was needed and conversion from EUR to EUR was applied. +Examples + + +=EUROCONVERT(100;"ATS";"EUR") converts 100 Austrian Schillings into Euros. + +=EUROCONVERT(100;"EUR";"DEM") converts 100 Euros into German Marks. +
+
+CONVERT function + + +CONVERT +Converts a value from one unit of measurement to another unit of measurement. The conversion factors are given in a list in the configuration. +At one time the list of conversion factors included the legacy European currencies and the Euro (see examples below). We suggest using the new function EUROCONVERT for converting these currencies. +Syntax +CONVERT(value;"text";"text") +Example + +=CONVERT(100;"ATS";"EUR") returns the Euro value of 100 Austrian Schillings. +=CONVERT(100;"EUR";"DEM") converts 100 Euros into German Marks. +
+
ODD function - rounding;up/down to nearest odd integer +rounding;up/down to nearest odd integer mw added one entry ODD - Rounds a positive number up to the nearest odd integer and a negative number down to the nearest odd integer. - Syntax - ODD(Number) - Returns Number rounded to the next odd integer up, away from zero. - Example - - =ODD(1.2) returns 3. - - =ODD(1) returns 1. - - =ODD(0) returns 1. - - =ODD(-3.1) returns -5.see also CEILING, FLOOR, EVEN, MROUND, +oldref="502">ODD +Rounds a positive number up to the nearest odd integer and a negative number down to the nearest odd integer. +Syntax +ODD(Number) + Returns Number rounded to the next odd integer up, away from zero. +Example + +=ODD(1.2) returns 3. + +=ODD(1) returns 1. + +=ODD(0) returns 1. + +=ODD(-3.1) returns -5.see also CEILING, FLOOR, EVEN, MROUND, INT, TRUNC, ROUND, ROUNDDOWN, ROUNDUP
-
+
FLOOR function - rounding;down to nearest multiple of significance +rounding;down to nearest multiple of significance mw added one entry FLOOR - Rounds a number down to the nearest multiple of Significance. - Syntax - FLOOR(Number; Significance; Mode) - - Number is the number that is to be rounded down. - - Significance is the value to whose multiple the number is to be rounded down. - - Mode is an optional value. If the Mode value is given and not equal to zero, and if Number and Significance are negative, then rounding is done based on the absolute value of the number. This parameter is ignored when exporting to MS Excel as Excel does not know any third parameter. - If both parameters Number and Significance are negative, and if the Mode value is equal to zero or is not specified, then the results in $[officename] Calc and Excel will differ after exporting. If you export the spreadsheet to Excel, use Mode=1 to see the same results in Excel as in Calc. - Example - - =FLOOR( -11;-2) returns -12 - - =FLOOR( -11;-2;0) returns -12 - - =FLOOR( -11;-2;1) returns -10see also CEILING, EVEN, ODD, MROUND, +oldref="512">FLOOR +Rounds a number down to the nearest multiple of Significance. +Syntax +FLOOR(Number; Significance; Mode) +Number is the number that is to be rounded down. +Significance is the value to whose multiple the number is to be rounded down. +Mode is an optional value. If the Mode value is given and not equal to zero, and if Number and Significance are negative, then rounding is done based on the absolute value of the number. This parameter is ignored when exporting to MS Excel as Excel does not know any third parameter. +If both parameters Number and Significance are negative, and if the Mode value is equal to zero or is not specified, then the results in $[officename] Calc and Excel will differ after exporting. If you export the spreadsheet to Excel, use Mode=1 to see the same results in Excel as in Calc. +Example + +=FLOOR( -11;-2) returns -12 + +=FLOOR( -11;-2;0) returns -12 + +=FLOOR( -11;-2;1) returns -10see also CEILING, EVEN, ODD, MROUND, INT, TRUNC, ROUND, ROUNDDOWN, ROUNDUP,
-
+
SIGN function - algebraic signs +algebraic signs mw added one entry SIGN - Returns the sign of a number. Returns 1 if the number is positive, -1 if negative and 0 if zero. - Syntax - SIGN(Number) - - Number is the number whose sign is to be determined. - Example - - =SIGN(3.4) returns 1. - - =SIGN(-4.5) returns -1.see also ABS -
-
+oldref="523">SIGN +Returns the sign of a number. Returns 1 if the number is positive, -1 if negative and 0 if zero. +Syntax +SIGN(Number) +Number is the number whose sign is to be determined. +Example + +=SIGN(3.4) returns 1. + +=SIGN(-4.5) returns -1.see also ABS +
+
MROUND function - nearest multiple +nearest multiple mw added one entry MROUND - Returns a number rounded to the nearest multiple of another number. - Syntax - MROUND(Number; Multiple) - Returns Number rounded to the nearest multiple of Multiple. - An alternative implementation would be Multiple * ROUND(Number/Multiple). - Example - - =MROUND(15.5;3) returns 15, as 15.5 is closer to 15 (= 3*5) than to 18 (= 3*6). - - =MROUND(1.4;0.5) returns 1.5 (= 0.5*3).see also CEILING, FLOOR, EVEN, ODD, +oldref="658">MROUND +Returns a number rounded to the nearest multiple of another number. +Syntax +MROUND(Number; Multiple) +Returns Number rounded to the nearest multiple of Multiple. +An alternative implementation would be Multiple * ROUND(Number/Multiple). +Example + +=MROUND(15.5;3) returns 15, as 15.5 is closer to 15 (= 3*5) than to 18 (= 3*6). + +=MROUND(1.4;0.5) returns 1.5 (= 0.5*3).see also CEILING, FLOOR, EVEN, ODD, INT, TRUNC, ROUND, ROUNDDOWN, ROUNDUP
-
+
SQRT function - square roots;positive numbers +square roots;positive numbers mw added one entry SQRT - Returns the positive square root of a number. - Syntax - SQRT(Number) - Returns the positive square root of Number. - Number must be positive. - Example - - =SQRT(16) returns 4. - - =SQRT(-16) returns an invalid argument error.see also SQRTPI, POWER -
-
+oldref="532">SQRT +Returns the positive square root of a number. +Syntax +SQRT(Number) +Returns the positive square root of Number. + Number must be positive. +Example + +=SQRT(16) returns 4. + +=SQRT(-16) returns an invalid argument error.see also SQRTPI, POWER +
+
SQRTPI function - square roots;products of Pi +square roots;products of Pi mw added one entry SQRTPI - Returns the square root of (PI times a number). - Syntax - SQRTPI(Number) - Returns the positive square root of (PI multiplied by Number). - This is equivalent to SQRT(PI()*Number). - Example - - =SQRTPI(2) returns the squareroot of (2PI), approximately 2.506628.see also SQRT -
-
+oldref="665">SQRTPI +Returns the square root of (PI times a number). +Syntax +SQRTPI(Number) +Returns the positive square root of (PI multiplied by Number). +This is equivalent to SQRT(PI()*Number). +Example + +=SQRTPI(2) returns the squareroot of (2PI), approximately 2.506628.see also SQRT +
+
random numbers; between limits - RANDBETWEEN function +RANDBETWEEN function mw changed "random numbers;" RANDBETWEEN - Returns an integer random number in a specified range. - Syntax - RANDBETWEEN(Bottom; Top) - Returns an integer random number between integers Bottom and Top (both inclusive). - This function produces a new random number each time Calc recalculates. To force Calc to recalculate manually press Shift+Command +oldref="671">RANDBETWEEN +Returns an integer random number in a specified range. +Syntax +RANDBETWEEN(Bottom; Top) +Returns an integer random number between integers Bottom and Top (both inclusive). +This function produces a new random number each time Calc recalculates. To force Calc to recalculate manually press Shift+Command Ctrl+F9. - To generate random numbers which never recalculate, copy cells containing this function, and use Edit - Paste Special (with Paste All and Formulas not marked and Numbers marked). - Example - - =RANDBETWEEN(20;30) returns an integer of between 20 and 30.see also RAND +To generate random numbers which never recalculate, copy cells containing this function, and use Edit - Paste Special (with Paste All and Formulas not marked and Numbers marked). +Example + +=RANDBETWEEN(20;30) returns an integer of between 20 and 30.see also RAND
-
+
RAND function - random numbers;between 0 and 1 +random numbers;between 0 and 1 mw added one entry RAND - Returns a random number between 0 and 1.The value of 0 can be returned, the value of 1 not.this is really true after issue 53642 will be fixed - Syntax - RAND() - This function produces a new random number each time Calc recalculates. To force Calc to recalculate manually press Shift+Command +oldref="542">RAND +Returns a random number between 0 and 1.The value of 0 can be returned, the value of 1 not.this is really true after issue 53642 will be fixed +Syntax +RAND() +This function produces a new random number each time Calc recalculates. To force Calc to recalculate manually press Shift+Command Ctrl+F9. - To generate random numbers which never recalculate, copy cells each containing =RAND(), and use Edit - Paste Special (with Paste All and Formulas not marked and Numbers marked). - Example - - =RAND() returns a random number between 0 and 1.see also RANDBETWEEN +To generate random numbers which never recalculate, copy cells each containing =RAND(), and use Edit - Paste Special (with Paste All and Formulas not marked and Numbers marked). +Example + +=RAND() returns a random number between 0 and 1.see also RANDBETWEEN
-
+
COUNTIF function - counting;specified cells +counting;specified cells mw added one entry -COUNTIF -Returns the number of cells that meet with certain criteria within a cell range. +COUNTIF +Returns the number of cells that meet with certain criteria within a cell range. -Syntax -COUNTIF(Range; Criteria) - -Range is the range to which the criteria are to be applied. - -Criteria indicates the criteria in the form of a number, an expression or a character string. These criteria determine which cells are counted. You may also enter a search text in the form of a regular expression, e.g. b.* for all words that begin with b. You may also indicate a cell range that contains the search criterion. If you search for literal text, enclose the text in double quotes. -Example -A1:A10 is a cell range containing the numbers 2000 to 2009. Cell B1 contains the number 2006. In cell B2, you enter a formula: - +Syntax +COUNTIF(Range; Criteria) +Range is the range to which the criteria are to be applied. +Criteria indicates the criteria in the form of a number, an expression or a character string. These criteria determine which cells are counted. You may also enter a search text in the form of a regular expression, e.g. b.* for all words that begin with b. You may also indicate a cell range that contains the search criterion. If you search for literal text, enclose the text in double quotes. +Example +A1:A10 is a cell range containing the numbers 2000 to 2009. Cell B1 contains the number 2006. In cell B2, you enter a formula: + =COUNTIF(A1:A10;2006) - this returns 1 - + =COUNTIF(A1:A10;B1) - this returns 1 - + =COUNTIF(A1:A10;">=2006") - this returns 4 - + =COUNTIF(A1:A10;"<"&B1) - when B1 contains 2006, this returns 6 - + =COUNTIF(A1:A10;C2) where cell C2 contains the text >2006 counts the number of cells in the range A1:A10 which are >2006 -To count only negative numbers: =COUNTIF(A1:A10;"<0") +To count only negative numbers: =COUNTIF(A1:A10;"<0")
- -
- + +
+ \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060109.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060109.xhp index 2e056abf28..ab90880518 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060109.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060109.xhp @@ -571,17 +571,19 @@ HYPERLINK When you click a cell that contains the HYPERLINK function, the hyperlink opens. - If you use the optional cell text parameter, the formula locates the URL, and then displays the text. + If you use the optional CellText parameter, the formula locates the URL, and then displays the text or number. To open a hyperlinked cell with the keyboard, select the cell, press F2 to enter the Edit mode, move the cursor in front of the hyperlink, press Shift+F10, and then choose Open Hyperlink. Syntax HYPERLINK("URL") or HYPERLINK("URL"; "CellText") - - URL specifies the link target. The optional CellText parameter is the text that is displayed in the cell and the result of the function. If the CellText parameter is not specified, the URL is displayed in the cell text and in the result of the function. + + URL specifies the link target. The optional CellText parameter is the text or a number that is displayed in the cell and will be returned as the result. If the CellText parameter is not specified, the URL is displayed in the cell text and will be returned as the result. + The number 0 is returned for empty cells and matrix elements. Example =HYPERLINK("http://www.example.org") displays the text "http://www.example.org" in the cell and executes the hyperlink http://www.example.org when clicked. =HYPERLINK("http://www.example.org";"Click here") displays the text "Click here" in the cell and executes the hyperlink http://www.example.org when clicked. + =HYPERLINK("http://www.example.org";12345) displays the number 12345 and executes the hyperlink http://www.example.org when clicked. =HYPERLINK($B4) where cell B4 contains http://www.example.org. The function adds http://www.example.org to the URL of the hyperlink cell and returns the same text which is used as formula result. @@ -589,7 +591,7 @@ =HYPERLINK("#Sheet1.A1";"Go to top") displays the text Go to top and jumps to cell Sheet1.A1 in this document. - =HYPERLINK("file:///C:/writer.odt#Specification";"Go to Writer bookmark") displays the text Go to Writer bookmark, loads the specified text document and jumps to bookmark "Specification". + =HYPERLINK("file:///C:/writer.odt#Specification";"Go to Writer bookmark")displays the text Go to Writer bookmark, loads the specified text document and jumps to bookmark "Specification".
GETPIVOTDATA function diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060110.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060110.xhp index 4cebc8fbbb..94801039de 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060110.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060110.xhp @@ -10,8 +10,8 @@ * * OpenOffice.org - a multi-platform office productivity suite * - * $RCSfile: 04060110.xhp,v $ - * $Revision: 1.17.4.1 $ + * $RCSfile: soffice2xmlhelp.xsl,v $ + * $Revision: 1.12 $ * * This file is part of OpenOffice.org. * @@ -35,534 +35,633 @@ - -Text Functions -/text/scalc/01/04060110.xhp - - - + + Text Functions + /text/scalc/01/04060110.xhp + + + text in cells; functions -functions; text functions -Function Wizard;text + functions; text functions + Function Wizard;text -Text Functions -This section contains descriptions of the Text functions. +Text Functions + This section contains descriptions of the Text functions. -
- -
+
+ +
ARABIC function -ARABIC -Calculates the value of a Roman number. The value range must be between 0 and 3999. -Syntax -ARABIC("Text") - -Text is the text that represents a Roman number. -Example - -=ARABIC("MXIV") returns 1014 - -=ARABIC("MMII") returns 2002 -
-
+ARABIC + Calculates the value of a Roman number. The value range must be between 0 and 3999. + Syntax + ARABIC("Text") + + Text is the text that represents a Roman number. + Example + + =ARABIC("MXIV") returns 1014 + + =ARABIC("MMII") returns 2002 +
+
ASC function i79585 -ASC -The ASC function converts full-width to half-width ASCII and katakana characters. Returns a text string. -See http://wiki.services.openoffice.org/mwiki/index.php?title=Calc/Features/JIS_and_ASC_functions for a conversion table. -Syntax -ASC("Text") - -Text is the text that contains characters to be converted. -See also JIS function. -
-
+ASC + The ASC function converts full-width to half-width ASCII and katakana characters. Returns a text string. + See http://wiki.services.openoffice.org/mwiki/index.php?title=Calc/Features/JIS_and_ASC_functions for a conversion table. + Syntax + ASC("Text") + + Text is the text that contains characters to be converted. + See also JIS function. +
+
BAHTTEXT function i66350 -BAHTTEXT -Converts a number to Thai text, including the Thai currency names. -Syntax -BAHTTEXT(Number) - -Number is any number. "Baht" is appended to the integral part of the number, and "Satang" is appended to the decimal part of the number. -Example - -=BAHTTEXT(12.65) returns a string in Thai characters with the meaning of "Twelve Baht and sixty five Satang". -
-
+BAHTTEXT + Converts a number to Thai text, including the Thai currency names. + Syntax + BAHTTEXT(Number) + + Number is any number. "Baht" is appended to the integral part of the number, and "Satang" is appended to the decimal part of the number. + Example + + =BAHTTEXT(12.65) returns a string in Thai characters with the meaning of "Twelve Baht and sixty five Satang". +
+
BASE function -BASE -Converts a positive integer to a specified base into a text from the numbering system. The digits 0-9 and the letters A-Z are used. -Syntax -BASE(Number; Radix; [MinimumLength]) - -Number is the positive integer to be converted. - -Radix indicates the base of the number system. It may be any positive integer between 2 and 36. - -MinimumLength (optional) determines the minimum length of the character sequence that has been created. If the text is shorter than the indicated minimum length, zeros are added to the left of the string. -Example +BASE + Converts a positive integer to a specified base into a text from the numbering system. The digits 0-9 and the letters A-Z are used. + Syntax + BASE(Number; Radix; [MinimumLength]) + + Number is the positive integer to be converted. + + Radix indicates the base of the number system. It may be any positive integer between 2 and 36. + + MinimumLength (optional) determines the minimum length of the character sequence that has been created. If the text is shorter than the indicated minimum length, zeros are added to the left of the string. + Example decimal system; converting to - -=BASE(17;10;4) returns 0017 in the decimal system. + + =BASE(17;10;4) returns 0017 in the decimal system. binary system; converting to - -=BASE(17;2) returns 10001 in the binary system. + + =BASE(17;2) returns 10001 in the binary system. hexadecimal system; converting to - -=BASE(255;16;4) returns 00FF in the hexadecimal system. -
-
+ + =BASE(255;16;4) returns 00FF in the hexadecimal system. +
+
CHAR function -CHAR -Converts a number into a character according to the current code table. The number can be a two-digit or three-digit integer number. - -Syntax -CHAR(Number) - -Number is a number between 1 and 255 representing the code value for the character. -Example - -=CHAR(100) returns the character d. -
-
+CHAR + Converts a number into a character according to the current code table. The number can be a two-digit or three-digit integer number. + + Syntax + CHAR(Number) + + Number is a number between 1 and 255 representing the code value for the character. + Example + + =CHAR(100) returns the character d. + ="abc" & CHAR(10) & "def" inserts a newline character into the string. +
+
CLEAN function -CLEAN -All non-printing characters are removed from the string. -Syntax -CLEAN("Text") - -Text refers to the text from which to remove all non-printable characters. -
-
+CLEAN + All non-printing characters are removed from the string. + Syntax + CLEAN("Text") + + Text refers to the text from which to remove all non-printable characters. +
+
CODE function -CODE -Returns a numeric code for the first character in a text string. -Syntax -CODE("Text") - -Text is the text for which the code of the first character is to be found. - -Example - -=CODE("Hieronymus") returns 72, =CODE("hieroglyphic") returns 104. -The code used here does not refer to ASCII, but to the code table currently loaded. -
-
+CODE + Returns a numeric code for the first character in a text string. + Syntax + CODE("Text") + + Text is the text for which the code of the first character is to be found. + + Example + + =CODE("Hieronymus") returns 72, =CODE("hieroglyphic") returns 104. + The code used here does not refer to ASCII, but to the code table currently loaded. +
+
CONCATENATE function -CONCATENATE -Combines several text strings into one string. -Syntax -CONCATENATE("Text1"; ...; "Text30") - -Text 1; Text 2; ... represent up to 30 text passages which are to be combined into one string. -Example - -=CONCATENATE("Good ";"Morning ";"Mrs. ";"Doe") returns: Good Morning Mrs. Doe. -
-
+CONCATENATE + Combines several text strings into one string. + Syntax + CONCATENATE("Text1"; ...; "Text30") + + Text 1; Text 2; ... represent up to 30 text passages which are to be combined into one string. + Example + + =CONCATENATE("Good ";"Morning ";"Mrs. ";"Doe") returns: Good Morning Mrs. Doe. +
+
DECIMAL function -DECIMAL -Converts text with characters from a number system to a positive integer in the base radix given. The radix must be in the range 2 to 36. Spaces and tabs are ignored. The Text field is not case-sensitive. -If the radix is 16, a leading x or X or 0x or 0X, and an appended h or H, is disregarded. If the radix is 2, an appended b or B is disregarded. Other characters that do not belong to the number system generate an error. -Syntax -DECIMAL("Text"; Radix) - -Text is the text to be converted. To differentiate between a hexadecimal number, such as A1 and the reference to cell A1, you must place the number in quotation marks, for example, "A1" or "FACE". - -Radix indicates the base of the number system. It may be any positive integer between 2 and 36. -Example - -=DECIMAL("17";10) returns 17. - -=DECIMAL("FACE";16) returns 64206. - -=DECIMAL("0101";2) returns 5. -
-
+DECIMAL + Converts text with characters from a number system to a positive integer in the base radix given. The radix must be in the range 2 to 36. Spaces and tabs are ignored. The Text field is not case-sensitive. + If the radix is 16, a leading x or X or 0x or 0X, and an appended h or H, is disregarded. If the radix is 2, an appended b or B is disregarded. Other characters that do not belong to the number system generate an error. + Syntax + DECIMAL("Text"; Radix) + + Text is the text to be converted. To differentiate between a hexadecimal number, such as A1 and the reference to cell A1, you must place the number in quotation marks, for example, "A1" or "FACE". + + Radix indicates the base of the number system. It may be any positive integer between 2 and 36. + Example + + =DECIMAL("17";10) returns 17. + + =DECIMAL("FACE";16) returns 64206. + + =DECIMAL("0101";2) returns 5. +
+
DOLLAR function -DOLLAR -Converts a number to an amount in the currency format, rounded to a specified decimal place. In the Value field enter the number to be converted to currency. Optionally, you may enter the number of decimal places in the Decimals field. If no value is specified, all numbers in currency format will be displayed with two decimal places. -You set the currency format in your system settings. -Syntax -DOLLAR(Value; Decimals) - -Value is a number, a reference to a cell containing a number, or a formula which returns a number. - -Decimals is the optional number of decimal places. -Example - -=DOLLAR(255) returns $255.00. - -=DOLLAR(367.456;2) returns $367.46. Use the decimal separator that corresponds to the current locale setting. -
-
+DOLLAR + Converts a number to an amount in the currency format, rounded to a specified decimal place. In the Value field enter the number to be converted to currency. Optionally, you may enter the number of decimal places in the Decimals field. If no value is specified, all numbers in currency format will be displayed with two decimal places. + You set the currency format in your system settings. + Syntax + DOLLAR(Value; Decimals) + + Value is a number, a reference to a cell containing a number, or a formula which returns a number. + + Decimals is the optional number of decimal places. + Example + + =DOLLAR(255) returns $255.00. + + =DOLLAR(367.456;2) returns $367.46. Use the decimal separator that corresponds to the current locale setting. +
+
EXACT function -EXACT -Compares two text strings and returns TRUE if they are identical. This function is case-sensitive. -Syntax -EXACT("Text1"; "Text2") - -Text1 refers to the first text to compare. - -Text2 is the second text to compare. -Example - -=EXACT("Sun microsystems";"Sun Microsystems") returns FALSE. -
-
+EXACT + Compares two text strings and returns TRUE if they are identical. This function is case-sensitive. + Syntax + EXACT("Text1"; "Text2") + + Text1 refers to the first text to compare. + + Text2 is the second text to compare. + Example + + =EXACT("Sun microsystems";"Sun Microsystems") returns FALSE. +
+
FIND function -FIND -Looks for a string of text within another string. You can also define where to begin the search. The search term can be a number or any string of characters. The search is case-sensitive. -Syntax -FIND("FindText"; "Text"; Position) - -FindText refers to the text to be found. - -Text is the text where the search takes place. - -Position (optional) is the position in the text from which the search starts. -Example - -=FIND(76;998877665544) returns 6. -
-
+FIND + Looks for a string of text within another string. You can also define where to begin the search. The search term can be a number or any string of characters. The search is case-sensitive. + Syntax + FIND("FindText"; "Text"; Position) + + FindText refers to the text to be found. + + Text is the text where the search takes place. + + Position (optional) is the position in the text from which the search starts. + Example + + =FIND(76;998877665544) returns 6. +
+
FIXED function -FIXED -Returns a number as text with a specified number of decimal places and optional thousands separators. -Syntax -FIXED(Number; Decimals; NoThousandsSeparators) - -Number refers to the number to be formatted. - -Decimals refers to the number of decimal places to be displayed. - -NoThousandsSeparators (optional) determines whether the thousands separator is used. If the parameter is a number not equal to 0, the thousands separator is suppressed. If the parameter is equal to 0 or if it is missing altogether, the thousands separators of your current locale setting are displayed. -Example - -=FIXED(1234567.89;3) returns 1,234,567.890 as a text string. - -=FIXED(1234567.89;3;1) returns 1234567.890 as a text string. -
-
+FIXED + Returns a number as text with a specified number of decimal places and optional thousands separators. + Syntax + FIXED(Number; Decimals; NoThousandsSeparators) + + Number refers to the number to be formatted. + + Decimals refers to the number of decimal places to be displayed. + + NoThousandsSeparators (optional) determines whether the thousands separator is used. If the parameter is a number not equal to 0, the thousands separator is suppressed. If the parameter is equal to 0 or if it is missing altogether, the thousands separators of your current locale setting are displayed. + Example + + =FIXED(1234567.89;3) returns 1,234,567.890 as a text string. + + =FIXED(1234567.89;3;1) returns 1234567.890 as a text string. +
+
JIS function -JIS -The JIS function converts half-width to full-width ASCII and katakana characters. Returns a text string. -See http://wiki.services.openoffice.org/mwiki/index.php?title=Calc/Features/JIS_and_ASC_functions for a conversion table. -Syntax -JIS("Text") - -Text is the text that contains characters to be converted. -See also ASC function. -
-
+JIS + The JIS function converts half-width to full-width ASCII and katakana characters. Returns a text string. + See http://wiki.services.openoffice.org/mwiki/index.php?title=Calc/Features/JIS_and_ASC_functions for a conversion table. + Syntax + JIS("Text") + + Text is the text that contains characters to be converted. + See also ASC function. +
+
LEFT function -LEFT -Returns the first character or characters of a text. -Syntax -LEFT("Text"; Number) - -Text is the text where the initial partial words are to be determined. - -Number (optional) specifies the number of characters for the start text. If this parameter is not defined, one character is returned. -Example - -=LEFT("output";3) returns “out”. -
-
+LEFT + Returns the first character or characters of a text. + Syntax + LEFT("Text"; Number) + + Text is the text where the initial partial words are to be determined. + + Number (optional) specifies the number of characters for the start text. If this parameter is not defined, one character is returned. + Example + + =LEFT("output";3) returns “out”. +
+
LEN function -LEN -Returns the length of a string including spaces. -Syntax -LEN("Text") - -Text is the text whose length is to be determined. -Example - -=LEN("Good Afternoon") returns 14. - -=LEN(12345.67) returns 8. -
-
+LEN + Returns the length of a string including spaces. + Syntax + LEN("Text") + + Text is the text whose length is to be determined. + Example + + =LEN("Good Afternoon") returns 14. + + =LEN(12345.67) returns 8. +
+
LOWER function -LOWER -Converts all uppercase letters in a text string to lowercase. -Syntax -LOWER("Text") - -Text refers to the text to be converted. -Example - -=LOWER("Sun") returns sun. -
-
+LOWER + Converts all uppercase letters in a text string to lowercase. + Syntax + LOWER("Text") + + Text refers to the text to be converted. + Example + + =LOWER("Sun") returns sun. +
+
MID function -MID -Returns a text string of a text. The parameters specify the starting position and the number of characters. -Syntax -MID("Text"; Start; Number) - -Text is the text containing the characters to extract. - -Start is the position of the first character in the text to extract. - -Number specifies the number of characters in the part of the text. -Example - -=MID("Sun Microsystems";5;5) returns Micro. -
-
+MID + Returns a text string of a text. The parameters specify the starting position and the number of characters. + Syntax + MID("Text"; Start; Number) + + Text is the text containing the characters to extract. + + Start is the position of the first character in the text to extract. + + Number specifies the number of characters in the part of the text. + Example + + =MID("Sun Microsystems";5;5) returns Micro. +
+
PROPER function -PROPER -Capitalizes the first letter in all words of a text string. -Syntax -PROPER("Text") - -Text refers to the text to be converted. -Example - -=PROPER("sun microsystems") returns Sun Microsystems. -
-
+PROPER + Capitalizes the first letter in all words of a text string. + Syntax + PROPER("Text") + + Text refers to the text to be converted. + Example + + =PROPER("sun microsystems") returns Sun Microsystems. +
+
REPLACE function -REPLACE -Replaces part of a text string with a different text string. This function can be used to replace both characters and numbers (which are automatically converted to text). The result of the function is always displayed as text. If you intend to perform further calculations with a number which has been replaced by text, you will need to convert it back to a number using the VALUE function. -Any text containing numbers must be enclosed in quotation marks if you do not want it to be interpreted as a number and automatically converted to text. -Syntax -REPLACE("Text"; Position; Length; "NewText") - -Text refers to text of which a part will be replaced. - -Position refers to the position within the text where the replacement will begin. - -Length is the number of characters in Text to be replaced. - -NewText refers to the text which replaces Text. -Example - -=REPLACE("1234567";1;1;"444") returns "444234567". One character at position 1 is replaced by the complete NewText. -
-
+REPLACE + Replaces part of a text string with a different text string. This function can be used to replace both characters and numbers (which are automatically converted to text). The result of the function is always displayed as text. If you intend to perform further calculations with a number which has been replaced by text, you will need to convert it back to a number using the VALUE function. + Any text containing numbers must be enclosed in quotation marks if you do not want it to be interpreted as a number and automatically converted to text. + Syntax + REPLACE("Text"; Position; Length; "NewText") + + Text refers to text of which a part will be replaced. + + Position refers to the position within the text where the replacement will begin. + + Length is the number of characters in Text to be replaced. + + NewText refers to the text which replaces Text. + Example + + =REPLACE("1234567";1;1;"444") returns "444234567". One character at position 1 is replaced by the complete NewText. +
+
REPT function -REPT -Repeats a character string by the given number of copies. -Syntax -REPT("Text"; Number) - -Text is the text to be repeated. - -Number is the number of repetitions. -The result can be a maximum of 255 characters. -Example - -=REPT("Good morning";2) returns Good morningGood morning. -
- + -
+RIGHT + Returns the last character or characters of a text. + Syntax + RIGHT("Text"; Number) + + Text is the text of which the right part is to be determined. + + Number (optional) is the number of characters from the right part of the text. + Example + + =RIGHT("Sun";2) returns un. +
+
ROMAN function -ROMAN -Converts a number into a Roman numeral. The value range must be between 0 and 3999, the modes can be integers from 0 to 4. -Syntax -ROMAN(Number; Mode) - -Number is the number that is to be converted into a Roman numeral. - -Mode (optional) indicates the degree of simplification. The higher the value, the greater is the simplification of the Roman number. -Example - -=ROMAN(999) returns CMXCIX - -=ROMAN(999;0) returns CMXCIX - -=ROMAN (999;1) returns LMVLIV - -=ROMAN(999;2) returns XMIX - -=ROMAN(999;3) returns VMIV - -=ROMAN(999;4) returns IM -
- + -
+SEARCH + Returns the position of a text segment within a character string. You can set the start of the search as an option. The search text can be a number or any sequence of characters. The search is not case-sensitive. + + Syntax + SEARCH("FindText"; "Text"; Position) + + FindText is the text to be searched for. + + Text is the text where the search will take place. + + Position (optional) is the position in the text where the search is to start. + Example + + =SEARCH(54;998877665544) returns 10. +
+
SUBSTITUTE function -SUBSTITUTE -Substitutes new text for old text in a string. -Syntax -SUBSTITUTE("Text"; "SearchText"; "NewText"; Occurrence) - -Text is the text in which text segments are to be exchanged. - -SearchText is the text segment that is to be replaced (a number of times). - -NewText is the text that is to replace the text segment. - -Occurrence (optional) indicates which occurrence of the search text is to be replaced. If this parameter is missing the search text is replaced throughout. -Example - -=SUBSTITUTE("123123123";"3";"abc") returns 12abc12abc12abc. - -=SUBSTITUTE("123123123";"3";"abc";2) returns 12312abc123. -
-
+SUBSTITUTE + Substitutes new text for old text in a string. + Syntax + SUBSTITUTE("Text"; "SearchText"; "NewText"; Occurrence) + + Text is the text in which text segments are to be exchanged. + + SearchText is the text segment that is to be replaced (a number of times). + + NewText is the text that is to replace the text segment. + + Occurrence (optional) indicates which occurrence of the search text is to be replaced. If this parameter is missing the search text is replaced throughout. + Example + + =SUBSTITUTE("123123123";"3";"abc") returns 12abc12abc12abc. + + =SUBSTITUTE("123123123";"3";"abc";2) returns 12312abc123. +
+
T function -T -This function returns the target text, or a blank text string if the target is not text. -Syntax -T(Value) -If Value is a text string or refers to a text string, T returns that text string; otherwise it returns a blank text string. -Example - -=T(12345) returns an empty string. - -=T("12345") returns the string 12345. -
-
+T + This function returns the target text, or a blank text string if the target is not text. + Syntax + T(Value) + If Value is a text string or refers to a text string, T returns that text string; otherwise it returns a blank text string. + Example + + =T(12345) returns an empty string. + + =T("12345") returns the string 12345. +
+
TEXT function -TEXT -Converts a number into text according to a given format. -Syntax -TEXT(Number; Format) - -Number is the numerical value to be converted. - -Format is the text which defines the format. Use decimal and thousands separators according to the language set in the cell format. -Example - -=TEXT(12.34567;"###.##") returns the text 12.35 - -=TEXT(12.34567;"000.00") returns the text 012.35 -
-
+TEXT + Converts a number into text according to a given format. + Syntax + TEXT(Number; Format) + + Number is the numerical value to be converted. + + Format is the text which defines the format. Use decimal and thousands separators according to the language set in the cell format. + Example + + =TEXT(12.34567;"###.##") returns the text 12.35 + + =TEXT(12.34567;"000.00") returns the text 012.35 +
+
TRIM function -TRIM -Removes spaces from a string, leaving only a single space character between words. -Syntax -TRIM("Text") - -Text refers to text in which spaces are removed. -Example - -=TRIM("hello") returns hello. -
-
+TRIM + Removes spaces from a string, leaving only a single space character between words. + Syntax + TRIM("Text") + + Text refers to text in which spaces are removed. + Example + + =TRIM("hello") returns hello. +
+
+ +UNICHAR function + +UNICHAR + Converts a code number into a Unicode character or letter. + Syntax + UNICHAR(number) + Example + =UNICHAR(169) returns the Copyright character ©. +
+
+ +UNICODE function + +UNICODE + Returns the numeric code for the first Unicode character in a text string. + Syntax + UNICODE("Text") + Example + =UNICODE("©") returns the Unicode number 169 for the Copyright character. +
+
UPPER function -UPPER -Converts the string specified in the text field to uppercase. -Syntax -UPPER("Text") - -Text refers to the lower case letters you want to convert to upper case. -Example - -=UPPER("Good Morning") returns GOOD MORNING. -
-
+UPPER + Converts the string specified in the text field to uppercase. + Syntax + UPPER("Text") + + Text refers to the lower case letters you want to convert to upper case. + Example + + =UPPER("Good Morning") returns GOOD MORNING. +
+
VALUE function -VALUE -Converts a text string into a number. -Syntax -VALUE("Text") - -Text is the text to be converted to a number. -Example - -=VALUE("4321") returns 4321. -
+VALUE + Converts a text string into a number. + Syntax + VALUE("Text") + + Text is the text to be converted to a number. + Example + + =VALUE("4321") returns 4321. +
- -
- - + +
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060116.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060116.xhp index c416f15632..b03519e274 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060116.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060116.xhp @@ -11,7 +11,7 @@ * OpenOffice.org - a multi-platform office productivity suite * * $RCSfile: soffice2xmlhelp.xsl,v $ - * $Revision: 1.10 $ + * $Revision: 1.12 $ * * This file is part of OpenOffice.org. * @@ -392,10 +392,11 @@ =OCT2HEX(144;4) returns 0064.
-CONVERT function +CONVERT_ADD function -CONVERTwas CONVERT_ADD before. Now CONVERT was changed to EUROCONVERT, and CONVERT_ADD was changed to CONVERT +CONVERT_ADD Converts a value from one unit of measure to the corresponding value in another unit of measure. Enter the units of measures directly as text in quotation marks or as a reference. If you enter the units of measure in cells, they must correspond exactly with the following list which is case sensitive: For example, in order to enter a lower case l (for liter) in a cell, enter the apostrophe ' immediately followed by l. @@ -504,7 +505,7 @@
- Each unit of measure must be preceded by a prefix character from the following list: + Each unit of measure can be preceded by a prefix character from the following list: @@ -529,11 +530,26 @@ e, h, k, M, G, T, P, E, Z, Y + + + Information units "bit" and "byte" may also be prefixed by one of the following IEC 60027-2 / IEEE 1541 prefixes: + + + ki kibi 1024 + Mi mebi 1048576 + Gi gibi 1073741824 + Ti tebi 1099511627776 + Pi pebi 1125899906842620 + Ei exbi 1152921504606850000 + Zi zebi 1180591620717410000000 + Yi yobi 1208925819614630000000000 + +
Syntax - CONVERT(Number; "FromUnit"; "ToUnit") + CONVERT_ADD(Number; "FromUnit"; "ToUnit") Number is the number to be converted. @@ -543,9 +559,9 @@ Examples - =CONVERT(10;"HP";"PS") returns, rounded to two decimal places, 10.14. 10 HP equal 10.14 PS. + =CONVERT_ADD(10;"HP";"PS") returns, rounded to two decimal places, 10.14. 10 HP equal 10.14 PS. - =CONVERT(10;"km";"mi") returns, rounded to two decimal places, 6.21. 10 kilometers equal 6.21 miles. The k is the permitted prefix character for the factor 10^3. + =CONVERT_ADD(10;"km";"mi") returns, rounded to two decimal places, 6.21. 10 kilometers equal 6.21 miles. The k is the permitted prefix character for the factor 10^3.
FACTDOUBLE function diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060181.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060181.xhp index 500a562f2f..a33723f370 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060181.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060181.xhp @@ -417,6 +417,7 @@
CHISQDIST function +chi-square distribution CHISQDIST Returns the value of the probability density function or the cumulative distribution function for the chi-square distribution. @@ -456,4 +457,4 @@
- \ No newline at end of file + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060183.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060183.xhp index 7ef96b3843..9c6ab30e93 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060183.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060183.xhp @@ -188,13 +188,15 @@ LOGNORMDIST Returns the cumulative lognormal distribution. Syntax -LOGNORMDIST(Number; Mean; StDev) +LOGNORMDIST(Number; Mean; StDev; Cumulative) Number is the probability value for which the standard logarithmic distribution is to be calculated. -Mean is the mean value of the standard logarithmic distribution. +Mean (optional) is the mean value of the standard logarithmic distribution. -StDev is the standard deviation of the standard logarithmic distribution. +StDev (optional) is the standard deviation of the standard logarithmic distribution. + +Cumulative (optional) = 0 calculates the density function, Cumulative = 1 calculates the distribution. Example =LOGNORMDIST(0.1;0;1) returns 0.01. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060184.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060184.xhp index 735a1b6d79..83ed0d9440 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060184.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060184.xhp @@ -3,45 +3,45 @@ - +* +* DO NOT ALTER OR REMOVE COPYRIGHT NOTICES OR THIS FILE HEADER. +* +* Copyright 2008 by Sun Microsystems, Inc. +* +* OpenOffice.org - a multi-platform office productivity suite +* +* $RCSfile: soffice2xmlhelp.xsl,v $ +* $Revision: 1.10 $ +* +* This file is part of OpenOffice.org. +* +* OpenOffice.org is free software: you can redistribute it and/or modify +* it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public License version 3 +* only, as published by the Free Software Foundation. +* +* OpenOffice.org is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, +* but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of +* MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the +* GNU Lesser General Public License version 3 for more details +* (a copy is included in the LICENSE file that accompanied this code). +* +* You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public License +* version 3 along with OpenOffice.org. If not, see +* +* for a copy of the LGPLv3 License. +* +************************************************************************ +--> + - - Statistical Functions Part Four - /text/scalc/01/04060184.xhp - - - - Statistical Functions Part Four + +Statistical Functions Part Four +/text/scalc/01/04060184.xhp + + + +Statistical Functions Part Four
@@ -49,354 +49,323 @@ MAX - Returns the maximum value in a list of arguments. - Returns 0 if no numeric value and no error was encountered in the cell range(s) passed as cell reference(s). Text cells are ignored by MIN() and MAX(). The functions MINA() and MAXA() return 0 if no value (numeric or text) and no error was encountered. Passing a literal string argument to MIN() or MAX(), e.g. MIN("string"), still results in an error. - Syntax - MAX(Number1; Number2; ...Number30) - - Number1; Number2;...Number30 are numerical values or ranges. - Example - - =MAX(A1;A2;A3;50;100;200) returns the largest value from the list. - - =MAX(A1:B100) returns the largest value from the list. -
-
+Returns the maximum value in a list of arguments. +Returns 0 if no numeric value and no error was encountered in the cell range(s) passed as cell reference(s). Text cells are ignored by MIN() and MAX(). The functions MINA() and MAXA() return 0 if no value (numeric or text) and no error was encountered. Passing a literal string argument to MIN() or MAX(), e.g. MIN("string"), still results in an error. +Syntax +MAX(Number1; Number2; ...Number30) +Number1; Number2;...Number30 are numerical values or ranges. +Example + +=MAX(A1;A2;A3;50;100;200) returns the largest value from the list. + +=MAX(A1:B100) returns the largest value from the list. +
+
MAXA function MAXA - Returns the maximum value in a list of arguments. In opposite to MAX, here you can enter text. The value of the text is 0. - The functions MINA() and MAXA() return 0 if no value (numeric or text) and no error was encountered. - Syntax - MAXA(Value1; Value2; ... Value30) - - Value1; Value2;...Value30 are values or ranges. Text has the value of 0. - Example - - =MAXA(A1;A2;A3;50;100;200;"Text") returns the largest value from the list. - - =MAXA(A1:B100) returns the largest value from the list. -
-
+oldref="139">MAXA +Returns the maximum value in a list of arguments. In opposite to MAX, here you can enter text. The value of the text is 0. +The functions MINA() and MAXA() return 0 if no value (numeric or text) and no error was encountered. +Syntax +MAXA(Value1; Value2; ... Value30) +Value1; Value2;...Value30 are values or ranges. Text has the value of 0. +Example + +=MAXA(A1;A2;A3;50;100;200;"Text") returns the largest value from the list. + +=MAXA(A1:B100) returns the largest value from the list. +
+
MEDIAN function MEDIAN - Returns the median of a set of numbers. In a set containing an uneven number of values, the median will be the number in the middle of the set and in a set containing an even number of values, it will be the mean of the two values in the middle of the set. - Syntax - MEDIAN(Number1; Number2; ...Number30) - - Number1; Number2;...Number30 are values or ranges, which represent a sample. Each number can also be replaced by a reference. - Example - for an odd number: =MEDIAN(1;5;9;20;21) returns 9 as the median value. - for an even number: =MEDIAN(1;5;9;20) returns the average of the two middle values 5 and 9, thus 7. -
-
+oldref="11">MEDIAN +Returns the median of a set of numbers. In a set containing an uneven number of values, the median will be the number in the middle of the set and in a set containing an even number of values, it will be the mean of the two values in the middle of the set. +Syntax +MEDIAN(Number1; Number2; ...Number30) +Number1; Number2;...Number30 are values or ranges, which represent a sample. Each number can also be replaced by a reference. +Example +for an odd number: =MEDIAN(1;5;9;20;21) returns 9 as the median value. +for an even number: =MEDIAN(1;5;9;20) returns the average of the two middle values 5 and 9, thus 7. +
+
MIN function MIN - Returns the minimum value in a list of arguments. - Returns 0 if no numeric value and no error was encountered in the cell range(s) passed as cell reference(s). Text cells are ignored by MIN() and MAX(). The functions MINA() and MAXA() return 0 if no value (numeric or text) and no error was encountered. Passing a literal string argument to MIN() or MAX(), e.g. MIN("string"), still results in an error. - Syntax - MIN(Number1; Number2; ...Number30) - - Number1; Number2;...Number30 are numerical values or ranges. - Example - - =MIN(A1:B100) returns the smallest value in the list. -
-
+oldref="19">MIN +Returns the minimum value in a list of arguments. +Returns 0 if no numeric value and no error was encountered in the cell range(s) passed as cell reference(s). Text cells are ignored by MIN() and MAX(). The functions MINA() and MAXA() return 0 if no value (numeric or text) and no error was encountered. Passing a literal string argument to MIN() or MAX(), e.g. MIN("string"), still results in an error. +Syntax +MIN(Number1; Number2; ...Number30) +Number1; Number2;...Number30 are numerical values or ranges. +Example + +=MIN(A1:B100) returns the smallest value in the list. +
+
MINA function MINA - Returns the minimum value in a list of arguments. Here you can also enter text. The value of the text is 0. - The functions MINA() and MAXA() return 0 if no value (numeric or text) and no error was encountered. - Syntax - MINA(Value1; Value2; ... Value30) - - Value1; Value2;...Value30 are values or ranges. Text has the value of 0. - Example - - =MINA(1;"Text";20) returns 0. - - =MINA(A1:B100) returns the smallest value in the list. -
-
+oldref="148">MINA +Returns the minimum value in a list of arguments. Here you can also enter text. The value of the text is 0. +The functions MINA() and MAXA() return 0 if no value (numeric or text) and no error was encountered. +Syntax +MINA(Value1; Value2; ... Value30) +Value1; Value2;...Value30 are values or ranges. Text has the value of 0. +Example + +=MINA(1;"Text";20) returns 0. + +=MINA(A1:B100) returns the smallest value in the list. +
+
AVEDEV function - averages;statistical functions +averages;statistical functions mw added "averages;" AVEDEV Returns the average of the absolute deviations of data points from their mean. Displays the diffusion in a data set. Syntax AVEDEV(Number1; Number2; ...Number30) - -Number1, Number2,...Number30 are values or ranges that represent a sample. Each number can also be replaced by a reference. +Number1, Number2,...Number30 are values or ranges that represent a sample. Each number can also be replaced by a reference. Example -=AVEDEV(A1:A50) - + =AVEDEV(A1:A50) +
AVERAGE function AVERAGE - Returns the average of the arguments. - Syntax - AVERAGE(Number1; Number2; ...Number30) - - Number1; Number2;...Number 0 are numerical values or ranges. - Example - - =AVERAGE(A1:A50) - -
-
+oldref="35">AVERAGE +Returns the average of the arguments. +Syntax +AVERAGE(Number1; Number2; ...Number30) +Number1; Number2;...Number 0 are numerical values or ranges. +Example + +=AVERAGE(A1:A50) + +
+
AVERAGEA function AVERAGEA - Returns the average of the arguments. The value of a text is 0. - Syntax - AVERAGEA(Value1; Value2; ... Value30) - - Value1; Value2;...Value30 are values or ranges. Text has the value of 0. - Example - - =AVERAGEA(A1:A50) - -
-
+oldref="157">AVERAGEA +Returns the average of the arguments. The value of a text is 0. +Syntax +AVERAGEA(Value1; Value2; ... Value30) +Value1; Value2;...Value30 are values or ranges. Text has the value of 0. +Example + +=AVERAGEA(A1:A50) + +
+
MODE function - most common value +most common value mw added one entry MODE - Returns the most common value in a data set. If there are several values with the same frequency, it returns the smallest value. An error occurs when a value doesn't appear twice. - Syntax - MODE(Number1; Number2; ...Number30) - - Number1; Number2;...Number30 are numerical values or ranges. - Example - - =MODE(A1:A50) - -
-
+oldref="43">MODE +Returns the most common value in a data set. If there are several values with the same frequency, it returns the smallest value. An error occurs when a value doesn't appear twice. +Syntax +MODE(Number1; Number2; ...Number30) +Number1; Number2;...Number30 are numerical values or ranges. +Example + +=MODE(A1:A50) + +
+
NEGBINOMDIST function - negative binomial distribution +negative binomial distribution mw added one entry NEGBINOMDIST - Returns the negative binomial distribution. - Syntax - NEGBINOMDIST(X; R; SP) - - X represents the value returned for unsuccessful tests. - - R represents the value returned for successful tests. - - SP is the probability of the success of an attempt. - Example - - =NEGBINOMDIST(1;1;0.5) returns 0.25. -
-
+oldref="51">NEGBINOMDIST +Returns the negative binomial distribution. +Syntax +NEGBINOMDIST(X; R; SP) +X represents the value returned for unsuccessful tests. +R represents the value returned for successful tests. +SP is the probability of the success of an attempt. +Example + +=NEGBINOMDIST(1;1;0.5) returns 0.25. +
+
NORMINV function - normal distribution;inverse of +normal distribution;inverse of mw added one entry NORMINV - Returns the inverse of the normal cumulative distribution. - Syntax - NORMINV(Number; Mean; StDev) - - Number represents the probability value used to determine the inverse normal distribution. - - Mean represents the mean value in the normal distribution. - - StDev represents the standard deviation of the normal distribution. - Example - - =NORMINV(0.9;63;5) returns 69.41. If the average egg weighs 63 grams with a standard deviation of 5, then there will be 90% probability that the egg will not be heavier than 69.41g grams. -
-
+oldref="61">NORMINV +Returns the inverse of the normal cumulative distribution. +Syntax +NORMINV(Number; Mean; StDev) +Number represents the probability value used to determine the inverse normal distribution. +Mean represents the mean value in the normal distribution. +StDev represents the standard deviation of the normal distribution. +Example + +=NORMINV(0.9;63;5) returns 69.41. If the average egg weighs 63 grams with a standard deviation of 5, then there will be 90% probability that the egg will not be heavier than 69.41g grams. +
+
NORMDIST function - density function +density function mw added one entry NORMDIST - Returns the density function or the normal cumulative distribution. - Syntax - NORMDIST(Number; Mean; StDev; C) - - Number is the value of the distribution based on which the normal distribution is to be calculated. - - Mean is the mean value of the distribution. - - StDev is the standard deviation of the distribution. - - C = 0 calculates the density function; C = 1 calculates the distribution. - Example - - =NORMDIST(70;63;5;0) returns 0.03. - - =NORMDIST(70;63;5;1) returns 0.92. -
-
+oldref="71">NORMDIST +Returns the density function or the normal cumulative distribution. +Syntax +NORMDIST(Number; Mean; StDev; C) +Number is the value of the distribution based on which the normal distribution is to be calculated. +Mean is the mean value of the distribution. +StDev is the standard deviation of the distribution. +C is optional. C = 0 calculates the density function, C = 1 calculates the distribution. +Example + +=NORMDIST(70;63;5;0) returns 0.03. + +=NORMDIST(70;63;5;1) returns 0.92. +
+
PEARSON function PEARSON - Returns the Pearson product moment correlation coefficient r. - Syntax - PEARSON(Data1; Data2) - - Data1 represents the array of the first data set. - - Data2 represents the array of the second data set. - Example - - =PEARSON(A1:A30;B1:B30) returns the Pearson correlation coefficient of both data sets. -
-
+oldref="83">PEARSON +Returns the Pearson product moment correlation coefficient r. +Syntax +PEARSON(Data1; Data2) +Data1 represents the array of the first data set. +Data2 represents the array of the second data set. +Example + +=PEARSON(A1:A30;B1:B30) returns the Pearson correlation coefficient of both data sets. +
+
PHI function PHI - Returns the values of the distribution function for a standard normal distribution. - Syntax - PHI(Number) - - Number represents the value based on which the standard normal distribution is calculated. - Example - - =PHI(2.25) = 0.03 - - =PHI(-2.25) = 0.03 - - =PHI(0) = 0.4 -
-
+oldref="92">PHI +Returns the values of the distribution function for a standard normal distribution. +Syntax +PHI(Number) +Number represents the value based on which the standard normal distribution is calculated. +Example + +=PHI(2.25) = 0.03 + +=PHI(-2.25) = 0.03 + +=PHI(0) = 0.4 +
+
POISSON function POISSON - Returns the Poisson distribution. - Syntax - POISSON(Number; Mean; C) - - Number represents the value based on which the Poisson distribution is calculated. - - Mean represents the middle value of the Poisson distribution. - - C (optional) = 0 or False calculates the density function; C = 1 or True calculates the distribution. When omitted, the default value True is inserted when you save the document, for best compatibility with other programs and older versions of %PRODUCTNAME. - Example - - =POISSON(60;50;1) returns 0.93. -
-
+Returns the Poisson distribution. +Syntax +POISSON(Number; Mean; C) +Number represents the value based on which the Poisson distribution is calculated. +Mean represents the middle value of the Poisson distribution. +C (optional) = 0 or False calculates the density function; C = 1 or True calculates the distribution. When omitted, the default value True is inserted when you save the document, for best compatibility with other programs and older versions of %PRODUCTNAME. +Example + +=POISSON(60;50;1) returns 0.93. +
+
PERCENTILE function PERCENTILE - Returns the alpha-percentile of data values in an array. A percentile returns the scale value for a data series which goes from the smallest (Alpha=0) to the largest value (alpha=1) of a data series. For Alpha = 25%, the percentile means the first quartile; Alpha = 50% is the MEDIAN. - Syntax - PERCENTILE(Data; Alpha) - - Data represents the array of data. - - Alpha represents the percentage of the scale between 0 and 1. - Example - - =PERCENTILE(A1:A50;0.1) represents the value in the data set, which equals 10% of the total data scale in A1:A50. -
-
+oldref="112">PERCENTILE +Returns the alpha-percentile of data values in an array. A percentile returns the scale value for a data series which goes from the smallest (Alpha=0) to the largest value (alpha=1) of a data series. For Alpha = 25%, the percentile means the first quartile; Alpha = 50% is the MEDIAN. +Syntax +PERCENTILE(Data; Alpha) +Data represents the array of data. +Alpha represents the percentage of the scale between 0 and 1. +Example + +=PERCENTILE(A1:A50;0.1) represents the value in the data set, which equals 10% of the total data scale in A1:A50. +
+
PERCENTRANK function PERCENTRANK - Returns the percentage rank of a value in a sample. - Syntax - PERCENTRANK(Data; Value) - - Data represents the array of data in the sample. - - Value represents the value whose percentile rank must be determined. - Example - - =PERCENTRANK(A1:A50;50) returns the percentage rank of the value 50 from the total range of all values found in A1:A50. If 50 falls outside the total range, an error message will appear. -
-
+oldref="121">PERCENTRANK +Returns the percentage rank of a value in a sample. +Syntax +PERCENTRANK(Data; Value) +Data represents the array of data in the sample. +Value represents the value whose percentile rank must be determined. +Example + +=PERCENTRANK(A1:A50;50) returns the percentage rank of the value 50 from the total range of all values found in A1:A50. If 50 falls outside the total range, an error message will appear. +
+
QUARTILE function QUARTILE - Returns the quartile of a data set. - Syntax - QUARTILE(Data; Type) - - Data represents the array of data in the sample. - - Type represents the type of quartile. (0 = MIN, 1 = 25%, 2 = 50% (MEDIAN), 3 = 75% and 4 = MAX.) - Example - - =QUARTILE(A1:A50;2) returns the value of which 50% of the scale corresponds to the lowest to highest values in the range A1:A50. -
+oldref="130">QUARTILE +Returns the quartile of a data set. +Syntax +QUARTILE(Data; Type) +Data represents the array of data in the sample. +Type represents the type of quartile. (0 = MIN, 1 = 25%, 2 = 50% (MEDIAN), 3 = 75% and 4 = MAX.) +Example + +=QUARTILE(A1:A50;2) returns the value of which 50% of the scale corresponds to the lowest to highest values in the range A1:A50. +
- -
- + +
+ \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/05100000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/05100000.xhp index 0c5030dec8..da8e65cd41 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/05100000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/05100000.xhp @@ -56,7 +56,7 @@
- How to apply a cell style: @@ -68,7 +68,7 @@ -Cell Styles +Cell Styles Displays the list of the available Cell Styles for indirect cell formatting. @@ -85,7 +85,7 @@ -Page Styles +Page Styles Displays the Page Styles available for indirect page formatting.
@@ -101,7 +101,7 @@
-Fill Format Mode Turns the Fill Format mode on and off. Use the paint can to assign the Style selected in the Styles and Formatting window. @@ -117,7 +117,7 @@
- How to apply a new style with the paint can: @@ -134,7 +134,7 @@ -New Style from Selection Creates a new style based on the formatting of a selected object. Assign a name for the style in the Create Style dialog. @@ -151,7 +151,7 @@
-Update Style Updates the Style selected in the Styles and Formatting window with the current formatting of the selected object. @@ -168,11 +168,11 @@
-Style List +Style List Displays the list of the styles from the selected style category. In the context menu you can choose commands to create a new style, delete a user-defined style, or change the selected style. -Style GroupsUFI: use "groups" to be consistent with Writer Lists the available style groups. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/05120000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/05120000.xhp index a57f05498d..fe6bde6aeb 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/05120000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/05120000.xhp @@ -10,8 +10,8 @@ * * OpenOffice.org - a multi-platform office productivity suite * - * $RCSfile: 05120000.xhp,v $ - * $Revision: 1.9.4.1 $ + * $RCSfile: soffice2xmlhelp.xsl,v $ + * $Revision: 1.8 $ * * This file is part of OpenOffice.org. * @@ -35,60 +35,67 @@ - -Conditional Formatting -/text/scalc/01/05120000.xhp - - - + + Conditional Formatting + /text/scalc/01/05120000.xhp + + + -Conditional Formatting -Choose Conditional Formatting to define format styles depending on certain conditions. +Conditional Formatting + Choose Conditional Formatting to define format styles depending on certain conditions. If a style was already assigned to a cell, it remains unchanged. The style entered here is then evaluated. You can enter three conditions that query the contents of cell values or formulas. The conditions are evaluated from 1 to 3. If the condition 1 matches the condition, the defined style will be used. Otherwise, condition 2 is evaluated, and its defined style used. If this style does not match, condition 3 is evaluated. -
- -
-To apply conditional formatting, AutoCalculate must be enabled. Choose Tools - Cell Contents - AutoCalculate (you see a check mark next to the command when AutoCalculate is enabled). +
+ +
+ To apply conditional formatting, AutoCalculate must be enabled. Choose Tools - Cell Contents - AutoCalculate (you see a check mark next to the command when AutoCalculate is enabled). conditional formatting; conditions -Condition 1/2/3 -Mark the boxes corresponding to each condition and enter the corresponding condition. To close the dialog, click OK. +Condition 1/2/3 + Mark the boxes corresponding to each condition and enter the corresponding condition. To close the dialog, click OK. -Cell Value / Formula -Specifies if conditional formatting is dependent on a cell value or a formula. If you select a formula as a reference, the Cell Value Condition box is displayed to the right of the Cell value/Formula field. If the condition is "Formula is", enter a cell reference. If the cell reference is a value other than zero, the condition matches. +Cell Value / Formula + Specifies if conditional formatting is dependent on a cell value or a formula. If you select a formula as a reference, the Cell Value Condition box is displayed to the right of the Cell value/Formula field. If the condition is "Formula is", enter a cell reference. If the cell reference is a value other than zero, the condition matches. -Cell Value Condition -Choose a condition for the format to be applied to the selected cells. +Cell Value Condition + Choose a condition for the format to be applied to the selected cells. -Cell Style -Choose the style to be applied if the specified condition matches. +Cell Style + Choose the style to be applied if the specified condition matches. + + + +New Style + If you haven't already defined a style to be used, you can click New Style to open the Organizer tab page of the Cell Style dialog. Define a new style there and click OK. -Parameter field -Enter a reference, value or formula. Enter a reference, value or formula in the parameter field, or in both parameter fields if you have selected a condition that requires two parameters. You can also enter formulas containing relative references. -Once the parameters have been defined, the condition is complete. It may appear as: -Cell value is equal 0: Cell style Null value (You must have already defined a cell style with this name before assigning it to a condition). -Cell value is between $B$20 and $B$21: Cell style Result (The corresponding value limits must already exist in cells B20 and B21) -Formula is SUM($A$1:$A$5)=10: Cell style Result (The selected cells are formatted with the Result style if the sum of the contents in cells A1 to A5 is equal to 10. - -
- - - -
- - +Parameter field + Enter a reference, value or formula. Enter a reference, value or formula in the parameter field, or in both parameter fields if you have selected a condition that requires two parameters. You can also enter formulas containing relative references. + Once the parameters have been defined, the condition is complete. It may appear as: + Cell value is equal 0: Cell style Null value (You must have already defined a cell style with this name before assigning it to a condition). + Cell value is between $B$20 and $B$21: Cell style Result (The corresponding value limits must already exist in cells B20 and B21) + Formula is SUM($A$1:$A$5)=10: Cell style Result (The selected cells are formatted with the Result style if the sum of the contents in cells A1 to A5 is equal to 10. + +
+ + + +
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12090102.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12090102.xhp index 8aae0bc50a..47127050f1 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12090102.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12090102.xhp @@ -10,8 +10,8 @@ * * OpenOffice.org - a multi-platform office productivity suite * - * $RCSfile: 12090102.xhp,v $ - * $Revision: 1.10.4.2 $ + * $RCSfile: soffice2xmlhelp.xsl,v $ + * $Revision: 1.8 $ * * This file is part of OpenOffice.org. * @@ -35,87 +35,97 @@ - -DataPilot -/text/scalc/01/12090102.xhp - - - + + DataPilot + /text/scalc/01/12090102.xhp + + + DataPilot function;show details -DataPilot function;drill down + DataPilot function;drill down -DataPilot -Specify the layout of the table that is generated by the DataPilot. -
- -
- -The DataPilot displays data fields as buttons which you can drag and drop to define the DataPilot table. +DataPilot + Specify the layout of the table that is generated by the DataPilot. +
+ +
+ + The DataPilot displays data fields as buttons which you can drag and drop to define the DataPilot table. UFI: changed help id from 59001 to dply_page -Layout -To define the layout of a DataPilot table, drag and drop data field buttons onto the Page Fields, Row Fields, Column Fields, and Data Fields areas. You can also use drag and drop to rearrange the data fields on a DataPilot table. -$[officename] automatically adds a caption to buttons that are dragged into the Data Fields area. The caption contains the name of the data field as well as the formula that created the data. -To change the function that is used by a data field, double-click a button in the Data Fields area to open the Data Field dialog. You can also double-click buttons in the Row Fields or Column Fields areas. +Layout + To define the layout of a DataPilot table, drag and drop data field buttons onto the Page Fields, Row Fields, Column Fields, and Data Fields areas. You can also use drag and drop to rearrange the data fields on a DataPilot table. + $[officename] automatically adds a caption to buttons that are dragged into the Data Fields area. The caption contains the name of the data field as well as the formula that created the data. + To change the function that is used by a data field, double-click a button in the Data Fields area to open the Data Field dialog. You can also double-click buttons in the Row Fields or Column Fields areas. -Remove -Removes the selected data field from the table layout. +Remove + Removes the selected data field from the table layout. -Options -Opens the Data Field dialog where you can change the function that is associated with the selected field. +Options + Opens the Data Field dialog where you can change the function that is associated with the selected field. -More -Displays or hides additional options for defining the DataPilot table. -Result -Specify the settings for displaying the results of the DataPilot table. +More + Displays or hides additional options for defining the DataPilot table. + Result + Specify the settings for displaying the results of the DataPilot table. + + +Selection from + Select the area that contains the data for the current datapilot table. -Results to -Select the area where you want to display the results of the DataPilot table. - -If the selected area contains data, the DataPilot overwrites the data. To prevent the loss of existing data, let the DataPilot automatically select the area to display the results. +Results to + Select the area where you want to display the results of the DataPilot table. + + If the selected area contains data, the DataPilot overwrites the data. To prevent the loss of existing data, let the DataPilot automatically select the area to display the results. -Ignore empty rows -Ignores empty fields in the data source. +Ignore empty rows + Ignores empty fields in the data source. -Identify categories -Automatically assigns rows without labels to the category of the row above.i93137 +Identify categories + Automatically assigns rows without labels to the category of the row above.i93137 -Total columns -Calculates and displays the grand total of the column calculation. +Total columns + Calculates and displays the grand total of the column calculation. -Total rows -Calculates and displays the grand total of the row calculation. +Total rows + Calculates and displays the grand total of the row calculation. -Add filter -Adds a Filter button to DataPilot tables that are based on spreadsheet data. +Add filter + Adds a Filter button to DataPilot tables that are based on spreadsheet data. -Opens the Filter dialog. +Opens the Filter dialog. -Enable drill to details -Select this check box and double-click an item label in the table to show or hide details for the item. Clear this check box and double-click a cell in the table to edit the contents of the cell. -To examine details inside a DataPilot table -Do one of the following: - - -Select a range of cells and choose Data - Group and Outline - Show Details. - - -Double-click a field in the table. - - -If you double-click a field which has adjacent fields at the same level, the Show Detail dialog opens: +Enable drill to details + Select this check box and double-click an item label in the table to show or hide details for the item. Clear this check box and double-click a cell in the table to edit the contents of the cell. + To examine details inside a DataPilot table + Do one of the following: + + + Select a range of cells and choose Data - Group and Outline - Show Details. + + + Double-click a field in the table. + + + If you double-click a field which has adjacent fields at the same level, the Show Detail dialog opens: -Show Detail -Choose the field that you want to view the details for. -
-DataPilot shortcut keys -
- - +Show Detail + Choose the field that you want to view the details for. +
+ DataPilot shortcut keys +
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/text2columns.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/text2columns.xhp index 390bd02d1e..6091817ab9 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/text2columns.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/text2columns.xhp @@ -10,8 +10,8 @@ * * OpenOffice.org - a multi-platform office productivity suite * - * $RCSfile: text2columns.xhp,v $ - * $Revision: 1.5.4.1 $ + * $RCSfile: soffice2xmlhelp.xsl,v $ + * $Revision: 1.8 $ * * This file is part of OpenOffice.org. * @@ -35,42 +35,42 @@ - -Text to Columns -/text/scalc/01/text2columns.xhp - - - + + Text to Columns + /text/scalc/01/text2columns.xhp + + + text to columns -Text to Columns -Opens the Text to Columns dialog, where you enter settings to expand the contents of selected cells to multiple cells. +Text to Columns + Opens the Text to Columns dialog, where you enter settings to expand the contents of selected cells to multiple cells. -
- -
-To expand cell contents to multiple cells -You can expand cells that contain comma separated values (CSV) into multiple cells in the same row. -For example, cell A1 contains the comma separated values 1,2,3,4, and cell A2 contains the text A,B,C,D. - - -Select the cell or cells that you want to expand. - - -Choose Data - Text to Columns. -You see the Text to Columns dialog. - - -Select the separator options. The preview shows how the current cell contents will be transformed into multiple cells. - - -You can select a fixed width and then click the ruler on the preview to set cell breakup positions. -You can select or enter separator characters to define the positions of breaking points. The separator characters are removed from the resulting cell contents. -In the example, you select the comma as a delimiter character. Cells A1 and B1 will be expanded to four columns. A1 contains 1, B1 contains 2, and so on. -
- - -
- - +
+ +
+ To expand cell contents to multiple cells + You can expand cells that contain comma separated values (CSV) into multiple cells in the same row. + For example, cell A1 contains the comma separated values 1,2,3,4, and cell A2 contains the text A,B,C,D. + + + Select the cell or cells that you want to expand. + + + Choose Data - Text to Columns. + You see the Text to Columns dialog. + + + Select the separator options. The preview shows how the current cell contents will be transformed into multiple cells. + + + You can select a fixed width and then click the ruler on the preview to set cell breakup positions. + You can select or enter separator characters to define the positions of breaking points. The separator characters are removed from the resulting cell contents. + In the example, you select the comma as a delimiter character. Cells A1 and A2 will be expanded to four columns each. A1 contains 1, B1 contains 2, and so on. +
+ + +
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/address_auto.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/address_auto.xhp index f6089588b9..776c22c5ca 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/address_auto.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/address_auto.xhp @@ -68,9 +68,9 @@ In the example spreadsheet, you can use the string 'Column One' in a formula to refer to the cell range B3 to B5, or 'Column Two' for the cell range C2 to C5. You can also use 'Row One' for the cell range B3 to D3, or 'Row Two' for the cell range B4 to D4. The result of a formula that uses a cell name, for example, SUM('Column One'), is 600. - This function is active by default. To turn this function off, choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - Calculate and clear the Automatically find column and row labels check box. + This function is active by default. To turn this function off, choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - Calculate and clear the Automatically find column and row labels check box. If you want a name to be automatically recognized by Calc, the name must start with a letter and be composed of alphanumeric characters. If you enter the name in the formula yourself, enclose the name in single quotation marks ('). If a single quotation mark appears in a name, you must enter a backslash in front of the quotation mark, for example, 'Harry\'s Bar'. - +
mw changed reference to deleted Calc guide address_byname.xhp to refer to Calc guide value_with_name.xhpUFI: changed embedvar links to embed links diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/auto_off.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/auto_off.xhp index 433a6ddfb3..18752f198a 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/auto_off.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/auto_off.xhp @@ -64,13 +64,13 @@ The following shows you how to deactivate and reactivate the automatic changes in $[officename] Calc: Automatic Text or Number Completion When making an entry in a cell, $[officename] Calc automatically suggests matching input found in the same column. This function is known as AutoInput. - To turn the AutoInput on and off, set or remove the check mark in front of Tools - Cell Contents - AutoInput. + To turn the AutoInput on and off, set or remove the check mark in front of Tools - Cell Contents - AutoInput. Automatic Conversion to Date Format - $[officename] Calc automatically converts certain entries to dates. For example, the entry 1.1 may be interpreted as January 1 of the current year, according to the locale settings of your operating system, and then displayed according to the date format applied to the cell.for sure 1.1 will not be interpreted as a date in the USofA !! + $[officename] Calc automatically converts certain entries to dates. For example, the entry 1.1 may be interpreted as January 1 of the current year, according to the locale settings of your operating system, and then displayed according to the date format applied to the cell.for sure 1.1 will not be interpreted as a date in the USofA !! To ensure that an entry is interpreted as text, add an apostrophe at the beginning of the entry. The apostrophe is not displayed in the cell. Quotation Marks Replaced by Custom Quotes - Choose Tools - AutoCorrect Options. Go to the Custom Quotes tab and unmark Replace. + Choose Tools - AutoCorrect Options. Go to the Custom Quotes tab and unmark Replace. Cell Content Always Begins With Uppercase Choose Tools - AutoCorrect Options. Go to the Options tab. Unmark Capitalize first letter of every sentence. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/autofilter.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/autofilter.xhp index 44f5c29145..d18ef5a2fc 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/autofilter.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/autofilter.xhp @@ -58,7 +58,7 @@ Select the columns you want to use AutoFilter on. - Choose Data - Filter - AutoFilter. The combo box arrows are visible in the first row of the range selected. + Choose Data - Filter - AutoFilter. The combo box arrows are visible in the first row of the range selected. Run the filter by clicking the drop-down arrow in the column heading and choosing an item. @@ -67,7 +67,7 @@ When you apply an additional AutoFilter on another column of a filtered data range, then the other combo boxes list only the filtered data. To display all records again, select the "all" entry in the AutoFilter combo box. If you choose "Standard", the Standard Filter dialog appears, allowing you to set up a standard filter. Choose "Top 10" to display the highest 10 values only. - To stop using AutoFilter, reselect all cells selected in step 1 and once again choose Data - Filter - AutoFilter. + To stop using AutoFilter, reselect all cells selected in step 1 and once again choose Data - Filter - AutoFilter. To assign different AutoFilters to different sheets, you must first define a database range on each sheet. The arithmetic functions also take account of the cells that are not visible due to an applied filter. For example, a sum of an entire column will also total the values in the filtered cells. Apply the SUBTOTAL function if only the cells visible after the application of a filter are to be taken into account.
diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/autoformat.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/autoformat.xhp index fafbb4dfc0..921e114cdd 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/autoformat.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/autoformat.xhp @@ -49,7 +49,7 @@ sheets;AutoFormat function MW deleted "applying;" Applying Automatic Formatting to a Selected Cell Range + oldref="11">Applying Automatic Formatting to a Selected Cell Range You can use the AutoFormat feature to quickly apply a format to a sheet or a selected cell range. To Apply an AutoFormat to a Sheet or Selected Cell Range @@ -61,10 +61,10 @@ Choose Format - AutoFormat. - To select which properties to include in an AutoFormat, click More. + To select which properties to include in an AutoFormat, click More. - Click OK. + Click OK. The format is applied to the selected range of cells. @@ -83,13 +83,13 @@ Choose Format - AutoFormat. - Click Add. + Click Add. - In the Name box of the Add AutoFormat dialog, enter a name for the format. + In the Name box of the Add AutoFormat dialog, enter a name for the format. - Click OK. + Click OK.
diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/background.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/background.xhp index ed7837de5b..b0dd08eda9 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/background.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/background.xhp @@ -58,21 +58,21 @@ Select the cells. - Choose Format - Cells (or Format Cells from the context menu). + Choose Format - Cells (or Format Cells from the context menu). - On the Background tab page, select the background color. + On the Background tab page, select the background color. Graphics in the Background of Cells - Choose Insert - Picture - From File. + Choose Insert - Picture - From File. - Select the graphic and click Open. - The graphic is inserted anchored to the current cell. You can move and scale the graphic as you want. In your context menu you can use the Arrange - To Background command to place this in the background. To select a graphic that has been placed in the background, use the Navigator + Select the graphic and click Open. + The graphic is inserted anchored to the current cell. You can move and scale the graphic as you want. In your context menu you can use the Arrange - To Background command to place this in the background. To select a graphic that has been placed in the background, use the Navigator Navigator. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/borders.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/borders.xhp index e69deb7cb4..755d431395 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/borders.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/borders.xhp @@ -56,13 +56,13 @@ Choose Format - Cells. - In the dialog, click the Borders tab. + In the dialog, click the Borders tab. - Choose the border options you want to apply and click OK. + Choose the border options you want to apply and click OK. - The options in the Line arrangement area can be used to apply multiple border styles. + The options in the Line arrangement area can be used to apply multiple border styles. Selection of cells Depending on the selection of cells, the area looks different. @@ -118,7 +118,7 @@ You cannot apply borders to multiple selections.Default Settings - Click one of the Default icons to set or reset multiple borders. + Click one of the Default icons to set or reset multiple borders. The thin gray lines inside an icon show the borders that will be reset or cleared. @@ -131,7 +131,7 @@ Examples - Select a block of about 8x8 cells, then choose Format - Cells - Borders. + Select a block of about 8x8 cells, then choose Format - Cells - Borders. default icon row of Borders tab page @@ -148,7 +148,7 @@ Now you can continue to see which lines the other icons will set or remove.User Defined Settings - In the User defined area, you can click to set or remove individual lines. The preview shows lines in three different states. + In the User defined area, you can click to set or remove individual lines. The preview shows lines in three different states. Repeatedly click an edge or a corner to switch through the three different states.
@@ -204,7 +204,7 @@
Examples - Select a single cell, then choose Format - Cells - Borders. + Select a single cell, then choose Format - Cells - Borders. Click the lower edge to set a very thin line as a lower border. All other lines will be removed from the cell. setting a thin lower border @@ -213,7 +213,7 @@ setting a thick line as a border - Click the second Default icon from the left to set all four borders. Then repeatedly click the lower edge until a white line is shown. This removes the lower border. + Click the second Default icon from the left to set all four borders. Then repeatedly click the lower edge until a white line is shown. This removes the lower border. removing lower border diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/calc_date.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/calc_date.xhp index 30fc2a99fb..ce4851ddc5 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/calc_date.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/calc_date.xhp @@ -59,10 +59,10 @@ - After pressing the Enter key you will see the result in date format. Since the result should show the difference between two dates as a number of days, you must format cell A3 as a number. + After pressing the Enter key you will see the result in date format. Since the result should show the difference between two dates as a number of days, you must format cell A3 as a number. - Place the cursor in cell A3, right-click to open a context menu and choose Format Cells. + Place the cursor in cell A3, right-click to open a context menu and choose Format Cells. The Format Cells dialog appears. On the Numbers tab, the "Number" category will appear already highlighted. The format is set to "General", which causes the result of a calculation containing date entries to be displayed as a date. To display the result as a number, set the number format to "-1,234" and close the dialog with the OK button. @@ -71,10 +71,10 @@ The number of days between today's date and the specified date is displayed in cell A3. - Experiment with some additional formulas: in A4 enter =A3*24 to calculate the hours, in A5 enter =A4*60 for the minutes, and in A6 enter =A5*60 for seconds. Press the Enter key after each formula. + Experiment with some additional formulas: in A4 enter =A3*24 to calculate the hours, in A5 enter =A4*60 for the minutes, and in A6 enter =A5*60 for seconds. Press the Enter key after each formula. - The time since your date of birth will be calculated and displayed in the various units. The values are calculated as of the exact moment when you entered the last formula and pressed the Enter key. This value is not automatically updated, although "Now" continuously changes. In the Tools menu, the menu item Cell Contents - AutoCalculate is normally active; however, automatic calculation does not apply to the function NOW. This ensures that your computer is not solely occupied with updating the sheet. + The time since your date of birth will be calculated and displayed in the various units. The values are calculated as of the exact moment when you entered the last formula and pressed the Enter key. This value is not automatically updated, although "Now" continuously changes. In the Tools menu, the menu item Cell Contents - AutoCalculate is normally active; however, automatic calculation does not apply to the function NOW. This ensures that your computer is not solely occupied with updating the sheet.
diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/calc_series.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/calc_series.xhp index 5aea6cdfa0..806acd7d59 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/calc_series.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/calc_series.xhp @@ -73,7 +73,7 @@ Hold down Command Ctrl if you do not want to fill the cells with different values. If you select two or more adjacent cells that contain different numbers, and drag, the remaining cells are filled with the arithmetic pattern that is recognized in the numbers. The AutoFill function also recognizes customized lists that are defined under Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - Sort Lists. - You can double-click the fill handle to automatically fill all empty columns of the current data block. For example, first enter Jan into A1 and drag the fill handle down to A12 to get the twelve months in the first column. Now enter some values into B1 and C1. Select those two cells, and double-click the fill handle. This fills automatically the data block B1:C12. + You can double-click the fill handle to automatically fill all empty columns of the current data block. For example, first enter Jan into A1 and drag the fill handle down to A12 to get the twelve months in the first column. Now enter some values into B1 and C1. Select those two cells, and double-click the fill handle. This fills automatically the data block B1:C12. Using a Defined Series @@ -84,9 +84,9 @@ Select the parameters for the series. - If you select a linear series, the increment that you enter is added to each consecutive number in the series to create the next value. - If you select a growth series, the increment that you enter is multiplied by each consecutive number to create the next value. - If you select a date series, the increment that you enter is added to the time unit that you specify. + If you select a linear series, the increment that you enter is added to each consecutive number in the series to create the next value. + If you select a growth series, the increment that you enter is multiplied by each consecutive number to create the next value. + If you select a date series, the increment that you enter is added to the time unit that you specify.
diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/calculate.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/calculate.xhp index 6bcba3f555..50fc1fd1e6 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/calculate.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/calculate.xhp @@ -54,22 +54,22 @@ Click in a cell, and type a number - Press Enter. + Press Enter. The cursor moves down to the next cell. Enter another number. - Press the Tab key. + Press the Tab key. The cursor moves to the right into the next cell. Type in a formula, for example, =A3 * A4 / 100. - + - Press Enter. + Press Enter. The result of the formula appears in the cell. If you want, you can edit the formula in the input line of the Formula bar. When you edit a formula, the new result is calculated automatically. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/cell_protect.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/cell_protect.xhp index a32b7bd6c1..2e67ff433e 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/cell_protect.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/cell_protect.xhp @@ -51,7 +51,7 @@ hiding;formulas formulas;hiding MW transferred "modifying;..." and "changing;..." into one index entry -Protecting Cells from Changes +Protecting Cells from Changes In %PRODUCTNAME Calc you can protect sheets and the document as a whole. You can choose whether the cells are protected against accidental changes, whether the formulas can be viewed from within Calc, whether the cells are visible or whether the cells can be printed. Protection can be provided by means of a password, but it does not have to be. If you have assigned a password, protection can only be removed once the correct password has been entered. @@ -62,20 +62,20 @@ Select the cells that you want to specify the cell protection options for. - Choose Format - Cells and click the Cell Protection tab. + Choose Format - Cells and click the Cell Protection tab. Select the protection options that you want. - Select Protected to prevent changes to the contents and the format of a cell. - Select Hide formula to hide and to protect formulas from changes. - Select Hide when printing to hide protected cells in the printed document. The cells are not hidden on screen. + Select Protected to prevent changes to the contents and the format of a cell. + Select Hide formula to hide and to protect formulas from changes. + Select Hide when printing to hide protected cells in the printed document. The cells are not hidden onscreen. - Click OK. + Click OK. Apply the protection options. - To protect the cells from being changed / viewed / printed according to your settings in the Format - Cells dialog, choose Tools - Protect Document - Sheet. + To protect the cells from being changed / viewed / printed according to your settings in the Format - Cells dialog, choose Tools - Protect Document - Sheet. To protect the structure of the document, for example the count, names, and order of the sheets, from being changed, choose Tools - Protect Document - Document. @@ -83,7 +83,7 @@ If you forget your password, you cannot deactivate the protection. If you only want to protect cells from accidental changes, set the sheet protection, but do not enter a password. - Click OK. + Click OK.
diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/cell_unprotect.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/cell_unprotect.xhp index e61d2b59eb..e1c1397cd4 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/cell_unprotect.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/cell_unprotect.xhp @@ -46,17 +46,17 @@ unprotecting cells Unprotecting Cells + oldref="14">Unprotecting Cells Click the sheet for which you want to cancel the protection. - Select Tools - Protect Document, then choose Sheet or Document to remove the check mark indicating the protected status. + Select Tools - Protect Document, then choose Sheet or Document to remove the check mark indicating the protected status. - If you have assigned a password, enter it in this dialog and click OK. + If you have assigned a password, enter it in this dialog and click OK. The cells can now be edited, the formulas can be viewed, and all cells can be printed until you reactivate the protection for the sheet or document. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/cellcopy.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/cellcopy.xhp index f966aa8b07..1fb57a4747 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/cellcopy.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/cellcopy.xhp @@ -75,7 +75,7 @@ - Cells were hidden using the Hide command in the context menu of the row or column headers, or through an outline. + Cells were hidden using the Hide command in the context menu of the row or column headers, or through an outline. Copy, delete, move, or format a selection of currently visible cells. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/cellreference_dragdrop.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/cellreference_dragdrop.xhp index 2fe2452ffc..faca94621c 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/cellreference_dragdrop.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/cellreference_dragdrop.xhp @@ -55,7 +55,7 @@ Open the document that contains the source cells. - To set the source range as the range, select the cells and choose Insert - Names - Define. Save the source document, and do not close it. + To set the source range as the range, select the cells and choose Insert - Names - Define. Save the source document, and do not close it. Open the sheet in which you want to insert something. @@ -67,7 +67,7 @@ In the Navigator, the source file object appears under "Range names". - Using the Drag Mode icon in Navigator, choose whether you want the reference to be a hyperlink, link, or copy. + Using the Drag Mode icon in Navigator, choose whether you want the reference to be a hyperlink, link, or copy. Click the name under "Range names" in the Navigator, and drag into the cell of the current sheet where you want to insert the reference. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/cellreferences.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/cellreferences.xhp index 07d3f82612..9899931b29 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/cellreferences.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/cellreferences.xhp @@ -63,19 +63,19 @@ - Click the Sheet 2 tab at the bottom of the spreadsheet. Set the cursor in cell A1 there and enter text or a number. + Click the Sheet 2 tab at the bottom of the spreadsheet. Set the cursor in cell A1 there and enter text or a number. - If you switch back to Sheet1, you will see the same content in cell A1 there. If the contents of Sheet2.A1 change, then the contents of Sheet1.A1 also change. + If you switch back to Sheet1, you will see the same content in cell A1 there. If the contents of Sheet2.A1 change, then the contents of Sheet1.A1 also change. To Reference a Cell in Another Document - Choose File - Open, to load an existing spreadsheet document. + Choose File - Open, to load an existing spreadsheet document. - Choose File - New, to open a new spreadsheet document. Set the cursor in the cell where you want to insert the external data and enter an equals sign to indicate that you want to begin a formula. + Choose File - New, to open a new spreadsheet document. Set the cursor in the cell where you want to insert the external data and enter an equals sign to indicate that you want to begin a formula. Now switch to the document you have just loaded. Click the cell with the data that you want to insert in the new document. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/cellreferences_url.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/cellreferences_url.xhp index 49db1f1b47..a11288e033 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/cellreferences_url.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/cellreferences_url.xhp @@ -3,78 +3,78 @@ - +* +* DO NOT ALTER OR REMOVE COPYRIGHT NOTICES OR THIS FILE HEADER. +* +* Copyright 2008 by Sun Microsystems, Inc. +* +* OpenOffice.org - a multi-platform office productivity suite +* +* $RCSfile: soffice2xmlhelp.xsl,v $ +* $Revision: 1.8 $ +* +* This file is part of OpenOffice.org. +* +* OpenOffice.org is free software: you can redistribute it and/or modify +* it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public License version 3 +* only, as published by the Free Software Foundation. +* +* OpenOffice.org is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, +* but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of +* MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the +* GNU Lesser General Public License version 3 for more details +* (a copy is included in the LICENSE file that accompanied this code). +* +* You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public License +* version 3 along with OpenOffice.org. If not, see +* +* for a copy of the LGPLv3 License. +* +************************************************************************ +--> + - - References to Other Sheets and Referencing URLs - /text/scalc/guide/cellreferences_url.xhp - - - + +References to Other Sheets and Referencing URLs +/text/scalc/guide/cellreferences_url.xhp + + + HTML; in sheet cells - references; URL in cells - cells; Internet references - URL; in Calc +references; URL in cells +cells; Internet references +URL; in Calc mw deleted "sheet references;" Referencing URLs +oldref="15">Referencing URLs - For example, if you found an Internet page containing current stock exchange information in spreadsheet cells, you can load this page in $[officename] Calc by using the following procedure: - - - In a $[officename] Calc document, position the cursor in the cell into which you want to insert the external data. - - - Choose Insert - Link to External Data. The External Data dialog appears. - - - Enter the URL of the document or Web page in the dialog. The URL must be in the format: http://www.my-bank.com/table.html. The URL for local or local area network files is the path seen in the File - Open dialog. - $[officename] loads the Web page or file in the "background", that is, without displaying it. In the large list box of the External Data dialog, you can see the name of all the sheets or named ranges you can choose from. - - - Select one or more sheets or named ranges. You can also activate the automatic update function every "n" minutes and click OK. - The contents will be inserted as a link in the $[officename] Calc document. - - - Save your spreadsheet. When you open it again later, $[officename] Calc will update the linked cells following an inquiry. - - - Under Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - General you can choose to have the update, when opened, automatically carried out either always, upon request or never. The update can be started manually in the dialog under Edit - Links. - - -
- - -
- +For example, if you found an Internet page containing current stock exchange information in spreadsheet cells, you can load this page in $[officename] Calc by using the following procedure: + + +In a $[officename] Calc document, position the cursor in the cell into which you want to insert the external data. + + +Choose Insert - Link to External Data. The External Data dialog appears. + + +Enter the URL of the document or Web page in the dialog. The URL must be in the format: http://www.my-bank.com/table.html. The URL for local or local area network files is the path seen in the File - Open dialog. +$[officename] loads the Web page or file in the "background", that is, without displaying it. In the large list box of the External Data dialog, you can see the name of all the sheets or named ranges you can choose from. + + +Select one or more sheets or named ranges. You can also activate the automatic update function every "n" seconds and click OK. +The contents will be inserted as a link in the $[officename] Calc document. + + +Save your spreadsheet. When you open it again later, $[officename] Calc will update the linked cells following an inquiry. + + +Under Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - General you can choose to have the update, when opened, automatically carried out either always, upon request or never. The update can be started manually in the dialog under Edit - Links. + + +
+ + +
+ \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/cellstyle_by_formula.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/cellstyle_by_formula.xhp index f83a1dc4ef..5ed2826561 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/cellstyle_by_formula.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/cellstyle_by_formula.xhp @@ -48,7 +48,7 @@ formulas;assigning cell formats mw deleted "applying;" Assigning Formats by Formula + oldref="13">Assigning Formats by Formula The STYLE() function can be added to an existing formula in a cell. For example, together with the CURRENT function, you can color a cell depending on its value. The formula =...+STYLE(IF(CURRENT()>3; "Red"; "Green")) applies the cell style "Red" to cells if the value is greater than 3, otherwise the cell style "Green" is applied. If you would like to apply a formula to all cells in a selected area, you can use the @@ -58,7 +58,7 @@ Select all the desired cells. - Select the menu command Edit - Find & Replace. + Select the menu command Edit - Find & Replace. For the Search for term, enter: .* @@ -68,10 +68,10 @@ Enter the following formula in the Replace with field: =&+STYLE(IF(CURRENT()>3;"Red";"Green")) - The "&" symbol designates the current contents of the Search for field. The line must begin with an equal sign, since it is a formula. It is assumed that the cell styles "Red" and "Green" already exist. + The "&" symbol designates the current contents of the Search for field. The line must begin with an equal sign, since it is a formula. It is assumed that the cell styles "Red" and "Green" already exist. - Mark the fields Regular expressions and Current selection only. Click Find All. + Mark the fields Regular expressions and Current selection only. Click Find All. All cells with contents that were included in the selection are now highlighted. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/cellstyle_conditional.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/cellstyle_conditional.xhp index 6bd9c55a11..fe5b0785f5 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/cellstyle_conditional.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/cellstyle_conditional.xhp @@ -54,8 +54,8 @@ Applying Conditional Formatting - Using the menu command Format - Conditional formatting, the dialog allows you to define up to three conditions per cell, which must be met in order for the selected cells to have a particular format. - To apply conditional formatting, AutoCalculate must be enabled. Choose Tools - Cell Contents - AutoCalculate (you see a check mark next to the command when AutoCalculate is enabled). + Using the menu command Format - Conditional formatting, the dialog allows you to define up to three conditions per cell, which must be met in order for the selected cells to have a particular format. + To apply conditional formatting, AutoCalculate must be enabled. Choose Tools - Cell Contents - AutoCalculate (you see a check mark next to the command when AutoCalculate is enabled). With conditional formatting, you can, for example, highlight the totals that exceed the average value of all totals. If the totals change, the formatting changes correspondingly, without having to apply other styles manually. To Define the Conditions @@ -63,7 +63,7 @@ Select the cells to which you want to apply a conditional style. - Choose Format - Conditional Formatting. + Choose Format - Conditional Formatting. Enter the condition(s) into the dialog box. The dialog is described in detail in $[officename] Help, and an example is provided below: @@ -76,7 +76,7 @@ First of all, write a table in which a few different values occur. For your test you can create tables with any random numbers: - In one of the cells enter the formula =RAND(), and you will obtain a random number between 0 and 1. If you want integers of between 0 and 50, enter the formula =INT(RAND()*50). + In one of the cells enter the formula =RAND(), and you will obtain a random number between 0 and 1. If you want integers of between 0 and 50, enter the formula =INT(RAND()*50). Copy the formula to create a row of random numbers. Click the bottom right corner of the selected cell, and drag to the right until the desired cell range is selected. @@ -90,13 +90,13 @@ The next step is to apply a cell style to all values that represent above-average turnover, and one to those that are below the average. Ensure that the Styles and Formatting window is visible before proceeding. - Click in a blank cell and select the command Format Cells in the context menu. + Click in a blank cell and select the command Format Cells in the context menu. - In the Format Cells dialog on the Background tab, select a background color. Click OK. + In the Format Cells dialog on the Background tab, select a background color. Click OK. - In the Styles and Formatting window, click the New Style from Selection icon. Enter the name of the new style. For this example, name the style "Above". + In the Styles and Formatting window, click the New Style from Selection icon. Enter the name of the new style. For this example, name the style "Above". To define a second style, click again in a blank cell and proceed as described above. Assign a different background color for the cell and assign a name (for this example, "Below"). @@ -107,7 +107,7 @@ In our particular example, we are calculating the average of the random values. The result is placed in a cell: - Set the cursor in a blank cell, for example, J14, and choose Insert - Function. + Set the cursor in a blank cell, for example, J14, and choose Insert - Function. Select the AVERAGE function. Use the mouse to select all your random numbers. If you cannot see the entire range, because the Function Wizard is obscuring it, you can temporarily shrink the dialog using the Shrink / Maximize icon. @@ -124,7 +124,7 @@ Select all cells with the random numbers. - Choose the Format - Conditional Formatting command to open the corresponding dialog. + Choose the Format - Conditional Formatting command to open the corresponding dialog. Define the condition as follows: If cell value is less than J14, format with cell style "Below", and if cell value is greater than or equal to J14, format with cell style "Above". @@ -144,10 +144,10 @@ Select the cells that are to receive this same formatting. - Choose Edit - Paste Special. The Paste Special dialog appears. + Choose Edit - Paste Special. The Paste Special dialog appears. - In the Selection area, check only the Formats box. All other boxes must be unchecked. Click OK. + In the Selection area, check only the Formats box. All other boxes must be unchecked. Click OK.
diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/cellstyle_minusvalue.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/cellstyle_minusvalue.xhp index 6df51672f5..9b1f686f2b 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/cellstyle_minusvalue.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/cellstyle_minusvalue.xhp @@ -53,10 +53,10 @@ You can format cells with a number format that highlights negative numbers in red. Alternatively, you can define your own number format in which negative numbers are highlighted in other colors. - Select the cells and choose Format - Cells. + Select the cells and choose Format - Cells. - On the Numbers tab, select a number format and mark Negative numbers red check box. Click OK. + On the Numbers tab, select a number format and mark Negative numbers red check box. Click OK. The cell number format is defined in two parts. The format for positive numbers and zero is defined in front of the semicolon; after the semicolon the formula for negative numbers is defined. You can change the code (RED) under Format code. For example, instead of RED, enter YELLOW. If the new code appears in the list after clicking the Add icon, this is a valid entry. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/consolidate.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/consolidate.xhp index 78cd98a38c..79f02fbbb8 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/consolidate.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/consolidate.xhp @@ -57,40 +57,40 @@ Open the document that contains the cell ranges to be consolidated. - Choose Data - Consolidate to open the Consolidate dialog. + Choose Data - Consolidate to open the Consolidate dialog. - From the Source data area box select a source cell range to consolidate with other areas. - If the range is not named, click in the field next to the Source data area. A blinking text cursor appears. Type a reference for the first source data range or select the range with the mouse. + From the Source data area box select a source cell range to consolidate with other areas. + If the range is not named, click in the field next to the Source data area. A blinking text cursor appears. Type a reference for the first source data range or select the range with the mouse. - Click Add to insert the selected range in the Consolidation areas field. + Click Add to insert the selected range in the Consolidation areas field. - Select additional ranges and click Add after each selection. + Select additional ranges and click Add after each selection. - Specify where you want to display the result by selecting a target range from the Copy results to box. - If the target range is not named, click in the field next to Copy results to and enter the reference of the target range. Alternatively, you can select the range using the mouse or position the cursor in the top left cell of the target range. + Specify where you want to display the result by selecting a target range from the Copy results to box. + If the target range is not named, click in the field next to Copy results to and enter the reference of the target range. Alternatively, you can select the range using the mouse or position the cursor in the top left cell of the target range. - Select a function from the Function box. The function specifies how the values of the consolidation ranges are linked. The "Sum" function is the default setting. + Select a function from the Function box. The function specifies how the values of the consolidation ranges are linked. The "Sum" function is the default setting. - Click OK to consolidate the ranges. + Click OK to consolidate the ranges. Additional Settings - Click More in the Consolidate dialog to display additional settings: + Click More in the Consolidate dialog to display additional settings: - Select Link to source data to insert the formulas that generate the results in the target range, rather than the actual results. If you link the data, any values modified in the source range are automatically updated in the target range. + Select Link to source data to insert the formulas that generate the results in the target range, rather than the actual results. If you link the data, any values modified in the source range are automatically updated in the target range. The corresponding cell references in the target range are inserted in consecutive rows, which are automatically ordered and then hidden from view. Only the final result, based on the selected function, is displayed. - Under Consolidate by, select either Row labels or Column labels if the cells of the source data range are not to be consolidated corresponding to the identical position of the cell in the range, but instead according to a matching row label or column label. + Under Consolidate by, select either Row labels or Column labels if the cells of the source data range are not to be consolidated corresponding to the identical position of the cell in the range, but instead according to a matching row label or column label. To consolidate by row labels or column labels, the label must be contained in the selected source ranges. The text in the labels must be identical, so that rows or columns can be accurately matched. If the row or column label does not match any that exist in the target range, it will be appended as a new row or column. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/csv_files.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/csv_files.xhp index 58574514c8..9fc1d70b89 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/csv_files.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/csv_files.xhp @@ -33,87 +33,86 @@ ************************************************************************ --> - - - Importing and Exporting CSV Files - /text/scalc/guide/csv_files.xhp - - - + + Importing and Exporting CSV Files +/text/scalc/guide/csv_files.xhp + + + number series import - data series import - exporting; tables as text - importing; tables as text - delimited values and files - comma separated files and values - text file import and export - csv files;importing and exporting - tables; importing/exporting as text - text documents; importing to spreadsheets - opening;text csv files - saving;as text csv +data series import +exporting; tables as text +importing; tables as text +delimited values and files +comma separated files and values +text file import and export +csv files;importing and exporting +tables; importing/exporting as text +text documents; importing to spreadsheets +opening;text csv files +saving;as text csv MW deleted "importing;text data bases" and copied 4 index entries from scalc/guide/csv_formula.xhpmw added "saving;" and "opening;" Opening and Saving Text CSV Files - Comma Separated Values (CSV) is text file format that you can use to exchange data from a database or a spreadsheet between applications. Each line in a Text CSV file represents a record in the database, or a row in a spreadsheet. Each field in a database record or cell in a spreadsheet row is usually separated by a comma. However, you can use other characters to delimit a field, such as a tabulator character. - If the content of a field or cell contains a comma, the contents of the field or cell must be enclosed by single quotes (') or double quotes ("). - To Open a Text CSV File in Calc - - - Choose File - Open. - - - Locate the CSV file that you want to open. - If the file has a *.csv extension, select the file. - If the CSV file has another extension, select the file, and then select "Text CSV" in the File type box - - - Click Open. - The Text Import dialog opens. - - - Specify the options to divide the text in the file into columns. - You can preview the layout of the imported data at the bottom of the Text Import dialog. - Right-click a column in the preview to set the format or to hide the column. - If the CSV file uses a text delimiter character that is not listed in the Text delimiter box, click in the box, and type the character. - - - Click OK. - - - To Save a Sheet as a Text CSV File - When you export a spreadsheet to CSV format, only the data on the current sheet is saved. All other information, including formulas and formatting, is lost. - - - Open the Calc sheet that you want to save as a Text CSV file. - Only the current sheet can be exported. - - - Choose File - Save as. - - - In the File name box, enter a name for the file. - - - In the File type box, select "Text CSV". - - - (Optional) Set the field options for the Text CSV file. - Select Edit filter settings. - In the Export of text files dialog, select the options that you want. - Click OK. - - - Click Save. - - -
- - - Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - View - Export text files - Import text files -
- +Comma Separated Values (CSV) is a text file format that you can use to exchange data from a database or a spreadsheet between applications. Each line in a Text CSV file represents a record in the database, or a row in a spreadsheet. Each field in a database record or cell in a spreadsheet row is usually separated by a comma. However, you can use other characters to delimit a field, such as a tabulator character. +If the field or cell contains a comma, the field or cell must be enclosed by single quotes (') or double quotes ("). +To Open a Text CSV File in Calc + + +Choose File - Open. + + +Locate the CSV file that you want to open. +If the file has a *.csv extension, select the file. +If the CSV file has another extension, select the file, and then select "Text CSV" in the File type box + + +Click Open. +The Text Import dialog opens. + + +Specify the options to divide the text in the file into columns. +You can preview the layout of the imported data at the bottom of the Text Import dialog. +Right-click a column in the preview to set the format or to hide the column. +Check the text delimiter box that matches the character used as text delimiter in the file. In case of an unlisted delimiter, type the character into the input box. + + +Click OK. + + +To Save a Sheet as a Text CSV File +When you export a spreadsheet to CSV format, only the data on the current sheet is saved. All other information, including formulas and formatting, is lost. + + +Open the Calc sheet that you want to save as a Text CSV file. +Only the current sheet can be exported. + + +Choose File - Save as. + + +In the File name box, enter a name for the file. + + +In the File type box, select "Text CSV". + + +(Optional) Set the field options for the Text CSV file. +Select Edit filter settings. +In the Export of text files dialog, select the options that you want. +Click OK. + + +Click Save. + + +
+ + +Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - View +Export text files +Import text files +
+ \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/csv_formula.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/csv_formula.xhp index 5e29c0ea5b..906c6e28ce 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/csv_formula.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/csv_formula.xhp @@ -53,16 +53,16 @@ oldref="15">To Import a CSV File - Choose File - Open. + Choose File - Open. - In the File type field, select the format "Text CSV". Select the file and click Open. When a file has the .csv extension, the file type is automatically recognized. + In the File type field, select the format "Text CSV". Select the file and click Open. When a file has the .csv extension, the file type is automatically recognized. You will see the Text Import dialog. Click OK. - If the csv file contains formulas, but you want to import the results of those formulas, then choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - View and clear the Formulas check box. + If the csv file contains formulas, but you want to import the results of those formulas, then choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - View and clear the Formulas check box. To Export Formulas and Values as CSV Files @@ -70,26 +70,26 @@ If you want to export the formulas as formulas, for example, in the form =SUM(A1:B5), proceed as follows: - Choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - View. - Under Display, mark the Formulas check box. Click OK. - If you want to export the calculation results instead of the formulas, do not mark Formulas. + Choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - View. + Under Display, mark the Formulas check box. Click OK. + If you want to export the calculation results instead of the formulas, do not mark Formulas. - Choose File - Save as. You will see the Save as dialog. + Choose File - Save as. You will see the Save as dialog. In the File type field select the format "Text CSV". - Enter a name and click Save. + Enter a name and click Save. - From the Export of text files dialog that appears, select the character set and the field and text delimiters for the data to be exported, and confirm with OK. + From the Export of text files dialog that appears, select the character set and the field and text delimiters for the data to be exported, and confirm with OK. If the numbers use commas as decimal separators or thousands separators, do not select the comma as the field delimiter. If the text contains double quotation marks, you must select the single quotation mark as separator.not possible to have a table here because that would break the numbering in XML. - If necessary, after you have saved, clear the Formulas check box to see the calculated results in the table again. + If necessary, after you have saved, clear the Formulas check box to see the calculated results in the table again.
diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/currency_format.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/currency_format.xhp index 7eb6a0b67e..b7d1544a9a 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/currency_format.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/currency_format.xhp @@ -35,41 +35,40 @@ - - Cells in Currency Format - /text/scalc/guide/currency_format.xhp - - - + +Cells in Currency Format +/text/scalc/guide/currency_format.xhp + + + currency formats; spreadsheets - cells; currency formats - international currency formats - formats; currency formats in cells - currencies; default currencies - defaults;currency formats - changing;currency formats +cells; currency formats +international currency formats +formats; currency formats in cells +currencies; default currencies +defaults;currency formats +changing;currency formats mw changed one index entry Cells in Currency Format +oldref="46">Cells in Currency Format - In %PRODUCTNAME Calc you can give numbers any currency format. When you click the Currency icon -Icon - in the Formatting - bar to format a number, the cell is given the default currency format set under Tools - Options - Language Settings - Languages. - Exchanging of %PRODUCTNAME Calc documents can lead to misunderstandings, if your %PRODUCTNAME Calc document is loaded by a user who uses a different default currency format. - In %PRODUCTNAME Calc you can define that a number that you have formatted as "1,234.50 €", still remains in euros in another country and does not become dollars. - You can change the currency format in the Format Cells dialog (choose Format - Cells - Numbers tab) by two country settings. In the Language combo box select the basic setting for currency symbol, decimal and thousands separators. In the Format list box you can select possible variations from the default format for the language. - - - For example, if the language is set to "Default" and you are using a german locale setting, the currency format will be "1.234,00 €". A point is used before the thousand digits and a comma before the decimal places. If you now select the subordinate currency format "$ English (US)" from the Format list box , you will get the following format: "$ 1.234,00". As you can see, the separators have remained the same. Only the currency symbol has been changed and converted, but the underlying format of the notation remains the same as in the locale setting. - - - If, under Language, you convert the cells to "English (US)", the English-language locale setting is also transferred and the default currency format is now "$ 1,234.00". - - -
- - Format - Cell - Numbers -
- +In %PRODUCTNAME Calc you can give numbers any currency format. When you click the Currency icon +Icon + in the Formatting bar to format a number, the cell is given the default currency format set under Tools - Options - Language Settings - Languages. +Exchanging of %PRODUCTNAME Calc documents can lead to misunderstandings, if your %PRODUCTNAME Calc document is loaded by a user who uses a different default currency format. +In %PRODUCTNAME Calc you can define that a number that you have formatted as "1,234.50 €", still remains in euros in another country and does not become dollars. +You can change the currency format in the Format Cells dialog (choose Format - Cells - Numbers tab) by two country settings. In the Language combo box select the basic setting for decimal and thousands separators. In the Format list box you can select the currency symbol and its position. + + +For example, if the language is set to "Default" and you are using a german locale setting, the currency format will be "1.234,00 €". A point is used before the thousand digits and a comma before the decimal places. If you now select the subordinate currency format "$ English (US)" from the Format list box , you will get the following format: "$ 1.234,00". As you can see, the separators have remained the same. Only the currency symbol has been changed and converted, but the underlying format of the notation remains the same as in the locale setting. + + +If, under Language, you convert the cells to "English (US)", the English-language locale setting is also transferred and the default currency format is now "$ 1,234.00". + + +
+ +Format - Cells - Numbers +
+ \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/database_define.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/database_define.xhp index fd95524886..bbcdeda893 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/database_define.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/database_define.xhp @@ -60,16 +60,16 @@ Choose Data - Define Range. - In the Name box, enter a name for the database range. + In the Name box, enter a name for the database range. - Click More. + Click More. Specify the options for the database range. - Click OK. + Click OK.
diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/database_filter.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/database_filter.xhp index 077d5037c9..2a008bbcb8 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/database_filter.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/database_filter.xhp @@ -59,10 +59,10 @@ Choose Data - Filter - Standard Filter. - In the Standard Filter dialog, specify the filter options that you want. + In the Standard Filter dialog, specify the filter options that you want. - Click OK. + Click OK. The records that match the filter options that you specified are shown. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/database_sort.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/database_sort.xhp index 2aaf2e1177..debf70ce97 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/database_sort.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/database_sort.xhp @@ -61,7 +61,7 @@ Select the sort options that you want. - Click OK. + Click OK.
diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/datapilot_createtable.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/datapilot_createtable.xhp index 9bc374e69f..d52bd4fb4b 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/datapilot_createtable.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/datapilot_createtable.xhp @@ -51,17 +51,17 @@ Position the cursor within a range of cells containing values, row and column headings. - Choose Data - DataPilot - Start. The Select Source dialog appears. Choose Current selection and confirm with OK. The table headings are shown as buttons in the DataPilot dialog. Drag these buttons as required and drop them into the layout areas "Page Fields", "Column Fields", "Row Fields" and "Data Fields". + Choose Data - DataPilot - Start. The Select Source dialog appears. Choose Current selection and confirm with OK. The table headings are shown as buttons in the DataPilot dialog. Drag these buttons as required and drop them into the layout areas "Page Fields", "Column Fields", "Row Fields" and "Data Fields". Drag the desired buttons into one of the four areas. - Drag a button to the Page Fields area to create a button and a listbox on top of the generated datapilot table. The listbox can be used to filter the DataPilot table by the contents of the selected item. You can use drag-and-drop within the generated DataPilot table to use another page field as a filter. - If the button is dropped in the Data Fields area it will be given a caption that also shows the formula that will be used to calculate the data. + Drag a button to the Page Fields area to create a button and a listbox on top of the generated datapilot table. The listbox can be used to filter the DataPilot table by the contents of the selected item. You can use drag-and-drop within the generated DataPilot table to use another page field as a filter. + If the button is dropped in the Data Fields area it will be given a caption that also shows the formula that will be used to calculate the data. - By double-clicking on one of the fields in the Data Fields area you can call up the Data Field dialog. + By double-clicking on one of the fields in the Data Fields area you can call up the Data Field dialog. Use the Data Field dialog to select the calculations to be used for the data. To make a multiple selection, press the Command @@ -76,10 +76,10 @@ Remove a button by dragging it back to the area of the other buttons at the right of the dialog. - To open the Data Field dialog, double-click one of the buttons in the Row or Column area. Use the dialog to select if and to what extent %PRODUCTNAME calculates display subtotals. + To open the Data Field dialog, double-click one of the buttons in the Row or Column area. Use the dialog to select if and to what extent %PRODUCTNAME calculates display subtotals. - Exit the DataPilot dialog by pressing OK. A Filter button will now be inserted, or a page button for every data field that you dropped in the Page Fields area. The DataPilot table is inserted further down. + Exit the DataPilot dialog by pressing OK. A Filter button will now be inserted, or a page button for every data field that you dropped in the Page Fields area. The DataPilot table is inserted further down.
diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/datapilot_deletetable.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/datapilot_deletetable.xhp index 20b7ddf137..680fc89aa6 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/datapilot_deletetable.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/datapilot_deletetable.xhp @@ -47,7 +47,7 @@ Deleting DataPilot Tables - In order to delete a DataPilot table, select any cell in the DataPilot table, then choose Delete in the context menu. + In order to delete a DataPilot table, select any cell in the DataPilot table, then choose Delete in the context menu.
diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/datapilot_edittable.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/datapilot_edittable.xhp index b127c48274..821d21dc6f 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/datapilot_edittable.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/datapilot_edittable.xhp @@ -49,9 +49,9 @@ Click one of the buttons in the table that the DataPilot has created and hold the mouse button down. A special symbol will appear next to the mouse pointer. By dragging the button to a different position in the same row you can alter the order of the columns. If you drag a button to the left edge of the table into the row headings area, you can change a column into a row. - In the DataPilot dialog, you can drag a button to the Page Fields area to create a button and a listbox on top of the generated DataPilot table. The listbox can be used to filter the DataPilot table by the contents of the selected item. You can use drag-and-drop within the generated DataPilot table to use another page field as a filter. + In the DataPilot dialog, you can drag a button to the Page Fields area to create a button and a listbox on top of the generated DataPilot table. The listbox can be used to filter the DataPilot table by the contents of the selected item. You can use drag-and-drop within the generated DataPilot table to use another page field as a filter. To remove a button from the table, just drag it out of the DataPilot table. Release the mouse button when the mouse pointer positioned within the sheet has become a 'not allowed' icon. The button is deleted. - To edit the DataPilot table, click a cell inside the DataPilot table and open the context menu. In the context menu you find the command Start, which displays the DataPilot dialog for the current DataPilot table. + To edit the DataPilot table, click a cell inside the DataPilot table and open the context menu. In the context menu you find the command Start, which displays the DataPilot dialog for the current DataPilot table. In the DataPilot table, you can use drag-and-drop or cut/paste commands to rearrange the order of data fields. By double-clicking on some buttons inside the DataPilot table you can hide the subelements below it.
diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/datapilot_filtertable.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/datapilot_filtertable.xhp index 8ccc274ede..b80637dfdc 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/datapilot_filtertable.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/datapilot_filtertable.xhp @@ -48,7 +48,7 @@ oldref="35">Filtering DataPilot Tables You can use filters to remove unwanted data from a DataPilot table.UFI: removed help id -Click the Filter button in the sheet to call up the dialog for the filter conditions. Alternatively, call up the context menu of the DataPilot table and select the Filter command. The Filter dialog appears. Here you can filter the DataPilot table. +Click the Filter button in the sheet to call up the dialog for the filter conditions. Alternatively, call up the context menu of the DataPilot table and select the Filter command. The Filter dialog appears. Here you can filter the DataPilot table.
diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/filters.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/filters.xhp index d530d44b41..5439789333 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/filters.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/filters.xhp @@ -1,9 +1,8 @@ - - - - + + - -Applying Multiple Sheets -/text/scalc/guide/multitables.xhp - - - - - - + + Applying Multiple Sheets + /text/scalc/guide/multitables.xhp + + + sheets; inserting -inserting; sheets -sheets; selecting multiple -appending sheets -selecting;multiple sheets -multiple sheets -calculating;multiple sheets - - MW moved "sheets;simultaneous.." to edit_multitables.xhp, transferred 2 entries from there and added "calculating;" - Applying Multiple Sheets + inserting; sheets + sheets; selecting multiple + appending sheets + selecting;multiple sheets + multiple sheets + calculating;multiple sheets +MW moved "sheets;simultaneous.." to edit_multitables.xhp, transferred 2 entries from there and added "calculating;" +Applying Multiple Sheets - Inserting a Sheet - - - Choose Insert - Sheet to insert a new sheet or an existing sheet from another file. - - - Selecting Multiple Sheets - The sheet tab of the current sheet is always visible in white in front of the other sheet tabs. The other sheet tabs are gray when they are not selected. By clicking other sheet tabs while pressing Command Ctrl you can select multiple sheets. - You can use Shift+CommandCtrl+Page Up or Page Down to select multiple sheets using the keyboard. - Undoing a Selection - To undo the selection of a sheet, click its sheet tab again while pressing the Command Ctrl key. The sheet that is currently visible cannot be removed from the selection. - Calculating Across Multiple Sheets - You can refer to a range of sheets in a formula by specifying the first and last sheet of the range, for example, =SUM(Sheet1.A1:Sheet3.A1) sums up all A1 cells on Sheet1 through Sheet3. -
- - - - -
- - + Inserting a Sheet + + + Choose Insert - Sheet to insert a new sheet or an existing sheet from another file. + + + +Click to select all sheets in the document. + +Click to deselect all sheets in the document, except the current sheet. + Selecting Multiple Sheets + The sheet tab of the current sheet is always visible in white in front of the other sheet tabs. The other sheet tabs are gray when they are not selected. By clicking other sheet tabs while pressing Command +Ctrl you can select multiple sheets. + You can use Shift+Command +Ctrl+Page Up or Page Down to select multiple sheets using the keyboard. + Undoing a Selection + To undo the selection of a sheet, click its sheet tab again while pressing the Command +Ctrl key. The sheet that is currently visible cannot be removed from the selection. + Calculating Across Multiple Sheets + You can refer to a range of sheets in a formula by specifying the first and last sheet of the range, for example, =SUM(Sheet1.A1:Sheet3.A1) sums up all A1 cells on Sheet1 through Sheet3. +
+ + +
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/numbers_text.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/numbers_text.xhp new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..5d8e0a1636 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/numbers_text.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,95 @@ + + + + + + + + + Converting Text to Numbers + /text/scalc/guide/numbers_text.xhp + + + +converting;text to numbers +formats; text as numbers + +Converting Text to Numbers + +
+ Calc converts text inside cells to the respective numeric values if an unambiguous conversion is possible. If no conversion is possible, Calc returns a #VALUE! error. + Only integer numbers including exponent are converted, and ISO 8601 dates and times in their extended formats with separators. Anything else, like fractional numbers with decimal separators or dates other than ISO 8601, is not converted, as the text string would be locale dependent. Leading and trailing blanks are ignored. + The following ISO 8601 formats are converted: + + + CCYY-MM-DD + + + CCYY-MM-DDThh:mm + + + CCYY-MM-DDThh:mm:ss + + + CCYY-MM-DDThh:mm:ss,s + + + CCYY-MM-DDThh:mm:ss.s + + + hh:mm + + + hh:mm:ss + + + hh:mm:ss,s + + + hh:mm:ss.s + + + The century code CC may not be omitted. Instead of the T date and time separator, exactly one space character may be used. + If a date is given, it must be a valid Gregorian calendar date. In this case the optional time must be in the range 00:00 to 23:59:59.99999... + If only a time string is given, it may have an hours value of more than 24, while minutes and seconds can have a maximum value of 59. + The conversion is done for single arguments only, as in =A1+A2, or ="1E2"+1. Cell range arguments are not affected, so SUM(A1:A2) differs from A1+A2 if at least one of the two cells contain a convertible string. + Strings inside formulas are also converted, such as in ="1999-11-22"+42, which returns the date 42 days after November 22nd, 1999. Calculations involving localized dates as strings inside the formula return an error. For example, the localized date string "11/22/1999" or "22.11.1999" cannot be used for the automatic conversion. +
+
+ + + Format - Cells - Numbers + +
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/table_cellmerge.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/table_cellmerge.xhp index 19fe8186d8..c21f78cbf6 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/table_cellmerge.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/table_cellmerge.xhp @@ -1,8 +1,8 @@ - - + + + - - -Merging and Splitting Cells -/text/scalc/guide/table_cellmerge.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - + + Merging and Splitting Cells + /text/scalc/guide/table_cellmerge.xhp + + + cells; merging/unmerging -tables; merging cells -cell merges -unmerging cells -merging;cells + tables; merging cells + cell merges + unmerging cells + merging;cells MW made "cell merges;..." a one level entry -Merging and Unmerging Cells +Merging and Unmerging Cells mw created this file out of the shared guide "table_cellmerge.xhp", see also bug #63021 -You can select adjacent cells, then merge them into a single cell. Conversely, you can take a large cell that has been created by merging single cells, and divide it back into individual cells. -Merging Cells - - -Select the adjacent cells. - - -Choose Format - Merge Cells. - - -Canceling the merging of cells - - -Place the cursor in the cell to be split. - - -Choose Format - Merge Cells. - - - - - - + You can select adjacent cells, then merge them into a single cell. Conversely, you can take a large cell that has been created by merging single cells, and divide it back into individual cells. + When you copy cells into a target range containing merged cells, the target range gets unmerged first, then the copied cells are pasted in. If the copied cells are merged cells, they retain their merge state. + Merging Cells + + + Select the adjacent cells. + + + Choose Format - Merge Cells. + + + Canceling the merging of cells + + + Place the cursor in the cell to be split. + + + Choose Format - Merge Cells. + + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/text_numbers.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/text_numbers.xhp index 3e583349c3..940a88fdf8 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/text_numbers.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/text_numbers.xhp @@ -1,7 +1,8 @@ - - - + ************************************************************************ + --> + - - -Formatting Numbers as Text -/text/scalc/guide/text_numbers.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - + + Formatting Numbers as Text + /text/scalc/guide/text_numbers.xhp + + + numbers; as text -text formats; for numbers -numbers; entering without number formats -formats; numbers as text -cell formats; text/numbers -formatting;numbers as text + text formats; for numbers + numbers; entering without number formats + formats; numbers as text + cell formats; text/numbers + formatting;numbers as text -Formatting Numbers as Text +Formatting Numbers as Text -
-You can format numbers as text in $[officename] Calc. Open the context menu of a cell or range of cells and choose Format Cells - Numbers, then select "Text" from the Category list. Any numbers subsequently entered into the formatted range are interpreted as text. The display of these "numbers" is left-justified, just as with other text. -When numbers are formatted as text, they cannot be used in calculations or formulas. -If you have already entered normal numbers in cells and have afterwards changed the format of the cells to "Text", the numbers will remain normal numbers. They will not be converted. Only numbers entered afterwards, or numbers which are then edited, will become text numbers. -If you decide to enter a number directly as text, enter an apostrophe (') first. For example, for years in column headings, you can enter '1999, '2000 and '2001. The apostrophe is not visible in the cell, it only indicates that the entry is to be recognized as a text. This is useful if, for example, you enter a telephone number or postal code that begins with a zero (0), because a zero (0) at the start of a sequence of digits is removed in normal number formats. -
-
- -Format - Cell - Numbers - -
- - +
+ You can format numbers as text in $[officename] Calc. Open the context menu of a cell or range of cells and choose Format Cells - Numbers, then select "Text" from the Category list. Any numbers subsequently entered into the formatted range are interpreted as text. The display of these "numbers" is left-justified, just as with other text. + If you have already entered normal numbers in cells and have afterwards changed the format of the cells to "Text", the numbers will remain normal numbers. They will not be converted. Only numbers entered afterwards, or numbers which are then edited, will become text numbers. + If you decide to enter a number directly as text, enter an apostrophe (') first. For example, for years in column headings, you can enter '1999, '2000 and '2001. The apostrophe is not visible in the cell, it only indicates that the entry is to be recognized as a text. This is useful if, for example, you enter a telephone number or postal code that begins with a zero (0), because a zero (0) at the start of a sequence of digits is removed in normal number formats. +
+
+ + + Format - Cells - Numbers + +
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/text_rotate.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/text_rotate.xhp index b6e7b59488..cb8fe44a77 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/text_rotate.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/text_rotate.xhp @@ -1,7 +1,8 @@ - - - + ************************************************************************ + --> + - - -Rotating Text -/text/scalc/guide/text_rotate.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - + + Rotating Text + /text/scalc/guide/text_rotate.xhp + + + cells; rotating text -rotating; text in cells -text in cells; writing vertically + rotating; text in cells + text in cells; writing vertically -Rotating Text +Rotating Text - - -Select the cells whose text you want to rotate. - - -Choose Format - Cells. You will see the Format Cells dialog. - - -Click the Alignment tab. - - -In the Text direction area use the mouse to select in the preview wheel the direction in which the text is to be rotated. Click OK. - - -In the Text direction area, if you press the ABCD button, the text is written vertically in the direction of the characters. + + + Select the cells whose text you want to rotate. + + + Choose Format - Cells. You will see the Format Cells dialog. + + + Click the Alignment tab. + + + In the Text direction area use the mouse to select in the preview wheel the direction in which the text is to be rotated. Click OK. + + removed a wrong para, i104207
-Format - Cells -Format - Cells - Alignment -
- - + Format - Cells + Format - Cells - Alignment +
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/04/01020000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/04/01020000.xhp index 5958aef1e8..acb9ca6579 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/04/01020000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/04/01020000.xhp @@ -59,8 +59,8 @@ - Effect - +Effect + @@ -168,8 +168,8 @@ - Effect - +Effect + @@ -287,8 +287,8 @@ - Effect - +Effect + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000406.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000406.xhp index fd0423fd32..0aaabb9150 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000406.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000406.xhp @@ -95,7 +95,7 @@
Choose Tools - Language - Thesaurus - + Command Ctrl+F7
@@ -109,7 +109,7 @@
Choose Tools - Macros - Record Macro - +
Choose Tools - Macros - Organize Macros - %PRODUCTNAME Basic, click the Organizer button, click the Libraries tab, and then click the Password button @@ -138,28 +138,28 @@ Choose Tools - Customize - Events tab Choose Tools - AutoCorrect - Options + Options Choose Tools - AutoCorrect - - Optionstab +- Optionstab Choose Tools - AutoCorrect Options- Smart Tags tab Choose Tools - AutoCorrect - Options - - Replace tab + Options +- Replace tab Choose Tools - AutoCorrect - Options - - Exceptions tab + Options +- Exceptions tab Choose Tools - AutoCorrect - Options - - Custom Quotes tab + Options +- Custom Quotes tab Choose Tools - AutoCorrect - Options - - Word Completion tab + Options + - Word Completion tab Choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - View @@ -170,7 +170,7 @@
Path selection button in various wizards Click Edit button for a few entries under Tools - Options - $[officename] - Paths - +
Choose Tools - Options @@ -250,14 +250,14 @@
Choose Tools - Options - Language Settings - Languages - +
Choose Tools - Options - Language Settings - Writing Aids, in the Available language modules list, select one of the language modules and then click Edit.
Choose Tools - Options - Language Settings - Writing Aids - +
Choose Tools - Options - Language Settings - Searching in Japanese @@ -287,7 +287,7 @@
Open a text document, choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Basic Fonts (Western) - + Open a text document, choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Basic Fonts (Asian) (only available if Asian language support is enabled)
Choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer/ %PRODUCTNAME Writer/Web - Print diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00040500.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00040500.xhp index 83ff63e915..c00798f2c5 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00040500.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00040500.xhp @@ -46,7 +46,7 @@
Choose Format - Character - + On Text Formatting Bar (with cursor in object), click
@@ -111,7 +111,7 @@
Choose Format - Paragraph - + On Text Formatting bar (with cursor in object), click
@@ -191,7 +191,7 @@
Choose Format - Styles and Formatting - + F11 key On Formatting Bar, click
@@ -224,8 +224,8 @@ - 3D Effects - +3D Effects +
@@ -244,7 +244,7 @@
Choose Format - Bullets and Numbering - + On Formatting toolbar, click
@@ -324,13 +324,13 @@
Choose Format - Change Case - + Open context menu (text) - choose Case/Characters - +
Menu Format - Asian phonetic guide - +
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00040502.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00040502.xhp index 48436b43ff..d6fcd04818 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00040502.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00040502.xhp @@ -193,11 +193,11 @@
Open the context menu for the object - choose Name - +
Open the context menu for the object - choose Description - +
Choose Format - Object - Graphic - @@ -231,7 +231,7 @@
Choose Edit - Points - + Open context menu - choose Edit Points Open context menu - choose Edit Points @@ -257,19 +257,19 @@
Choose Format - Character (drawing functions) Open context menu - choose Character - +
Open context menu - choose Size - +
Open context menu - choose Style - +
Open context menu - choose Style - Bold - +
@@ -288,7 +288,7 @@
Open context menu - choose Style - Italic - +
@@ -326,44 +326,44 @@
Open context menu - choose Style - Strikethrough - +
Open context menu - choose Style - Shadow - +
Open context menu - choose Style - Contour - +
Open context menu - choose Style - Superscript - +
Open context menu - choose Style - Subscript - +
Open context menu - choose Line Spacing - +
Open context menu - choose Line Spacing - Single - +
Open context menu - choose Line Spacing - 1.5 Lines - +
Open context menu - choose Line Spacing - Double - +
Choose Format - Alignment - Left (drawing functions) Open context menu - choose Alignment - Left - +
@@ -383,7 +383,7 @@
Choose Format - Alignment - Right (drawing functions) Open context menu - choose Alignment - Right - +
@@ -403,7 +403,7 @@
Choose Format - Alignment - Centered (drawing functions) Open context menu - choose Alignment - Center - +
@@ -424,7 +424,7 @@
Choose Format - Alignment - Justified (drawing functions) Open context menu - choose Alignment - Justified - +
@@ -445,9 +445,9 @@
Choose Format - Group - + Open context menu - choose Group - +
Choose Format - Group - Group (text documents, spreadsheets) @@ -473,7 +473,7 @@ Choose Format - Group - Ungroup (text documents, spreadsheets) Choose Modify - Ungroup (drawing documents) Open context menu - choose Ungroup - +
@@ -494,7 +494,7 @@ Choose Format - Group - Exit Group (text documents, spreadsheets) Choose Modify - Exit Group (drawing documents) Open context menu - choose Exit Group - +
@@ -515,7 +515,7 @@ Choose Format - Group - Enter Group (text documents, spreadsheets) Choose Modify - Enter Group (drawing documents) Open context menu - choose Enter Group - +
diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01050000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01050000.xhp index c29b1ba121..63500dbfd3 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01050000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01050000.xhp @@ -44,8 +44,7 @@
documents; closing closing;documents -backing window -mw made "closing..." a two level entry +mw deleted "backing window" Close diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01100200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01100200.xhp index 7d7290d66f..a5323cefa1 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01100200.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01100200.xhp @@ -56,43 +56,43 @@
-File +File Displays the file name. - Type: Displays the file type for the current document. - Location: Displays the path and the name of the directory where the file is stored. - Size: Displays the size of the current document in bytes. - Created: + Created: Displays the date and time and author when the file was first saved. - Modified: + Modified: Displays the date and time and author when the file was last saved in a $[officename] file format. - Digitally signed: + Digitally signed: Displays the date and the time when the file was last signed as well as the name of the author who signed the document. - Digital Signature + Digital Signature Opens the Digital Signatures dialog where you can manage digital signatures for the current document. - Last printed: Displays the date and time and user name when the file was last printed. - Revision number: Displays the number of times that the file has been saved. - Editing time: Displays the amount of time that the file has been open for editing since the file was created. The editing time is updated when you save the file. -Apply User Data Saves the user's full name with the file. You can edit the name by choosing Tools - Options - $[officename] - User Data. -Delete Resets the editing time to zero, the creation date to the current date and time, and the version number to 1. The modification and printing dates are also deleted. - Template: + Template: Displays the template that was used to create the file. \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01180000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01180000.xhp index a0b4ecd983..1455731c4b 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01180000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01180000.xhp @@ -1,7 +1,8 @@ - - - + ************************************************************************ + --> + + - -Save All -/text/shared/01/01180000.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - - - -
- -Save All - Saves all open $[officename] documents. This command is only available if two or more files have been modified. -
-
- -
- If you are saving a new file or a copy of a read-only file, the Save As dialog appears. - - + + Save All + /text/shared/01/01180000.xhp + + + +
+ + +Save All + Saves all modified $[officename] documents. +
+
+ +
+ If you are saving a new file or a copy of a read-only file, the Save As dialog appears. + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02100000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02100000.xhp index 04edc3b612..ff1f086727 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02100000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02100000.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,5 @@ + - + @@ -68,19 +69,19 @@ Options -Entire Cells Whole words only Searches for whole words or cells that are identical to the search text. -Backwards Search starts at the current cursor position and goes backwards to the beginning of the file. - Regular expressions @@ -98,7 +99,7 @@ Ext help text not found within switches. Solution: Keep switched text for normal -Match case case sensitivity;searching mw made "case sensitive.." a two level entry @@ -108,7 +109,7 @@ Ext help text not found within switches. Solution: Keep switched text for normal -Current selection only Searches only the selected text or cells.had to copy extended help to outside of switch construct - see issue 72448 @@ -122,27 +123,27 @@ Ext help text not found within switches. Solution: Keep switched text for normal -Search for Styles / Including Styles Searches for text formatted with the style that you specify. Select this checkbox, and then select a style from the Search for list. To specify a replacement style, select a style from the Replace with list. After you select the attributes that you want to search for, the Search for Styles box in the Options area of the %PRODUCTNAME Writer Find & Replace dialog changes to Including Styles. If you want to search for text in which attributes were set by using direct formatting and styles, select the Including Styles box. -Notes +Notes In Writer, you can select to include the notes texts in your searches. -Match character width (only if Asian languages are enabled) Distinguishes between half-width and full-width character forms. -Sounds like (Japanese) (only if Asian languages are enabled) Lets you specify the search options for similar notation used in Japanese text. Select this checkbox, and then click the ... button to specify the search options. @@ -198,43 +199,43 @@ Ext help text not found within switches. Solution: Keep switched text for normal More Options / Less Options / Fewer Options - name subject to change Shows more or fewer search options. Click this button again to hide the extended search options. - Search in -Formulas Searches for the characters that you specify in formulas and in fixed (not calculated) values. For example, you could look for formulas that contain 'SUM'. -Values Searches for the characters that you specify in values and in the results of formulas. Searches for the characters that you specify in values and in the results of formulas. -Notes Searches for the characters that you specify in the notes that are attached to the cells. Searches for the characters that you specify in the notes that are attached to the cells. - Search direction Determines the order for searching the cells. -By Rows Searches from left to right across the rows. -By Columns Searches from top to bottom through the columns. @@ -249,7 +250,7 @@ Ext help text not found within switches. Solution: Keep switched text for normal -Search in all sheets Searches through all of the sheets in the current spreadsheet file. @@ -259,7 +260,8 @@ Ext help text not found within switches. Solution: Keep switched text for normal After you close the Find & Replace dialog, you can still search using the last search criteria that you entered, by pressing Shift+Command Ctrl+F.
- + +
diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02100001.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02100001.xhp index c74c9bb561..533a05b40d 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02100001.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02100001.xhp @@ -333,7 +333,7 @@ Represents an uppercase character if Match case is selected in Options. - +
diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02180000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02180000.xhp index 5f91dd86fe..0250e6b564 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02180000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02180000.xhp @@ -63,34 +63,34 @@ If you are loading a file that contains DDE links, you are prompted to update the links. Decline the update if you do not want to establish a connection to the DDE server. Double-click a link in the list to open a file dialog where you can select another object for this link. - Source file + Source file Lists the path to the source file. - Element Lists the application (if known) that last saved the source file. - Type + Type Lists the file type, such as graphic, of the source file. - Status + Status Lists additional information about the source file. -Automatic Automatically updates the contents of the link when you open the file. Any changes made in the source file are then displayed in the file containing the link. Linked graphic files can only be updated manually. This option is not available for a linked graphic file. The Automatic option is only available for DDE links. You can insert a DDE link by copying the contents from one file and pasting by choosing Edit - Paste Special, and then selecting the Link box. As DDE is a text based linking system, only the displayed decimals are copied into the target sheet.removed Calc switch: this feature can be used wherever a cell area can be pasted: everywhere -Manual Only updates the link when you click the Update button. -Update Updates the selected link so that the most recently saved version of the linked file is displayed in the current document. -Modify Change the source file for the selected link. -Break Link Breaks the link between the source file and the current document. The most recently updated contents of the source file are kept in the current document. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02220100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02220100.xhp index 60d5535269..234d297759 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02220100.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02220100.xhp @@ -47,23 +47,23 @@
- Hyperlink + Hyperlink Lists the properties of the URL that is attached to the hotspot. -URL: +URL: Enter the URL for the file that you want to open when you click the selected hotspot. If you want to jump to a named anchor within the current document, the address should be of the form "file:///C/[current_document_name]#anchor_name". -Alternative text: +Alternative text: Enter the text that you want to display when the mouse rests on the hotspot in a browser.If you do not enter any text, the Address is displayed. -Frame: +Frame: Enter the name of the target frame that you want to open the URL in. You can also select a standard frame name that is recognized by all browsers from the list.. -Name: Enter a name for the image. -Description +Description Enter a description for the hotspot.see http://specs.openoffice.org/appwide/drawing_layer/imagemapdialog.odt
Priority Table diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/03010000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/03010000.xhp index 8630186bc6..944919f1de 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/03010000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/03010000.xhp @@ -1,9 +1,8 @@ - - - - + + - -Word Completion -/text/shared/01/06040600.xhp - - - -
-Word Completion -Set the options for completing frequently occurring words while you type. -
-
- -
+ + Word Completion + /text/shared/01/06040600.xhp + + + +
+ Word Completion + Set the options for completing frequently occurring words while you type. +
+
+ +
-Enable word completion -Stores frequently used words, and automatically completes a word after you type three letters that match the first three letters of a stored word. + +Enable word completion + Stores frequently used words, and automatically completes a word after you type three letters that match the first three letters of a stored word. -Append space -If you do not add punctuation after the word, $[officename] adds a space. The space is added as soon as you begin typing the next word. + +Append space + If you do not add punctuation after the word, $[officename] adds a space. The space is added as soon as you begin typing the next word. -Show as tip -Displays the completed word as a Help Tip. + +Show as tip + Displays the completed word as a Help Tip. -Collect words -Adds the frequently used words to a list. To remove a word from the Word Completion list, select the word, and then click Delete Entry. + +Collect words + Adds the frequently used words to a list. To remove a word from the Word Completion list, select the word, and then click Delete Entry. -When closing a document, save the list for later use in other documents -Makes the current Word Completion list available to other documents after you close the current document. The list remains available until you exit %PRODUCTNAME. + +When closing a document, remove the words collected from it from the list + When enabled, the list gets cleared when closing the current document. When disabled, makes the current Word Completion list available to other documents after you close the current document. The list remains available until you exit %PRODUCTNAME. -Accept with -Select the key that you want to use to accept the automatic word completion. -Press Esc to decline the word completion. + +Accept with + Select the key that you want to use to accept the automatic word completion. + Press Esc to decline the word completion. -Min. word length -Enter the minimum word length for a word to become eligible for the word completion feature.UFI: changed due to BH phone call. + +Min. word length + Enter the minimum word length for a word to become eligible for the word completion feature.UFI: changed due to BH phone call. -Max. entries -Enter the maximum number of words that you want to store in the Word Completion list. + +Max. entries + Enter the maximum number of words that you want to store in the Word Completion list. -Word Completion list -Lists the collected words. The list is valid until you close the current document. To make the list available to other documents in the current session, select "When closing a document, save the list for later use in other documents". -If the automatic spellcheck option is enabled, only the words that are recognized by the spellcheck are collected. + +Word Completion list + Lists the collected words. The list is valid until you close the current document. To make the list available to other documents in the current session, select "When closing a document, save the list for later use in other documents". + If the automatic spellcheck option is enabled, only the words that are recognized by the spellcheck are collected. -Delete Entry -Removes the selected word or words from the Word Completion list. + +Delete Entry + Removes the selected word or words from the Word Completion list. -
- -
+ +
+ +
- - + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/password_dlg.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/password_dlg.xhp index d2bcbb9d94..dbf316f75e 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/password_dlg.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/password_dlg.xhp @@ -11,7 +11,7 @@ * OpenOffice.org - a multi-platform office productivity suite * * $RCSfile: soffice2xmlhelp.xsl,v $ - * $Revision: 1.10 $ + * $Revision: 1.8 $ * * This file is part of OpenOffice.org. * @@ -42,15 +42,15 @@
- Password Assigns a password to prevent users from making unauthorized changes. -Password - Type a password that is at least five characters long. A password is case sensitive. + Type a password. A password is case sensitive.
- GeneralUFI: all on one page because they were intended to shrink to AHID tags with OOo3 anyway. Sadly cws help9s stalled ... - GeneralUFI: all on one page because they were intended to shrink to AHID tags with OOo3 anyway. Sadly cws help9s stalled ... + Pages Sets the export options for the pages included in the PDF file. -All +All Exports all defined print ranges. If no print range is defined, exports the entire document. -Range +Range Exports the pages you type in the box. To export a range of pages, use the format 3-6. To export single pages, use the format 7;9;11. If you want, you can export a combination of page ranges and single pages, by using a format like 3-6;8;10;12. -Selection +Selection Exports the current selection. - Images + Images Sets the PDF export options for images inside your document. EPS images with embedded previews are exported only as previews. EPS images without embedded previews are exported as empty placeholders. -Lossless compression +Lossless compression Selects a lossless compression of images. All pixels are preserved. -JPEG compression +JPEG compression Selects a JPEG compression of images. With a high quality level, almost all pixels are preserved. With a low quality level, some pixels get lost and artefacts are introduced, but file sizes are reduced. -Quality +Quality Enter the quality level for JPEG compression. -Reduce image resolution +Reduce image resolution Selects to resample or down-size the images to a lower number of pixels per inch. Select the target resolution for the images. - General + General Sets general PDF export options. -PDF/A-1a +PDF/A-1a Converts to the PDF/A-1a format. This is defined as an electronic document file format for long term preservation. All fonts that were used in the source document will be embedded into the generated PDF file. PDF tags will be written. -Tagged PDF +Tagged PDF Selects to write PDF tags. This can increase file size by huge amounts. Tagged PDF contains information about the structure of the document contents. This can help to display the document on devices with different screens, and when using screen reader software. -Export notes +Export notes Selects to export notes of Writer and Calc documents as PDF notes. -Export bookmarks +Export bookmarks Selects to export bookmarks of Writer documents as PDF bookmarks. Bookmarks are created for all outline paragraphs (Tools - Outline Numbering) and for all table of contents entries for which you did assign hyperlinks in the source document. -Create PDF form +Create PDF form Choose to create a PDF form. This can be filled out and printed by the user of the PDF document. -Submit format +Submit format Select the format of submitting forms from within the PDF file. Select the format of the data that you will receive from the submitter: FDF (Forms Data Format), PDF, HTML, or XML. This setting overrides the control's URL property that you set in the document. -Export automatically inserted blank pages +Export automatically inserted blank pages If switched on, automatically inserted blank pages are being exported to pdf file. This is best if you are printing the pdf file double-sided. Example: In a book a chapter paragraph style is set to always start with an odd numbered page. The previous chapter ends on an odd page. %PRODUCTNAME inserts an even numbered blank page. This option controls whether to export that even numbered page or not. -Create hybrid file +Create hybrid file When the Sun PDF Import Extension is installed, this setting enables you to export the document as a .pdf file containing two file formats: PDF and ODF. - Initial View - Panes + Initial View + Panes -Page only +Page only Select to generate a PDF file that shows only the page contents. -Bookmarks and page +Bookmarks and page Select to generate a PDF file that shows a bookmarks palette and the page contents.UFI: Adobe reader help names the panes as "palettes" -Thumbnails and page +Thumbnails and page Select to generate a PDF file that shows a thumbnails palette and the page contents. -Open on page +Open on page Select to show the given page when the reader opens the PDF file. - Magnification + Magnification -Default +Default Select to generate a PDF file that shows the page contents without zooming. If the reader software is configured to use a zoom factor by default, the page shows with that zoom factor. -Fit in window +Fit in window Select to generate a PDF file that shows the page zoomed to fit entirely into the reader's window. -Fit width +Fit width Select to generate a PDF file that shows the page zoomed to fit the width of the reader's window. -Fit visible +Fit visible Select to generate a PDF file that shows the text and graphics on the page zoomed to fit the width of the reader's window. -Zoom factor +Zoom factor Select a given zoom factor when the reader opens the PDF file. - Page layout + Page layout -Default +Default Select to generate a PDF file that shows the pages according to the layout setting of the reader software. -Single page +Single page Select to generate a PDF file that shows one page at a time. -Continuous +Continuous Select to generate a PDF file that shows pages in a continuous vertical column. -Continuous facing +Continuous facing Select to generate a PDF file that shows pages side by side in a continuous column. For more than two pages, the first page is displayed on the right. -First page is left +First page is left Select to generate a PDF file that shows pages side by side in a continuous column. For more than two pages, the first page is displayed on the left. You must enable support for complex text layout on Tools - Options - Language settings - Languages. - User Interface - Window options + User Interface + Window options -Resize window to initial page +Resize window to initial page Select to generate a PDF file that is shown in a window displaying the whole initial page. -Center window on screen +Center window on screen Select to generate a PDF file that is shown in a reader window centered on screen. -Open in full screen mode +Open in full screen mode Select to generate a PDF file that is shown in a full screen reader window in front of all other windows. -Display document title +Display document title Select to generate a PDF file that is shown with the document title in the reader's title bar. - User interface options + User interface options -Hide menu bar +Hide menu bar Select to hide the reader's menu bar when the document is active. -Hide toolbar +Hide toolbar Select to hide the reader's toolbar when the document is active. -Hide window controls +Hide window controls Select to hide the reader's controls when the document is active. - Transitions + Transitions -Use transition effects +Use transition effects Selects to export Impress slide transition effects to respective PDF effects. - Bookmarks + Bookmarks -All bookmark levels +All bookmark levels Select to show all bookmark levels when the reader opens the PDF file. -Visible bookmark levels +Visible bookmark levels Select to show bookmark levels down to the selected level when the reader opens the PDF file. - Links + Links Specify how to export bookmarks and hyperlinks in your document. -Export bookmarks as named destinations +Export bookmarks as named destinations The bookmarks (targets of references) in PDF files can be defined as rectangular areas. Additionally, bookmarks to named objects can be defined by their names. Enable the checkbox to export the names of objects in your document as valid bookmark targets. This allows to link to those objects by name from other documents. -Convert document references to PDF targets +Convert document references to PDF targets Enable this checkbox to convert the URLs referencing other ODF files to PDF files with the same name. In the referencing URLs the extensions .odt, .odp, .ods, .odg, and .odm are converted to the extension .pdf. -Export URLs relative to file system +Export URLs relative to file system Enable this checkbox to export URLs to other documents as relative URLs in the file system. See "relative hyperlinks" in the Help. - Cross-document links + Cross-document links Specify how to handle hyperlinks from your PDF file to other files. -Default mode +Default mode Links from your PDF document to other documents will be handled as it is specified in your operating system. -Open with PDF reader application +Open with PDF reader application Cross-document links are opened with the PDF reader application that currently shows the document. The PDF reader application must be able to handle the specified file type inside the hyperlink. -Open with Internet browser +Open with Internet browser Cross-document links are opened with the Internet browser. The Internet browser must be able to handle the specified file type inside the hyperlink. - Security + Security -Encrypt the PDF document +Encrypt the PDF document Select to encrypt the PDF document with a password. The PDF file can be opened only when the user enters the correct password. -Set open password +Set open password Click to open a dialog where you enter the password. -Restrict permission +Restrict permission Select to restrict some permissions. The permissions can be changed only when the user enters the correct password. -Set permission password +Set permission password Click to open a dialog where you enter the password. - Printing + Printing -Not permitted +Not permitted Printing the document is not permitted. -Low resolution (150 dpi) +Low resolution (150 dpi) The document can only be printed in low resolution (150 dpi). Not all PDF readers honor this setting. -High resolution +High resolution The document can be printed in high resolution. - Changes + Changes -Not permitted +Not permitted No changes of the content are permitted. -Inserting, deleting, and rotating pages +Inserting, deleting, and rotating pages Only inserting, deleting, and rotating pages is permitted. -Filling in form fields +Filling in form fields Only filling in form fields is permitted. -Commenting, filling in form fields +Commenting, filling in form fields Only commenting and filling in form fields is permitted. -Any except extracting pages +Any except extracting pages All changes are permitted, except extracting pages. -Enable copying of content +Enable copying of content Select to enable copying of content to the clipboard. -Enable text access for accessibility tools +Enable text access for accessibility tools Select to enable text access for accessibility tools. - Export Exports the current file in PDF format. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170101.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170101.xhp index 34d06943ec..cbe2c008f6 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170101.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170101.xhp @@ -1,9 +1,8 @@ - - - + + - - - + + - -General -/text/shared/02/01170101.xhp - - - -
-GeneralUFI: had to remove all internal links to this file because all the targets vanished and no time to reinsert them allThis General tab enables you to define the general properties of a form control. These properties differ, depending on the control type. Not all of the following properties are available for every control. -
-
- -
-If you export the current form document to HTML format, the default control values are exported, not the current control values. Default values are determined - depending on the type of control - by the properties' Default value (for example, in text fields), Default status (for check boxes and option fields), and Default selection (for list boxes). + + General + /text/shared/02/01170101.xhp + + + +
+ GeneralUFI: had to remove all internal links to this file because all the targets vanished and no time to reinsert them all +This General tab enables you to define the general properties of a form control. These properties differ, depending on the control type. Not all of the following properties are available for every control. +
+
+ +
+ If you export the current form document to HTML format, the default control values are exported, not the current control values. Default values are determined - depending on the type of control - by the properties' Default value (for example, in text fields), Default status (for check boxes and option fields), and Default selection (for list boxes).
-Enabled -If a control field has the property "Enabled" (Yes), the form user will be able to use the control field. If the property is disabled, it will not be enabled (No) and will be displayed in a gray color. -
-
-Line count -Specifies how many lines should be displayed in the dropdown list. This setting is only active if you chose "Yes" in the "Dropdown" option.For combo boxes with the Dropdown property, you can specify how many lines should be displayed in the dropdown list. With control fields which do not have the Dropdown option, the line's display will be specified by the size of the control field and the font size. -
-
-ActionUFI: renamed from Button type to Action, see dba.features: Form navigation functionality for command buttons -The Action property determines the action that occurs when you activate a button.You can use navigation actions to design your own database navigation buttons. -The following table describes the actions that you can assign to a button. - - - -Action - - -Description - - - - -None - - -No action occurs. - - - - -Submit form - - -Sends the data that is entered in other control fields of the current form to the address that is specified in Form Properties under URL. -Enter the URL into the form's data property "URL" text box when you export to a PDF file.UFI: see #i36574# - - - - -Reset form - - -Resets the settings in other control fields to the predefined defaults (Default Status, Default Selection, Default Value). - - - - -Open document / web page - - -Opens the URL that is specified under URL. You can use Frame to specify the target frame. - - - - -First record - - -Moves the current form to the first record. - - - - -Previous record - - -Moves the current form to the previous record. - - - - -Next record - - -Moves the current form to the next record. - - - - -Last record - - -Moves the current form to the last record. - - - - -Save record - - -Saves the current record, if necessary. - - - - -Undo data entry - - -Reverses the changes in the current record. - - - - -New record - - -Moves the current form to the insert row. - - - - -Delete record - - -Deletes the current record. - - - - -Refresh form - - -Reloads the most recently saved version of the current form. - - -
-
-
-Dropdown -Specifies whether the combo box should dropdown (Yes) or not (No).A control field with the dropdown property has an additional arrow button which opens the list of the existing form entries per mouse click. Under Line count, you can specify how many lines (or rows) should be displayed in the dropdown state. Combination fields can have the dropdown property. -Combo boxes that were inserted as columns in a table control are always dropdown as the default. -
-
+ +Enabled + If a control field has the property "Enabled" (Yes), the form user will be able to use the control field. If the property is disabled, it will not be enabled (No) and will be displayed in a gray color. +
+
+ +Line count + Specifies how many lines should be displayed in the dropdown list. This setting is only active if you chose "Yes" in the "Dropdown" option.For combo boxes with the Dropdown property, you can specify how many lines should be displayed in the dropdown list. With control fields which do not have the Dropdown option, the line's display will be specified by the size of the control field and the font size. +
+
+ +ActionUFI: renamed from Button type to Action, see dba.features: Form navigation functionality for command buttons + The Action property determines the action that occurs when you activate a button.You can use navigation actions to design your own database navigation buttons. + The following table describes the actions that you can assign to a button. + + + + Action + + + Description + + + + + None + + + No action occurs. + + + + + Submit form + + + Sends the data that is entered in other control fields of the current form to the address that is specified in Form Properties under URL. + Enter the URL into the form's data property "URL" text box when you export to a PDF file.UFI: see #i36574# + + + + + Reset form + + + Resets the settings in other control fields to the predefined defaults (Default Status, Default Selection, Default Value). + + + + + Open document / web page + + + Opens the URL that is specified under URL. You can use Frame to specify the target frame. + + + + + First record + + + Moves the current form to the first record. + + + + + Previous record + + + Moves the current form to the previous record. + + + + + Next record + + + Moves the current form to the next record. + + + + + Last record + + + Moves the current form to the last record. + + + + + Save record + + + Saves the current record, if necessary. + + + + + Undo data entry + + + Reverses the changes in the current record. + + + + + New record + + + Moves the current form to the insert row. + + + + + Delete record + + + Deletes the current record. + + + + + Refresh form + + + Reloads the most recently saved version of the current form. + + +
+ +
+
+ +Dropdown + Specifies whether the combo box should dropdown (Yes) or not (No).A control field with the dropdown property has an additional arrow button which opens the list of the existing form entries per mouse click. Under Line count, you can specify how many lines (or rows) should be displayed in the dropdown state. Combination fields can have the dropdown property. + Combo boxes that were inserted as columns in a table control are always dropdown as the default. +
+
-Alignment / Graphics alignment -Specifies the alignment option for text or graphics that are used on a control.The alignment options are left-aligned, right-aligned, and centered. These options are available for the following elements: - - -Title of Label fields - - -Content of text fields - - -Content of table fields in the columns of a table control - - -Graphics or text that are used in buttons -The Alignment option for buttons is called Graphics alignment. - - -
-
-AutoFill -Assigns the AutoFill function to a combo box.The AutoFill function displays a list of previous entries after you start to type an entry.UFI: changed AutoComplete to AutoFill (got changed by error in the UI, so we stay with it now, according to FS) -
-
-Label field -Specifies the source for the label of the control. The text of the label field will be used instead of the name of a database field. For example, in the Filter Navigator, Search dialog, and as a column name in the table view. -To define one character of the label as a mnemonic, so that the user can access this control by pressing the character on the keyboard, insert a tilde (~) character in front of the character in the label. -Only the text of a group frame can be used as the label field when using radio buttons. This text applies to all of the radio buttons of the same group. -If you click on the ... button next to the text field, you will see the Label Field Selection dialog. Select a label from the list. -Check the No assignment box to remove the link between a control and the assigned label field. -
-
-Width -Sets the column width in the table control field.Sets the column width in the table control field in the units that are specified in the %PRODUCTNAME module options. If you want, you can enter a value followed by a valid measurement unit, for example, 2 cm. -
-
-RepeatUFI: see spec spinbutton_form_control.sxw -Specifies if the action of a control such as a spin button repeats when you click the control and hold the mouse button down. -
-
-DelayUFI: see http://dba.openoffice.org/specifications/forms/scrollbar_form_control.sxw -Specifies the delay in milliseconds between repeating events. A repeating event occurs when you click an arrow button or the background of a scrollbar, or one of the record navigation buttons of a Navigation Bar, and you keep the mouse button pressed for some time. You can enter a value followed by a valid time unit, for example, 2 s or 500 ms. -
-
-Record marker -Specifies whether the first column is displayed with row labels, in which the current record is marked by an arrow. -
-
-Date format -Here, you can determine the format you want for the date readout.With date fields you can determine the format for the date readout. -All format fields (date, time, currency, numeric) are formatted automatically in the selected format as soon as you leave them regardless of how you entered the input. + +Alignment / Graphics alignment + Specifies the alignment option for text or graphics that are used on a control.The alignment options are left-aligned, right-aligned, and centered. These options are available for the following elements: + + + Title of Label fields + + + Content of text fields + + + Content of table fields in the columns of a table control + + + Graphics or text that are used in buttons + The Alignment option for buttons is called Graphics alignment. + + +
+
+ +AutoFill + Assigns the AutoFill function to a combo box.The AutoFill function displays a list of previous entries after you start to type an entry.UFI: changed AutoComplete to AutoFill (got changed by error in the UI, so we stay with it now, according to FS) +
+
+ +Label field + Specifies the source for the label of the control. The text of the label field will be used instead of the name of a database field. For example, in the Filter Navigator, Search dialog, and as a column name in the table view. + To define one character of the label as a mnemonic, so that the user can access this control by pressing the character on the keyboard, insert a tilde (~) character in front of the character in the label. + Only the text of a group frame can be used as the label field when using radio buttons. This text applies to all of the radio buttons of the same group. + If you click on the ... button next to the text field, you will see the Label Field Selection dialog. Select a label from the list. + +Check the No assignment box to remove the link between a control and the assigned label field. +
+
+ +Width + Sets the column width in the table control field.Sets the column width in the table control field in the units that are specified in the %PRODUCTNAME module options. If you want, you can enter a value followed by a valid measurement unit, for example, 2 cm. +
+
+ +RepeatUFI: see spec spinbutton_form_control.sxw + Specifies if the action of a control such as a spin button repeats when you click the control and hold the mouse button down. +
+
+ +DelayUFI: see http://dba.openoffice.org/specifications/forms/scrollbar_form_control.sxw + Specifies the delay in milliseconds between repeating events. A repeating event occurs when you click an arrow button or the background of a scrollbar, or one of the record navigation buttons of a Navigation Bar, and you keep the mouse button pressed for some time. You can enter a value followed by a valid time unit, for example, 2 s or 500 ms. +
+
+ +Record marker + Specifies whether the first column is displayed with row labels, in which the current record is marked by an arrow. +
+
+ +Date format + Here, you can determine the format you want for the date readout.With date fields you can determine the format for the date readout. + All format fields (date, time, currency, numeric) are formatted automatically in the selected format as soon as you leave them regardless of how you entered the input. -
-
-Spin Button -The "Yes" option transforms the control field into a spin button, where corresponding arrow buttons are added.Numerical fields, currency fields, date and time fields can be introduced as spin buttons in the form. -
-
-Tristate -Specifies whether a check box can also represent ZERO values of a linked database apart from the TRUE and FALSE values. This function is only available if the database accepts three states: TRUE, FALSE and ZERO. -The Tristate property is only defined for database forms, not for HTML forms. -
-
-Print -Specifies whether you want the control field to appear in a document's printout. -
-
-Edit mask -Defines the edit mask. By specifying a character code you can determine what the user can enter in the control field.By specifying the character code in pattern fields, you can determine what the user can enter in the pattern field. -The length of the edit mask determines the number of the possible input positions. If the user enters characters that do not correspond to the edit mask, the input is rejected when the user leaves the field. You can enter the following characters to define the edit mask: - - - - Character - - -Meaning - - - - -L - - -A text constant. This position cannot be edited. The character is displayed at the corresponding position of the Literal Mask. - - - - -a - - -The characters a-z and A-Z can be entered. Capital characters are not converted to lowercase characters. - - - - -A - - -The characters A-Z can be entered. If a lowercase letter is entered, it is automatically converted to a capital letter - - - - -c - - -The characters a-z, A-Z, and 0-9 can be entered. Capital characters are not converted to lowercase characters. - - - - -C - - -The characters A-Z and 0-9 can be entered. If a lowercase letter is entered, it is automatically converted to a capital letter - - - - -N - - -Only the characters 0-9 can be entered. - - - - -x - - -All printable characters can be entered. - - - - -X - - -All printable characters can be entered. If a lowercase letter is used, it is automatically converted to a capital letter. - - -
-For the literal mask "__.__.2000", for example, define the "NNLNNLLLLL" edit mask so that the user can only enter four digits when entering a date. -
-
-Strict format -You can have a format check with control fields that accept formatted contents (date, time, and so on). If the strict format function is activated (Yes), only the allowed characters are accepted. For example, in a date field, only numbers or date delimiters are accepted; all alphabet entries typed with your keyboard are ignored. -
-
-Frame -Specifies the target frame to display the document that is opened by the "Open document / web page" action.You can also specify the target frame to display a URL that you open when you click a button that has been assigned the Open document or web page action). -
-If you click the field, you can select an option from the list that specifies into which frame the next document should be loaded. The following possibilities exist: - - - -Entry - - -Meaning - - - - -_blank - - -The next document is created in a new empty frame. - - - - -_parent - - -The next document is created in a parent frame. If no parent exists, the document is created in the same frame. - - - - -_self - - -The next document is created in the same frame. - - - - -_top - - -The next document is created in a top-level window, that is, in the highest frame of the hierarchy; if the current frame is already a top window, the document is created in the current frame. - - -
-
-The Frame property is relevant for HTML forms, but not for database forms. -
-
-Graphics -An image button has a Graphics property. The Graphics property specifies the graphic's path and file name that you want to have displayed on the button. If you select the graphic file with the ... button, the path and file name will be automatically included in the text box. -
-
-Help text -Provides the option of entering a help text that will be displayed as a tip on the control. The tip shows the text in user mode when the mouse is moved over the control. -For URL type buttons, the help text appears as the extended tip instead of the URL address entered under URL. -
-
-Help URL -Specifies a batch label in URL spelling which refers to a help document and which can be called with the help of the control field. The help for the control field help can be opened if the focus is positioned on the control field and the user presses F1. -
-
-Background color -Sets the background color of the control field.A background color is available for most control fields. If you click on Background color, a list will open which enables you to select among various colors. The "Standard" option adopts the system setting. If the desired color is not listed, click the ... button to define a color in the Color dialog. -
-
+
+
+ +Spin Button + The "Yes" option transforms the control field into a spin button, where corresponding arrow buttons are added.Numerical fields, currency fields, date and time fields can be introduced as spin buttons in the form. +
+
+ +Tristate + Specifies whether a check box can also represent ZERO values of a linked database apart from the TRUE and FALSE values. This function is only available if the database accepts three states: TRUE, FALSE and ZERO. + The Tristate property is only defined for database forms, not for HTML forms. +
+
+ +Printable + Specifies whether you want the control field to appear in a document's printout. +
+
+ +PositionX + Defines the X position of the control, relative to the anchor. +
+
+ +PositionY + Defines the Y position of the control, relative to the anchor. +
+
+ +Anchor + Defines where the control will be anchored. +
+
+ +Width + Defines the width of the control. +
+
+ +Height + Defines the height of the control. +
+
+ +Edit mask + Defines the edit mask. By specifying a character code you can determine what the user can enter in the control field.By specifying the character code in pattern fields, you can determine what the user can enter in the pattern field. + The length of the edit mask determines the number of the possible input positions. If the user enters characters that do not correspond to the edit mask, the input is rejected when the user leaves the field. You can enter the following characters to define the edit mask: + + + + Character + + + Meaning + + + + + L + + + A text constant. This position cannot be edited. The character is displayed at the corresponding position of the Literal Mask. + + + + + a + + + The characters a-z and A-Z can be entered. Capital characters are not converted to lowercase characters. + + + + + A + + + The characters A-Z can be entered. If a lowercase letter is entered, it is automatically converted to a capital letter + + + + + c + + + The characters a-z, A-Z, and 0-9 can be entered. Capital characters are not converted to lowercase characters. + + + + + C + + + The characters A-Z and 0-9 can be entered. If a lowercase letter is entered, it is automatically converted to a capital letter + + + + + N + + + Only the characters 0-9 can be entered. + + + + + x + + + All printable characters can be entered. + + + + + X + + + All printable characters can be entered. If a lowercase letter is used, it is automatically converted to a capital letter. + + +
+ + For the literal mask "__.__.2000", for example, define the "NNLNNLLLLL" edit mask so that the user can only enter four digits when entering a date. +
+
+ +Strict format + You can have a format check with control fields that accept formatted contents (date, time, and so on). If the strict format function is activated (Yes), only the allowed characters are accepted. For example, in a date field, only numbers or date delimiters are accepted; all alphabet entries typed with your keyboard are ignored. +
+
+ +Frame + Specifies the target frame to display the document that is opened by the "Open document / web page" action.You can also specify the target frame to display a URL that you open when you click a button that has been assigned the Open document or web page action). +
+ If you click the field, you can select an option from the list that specifies into which frame the next document should be loaded. The following possibilities exist: + + + + Entry + + + Meaning + + + + + _blank + + + The next document is created in a new empty frame. + + + + + _parent + + + The next document is created in a parent frame. If no parent exists, the document is created in the same frame. + + + + + _self + + + The next document is created in the same frame. + + + + + _top + + + The next document is created in a top-level window, that is, in the highest frame of the hierarchy; if the current frame is already a top window, the document is created in the current frame. + + +
+ +
+ The Frame property is relevant for HTML forms, but not for database forms. +
+
+ +Graphics + An image button has a Graphics property. The Graphics property specifies the graphic's path and file name that you want to have displayed on the button. If you select the graphic file with the ... button, the path and file name will be automatically included in the text box. +
+
+ +Help text + Provides the option of entering a help text that will be displayed as a tip on the control. The tip shows the text in user mode when the mouse is moved over the control. + For URL type buttons, the help text appears as the extended tip instead of the URL address entered under URL. +
+
+ +Help URL + Specifies a batch label in URL spelling which refers to a help document and which can be called with the help of the control field. The help for the control field help can be opened if the focus is positioned on the control field and the user presses F1. +
+
+ +Background color + Sets the background color of the control field.A background color is available for most control fields. If you click on Background color, a list will open which enables you to select among various colors. The "Standard" option adopts the system setting. If the desired color is not listed, click the ... button to define a color in the Color dialog. +
+
-Scrollbar -Adds the scrollbar type that you specify to a text box.Adds the scrollbar type that you specify to a text box. -
-
-Incr./decrement value -Determines intervals to add or subtract with each activation of the spin button control. -
-
-Value step -Determines spin button intervals.You can preset the value intervals for numerical and currency spin buttons. Use the up and down arrows of the spin button to increase or decrease the value. -
-
-List entries -Defines the list entries visible in the document. Open this list and type your text. Use Shift+Enter for a new line. With list and combo boxes, you can define the list entries that will be visible in the document. Open the List entries field and type your text. Please note the tips referring to the keyboard controls. -The predefined default list entry is entered into the Default selection combo box. -Note that the list entries entered here are only incorporated into the form if, on the Data tab under List Content Type, the option "Value List" is selected. -If you do not want the list entries to be written to the database or transmitted to the recipient of the Web form, but rather assigned values that are not visible in the form, you can assign the list entries to other values in a value list. The value list is determined on the Data tab. Under Type of List Contents, select the option "Value List". Then enter the values under List Contents that are to be assigned to the corresponding visible list entries of the form. For the correct assignment, the order in the value list is relevant. -For HTML documents, a list entry entered on the General tab corresponds to the HTML tag <OPTION>; an entry of the value list entered on the Data tab under List Contents corresponds to the <OPTION VALUE=...> tag. -
-
-Date max -Determines a date which can not be exceeded by another value introduced by the user.Determines a date which can not be exceeded by another value introduced by the user. -
-
-Max text length -Defines the maximum number of characters that the user can enter.For text and combo boxes, you can define the maximum number of characters that the user can enter. If this control field property is uncertain, the default setting will be zero. -If the control is linked to a database and the text length is to be accepted from the field definition of the database, you must not enter the text length here. The settings are only accepted from the database if the control property was not defined ("Not Defined" state). -
-
+ +Scrollbar + Adds the scrollbar type that you specify to a text box.Adds the scrollbar type that you specify to a text box. +
+
+ +Incr./decrement value + Determines intervals to add or subtract with each activation of the spin button control. +
+
+ +Value step + Determines spin button intervals.You can preset the value intervals for numerical and currency spin buttons. Use the up and down arrows of the spin button to increase or decrease the value. +
+
+ +List entries + Defines the list entries visible in the document. Open this list and type your text. Use Shift+Enter for a new line. With list and combo boxes, you can define the list entries that will be visible in the document. Open the List entries field and type your text. Please note the tips referring to the keyboard controls. + The predefined default list entry is entered into the Default selection combo box. + Note that the list entries entered here are only incorporated into the form if, on the Data tab under List Content Type, the option "Value List" is selected. + If you do not want the list entries to be written to the database or transmitted to the recipient of the Web form, but rather assigned values that are not visible in the form, you can assign the list entries to other values in a value list. The value list is determined on the Data tab. Under Type of List Contents, select the option "Value List". Then enter the values under List Contents that are to be assigned to the corresponding visible list entries of the form. For the correct assignment, the order in the value list is relevant. + For HTML documents, a list entry entered on the General tab corresponds to the HTML tag <OPTION>; an entry of the value list entered on the Data tab under List Contents corresponds to the <OPTION VALUE=...> tag. +
+
+ +Date max + Determines a date which can not be exceeded by another value introduced by the user.Determines a date which can not be exceeded by another value introduced by the user. +
+
+ +Max text length + Defines the maximum number of characters that the user can enter.For text and combo boxes, you can define the maximum number of characters that the user can enter. If this control field property is uncertain, the default setting will be zero. + If the control is linked to a database and the text length is to be accepted from the field definition of the database, you must not enter the text length here. The settings are only accepted from the database if the control property was not defined ("Not Defined" state). +
+
-Value max -Defines a value for the control field which can not be exceeded by another value introduced by the user.For numerical and currency fields, you can determine the maximum value that the user can enter. -
-
-Time max -Determines a time which can not be exceeded by another value introduced by the user.Determines a time which can not be exceeded by another value introduced by the user. -
-
-Multiselection -Allows you to select more than one item in a list box.Allows you to select more than one item in a list box. -
-
+ +Value max + Defines a value for the control field which can not be exceeded by another value introduced by the user.For numerical and currency fields, you can determine the maximum value that the user can enter. +
+
+ +Time max + Determines a time which can not be exceeded by another value introduced by the user.Determines a time which can not be exceeded by another value introduced by the user. +
+
+ +Multiselection + Allows you to select more than one item in a list box.Allows you to select more than one item in a list box. +
+
rich text control -controls;rich text control + controls;rich text control -Text typeUFI: now renamed to Text Type, see #i24386#UFI: see dba spec prop_browser_enhancements.sxw -Allows you to use line breaks and formatting in a control field, such as a text box or label. To manually enter a line break, press the Enter key. Select "Multi-line with formatting" to enter formatted text. -If you select the text type "Multi-line with formatting", you cannot bind this control to a database field. -This control is named "Multiline input" for a text column inside a table control. -
-
-Word breakUFI: see dba spec form_controls_interop_1.sxw -Displays text on more than one line. Allows you to use line breaks in a text box, so that you can enter more than one line of text. To manually enter a line break, press the Enter key. -
-
-ToggleUFI: see dba spec form_controls_interop_1.sxw -Specifies if a Push Button behaves as a Toggle Button. If you set Toggle to "Yes", you can switch between the "selected" and "not selected" control states when you click the button or press the spacebar while the the control has the focus. A button in the "selected" state appears "pressed in". -
-
-Take Focus on ClickUFI: see dba spec form_controls_interop_1.sxw -If you set this option to "Yes", the Push Button receives the focus when you click the button. -
-
-Hide selectionUFI: see dba spec form_controls_interop_1.sxw -Specifies whether a text selection on a control remains selected when a the focus is no longer on a control. If you set Hide selection to "No", the selected text remains selected when the focus is no longer on the control that contains the text. -
-
-StyleUFI: see dba spec form_controls_interop_1.sxw -Specifies whether Check boxes and Option buttons are displayed in a 3D look (default) or a flat look. -
-
-Border colorUFI: see dba spec form_controls_interop_1.sxw -Specifies the border color for controls that have the Border property set to "flat". -
-
-Symbol color -Specifies the color for symbols on controls, for example the arrows on a scrollbar. -
-
-Date min -Determines the earliest date that a user can enter.Determines the earliest date that a user can enter. -
-
+ +Text typeUFI: now renamed to Text Type, see #i24386#UFI: see dba spec prop_browser_enhancements.sxw + Allows you to use line breaks and formatting in a control field, such as a text box or label. To manually enter a line break, press the Enter key. Select "Multi-line with formatting" to enter formatted text. + If you select the text type "Multi-line with formatting", you cannot bind this control to a database field. + This control is named "Multiline input" for a text column inside a table control. +
+
+ +Word breakUFI: see dba spec form_controls_interop_1.sxw + Displays text on more than one line. Allows you to use line breaks in a text box, so that you can enter more than one line of text. To manually enter a line break, press the Enter key. +
+
+ +ToggleUFI: see dba spec form_controls_interop_1.sxw + Specifies if a Push Button behaves as a Toggle Button. If you set Toggle to "Yes", you can switch between the "selected" and "not selected" control states when you click the button or press the spacebar while the the control has the focus. A button in the "selected" state appears "pressed in". +
+
+ +Take Focus on ClickUFI: see dba spec form_controls_interop_1.sxw + If you set this option to "Yes", the Push Button receives the focus when you click the button. +
+
+ +Hide selectionUFI: see dba spec form_controls_interop_1.sxw + Specifies whether a text selection on a control remains selected when a the focus is no longer on a control. If you set Hide selection to "No", the selected text remains selected when the focus is no longer on the control that contains the text. +
+
+ +StyleUFI: see dba spec form_controls_interop_1.sxw + Specifies whether Check boxes and Option buttons are displayed in a 3D look (default) or a flat look. +
+
+ +Border colorUFI: see dba spec form_controls_interop_1.sxw + Specifies the border color for controls that have the Border property set to "flat". +
+
+ +Symbol color + Specifies the color for symbols on controls, for example the arrows on a scrollbar. +
+
+ +Date min + Determines the earliest date that a user can enter.Determines the earliest date that a user can enter. +
+
-Value min -You can determine here a value for the control field to prevent the user from entering a smaller value.For numerical and currency fields you can determine a minimum value to prevent the user from entering a smaller value. -
-
-Time min -Determines the minimum time that a user can enter.Determines the minimum time that a user can enter. -
-
-Decimal accuracy -Determines the number of digits displayed to the right of the decimal point.With numerical and currency fields you can determine the number of digits displayed to the right of the decimal point. -
-
-Name -On the Properties tab page, this option specifies the name for the control field. On the Form Properties tab page, this option specifies the name for the form.Each control field and each form has a Name property through which it can be identified. The name will appear in the Form Navigator and, using the name, the control field can be referred to from a macro. The default settings already specify a name which is constructed from using the field's label and number. -If you work with macros, make sure that the names of the controls are unique. + +Value min + You can determine here a value for the control field to prevent the user from entering a smaller value.For numerical and currency fields you can determine a minimum value to prevent the user from entering a smaller value. +
+
+ +Time min + Determines the minimum time that a user can enter.Determines the minimum time that a user can enter. +
+
+ +Decimal accuracy + Determines the number of digits displayed to the right of the decimal point.With numerical and currency fields you can determine the number of digits displayed to the right of the decimal point. +
+
+ +Name + On the Properties tab page, this option specifies the name for the control field. On the Form Properties tab page, this option specifies the name for the form.Each control field and each form has a Name property through which it can be identified. The name will appear in the Form Navigator and, using the name, the control field can be referred to from a macro. The default settings already specify a name which is constructed from using the field's label and number. + If you work with macros, make sure that the names of the controls are unique. controls; grouping -groups;of controls -forms; grouping controls -mw changed "grouping;" to "groups;"The name is also used to group different controls that belong together functionally, such as radio buttons. To do so, give the same name to all members of the group: controls with identical names form a group. Grouped controls can be represented visually by using a Group Box. -
-
-Navigation bar -Specifies whether to display the navigation bar on the lower border of the table control.Specifies whether to display the navigation bar on the lower border of table controls. -
-
-Read-only -Determines if the control is read-only (Yes) or if it can be edited (No).The Read-only property can be assigned to all controls in which the user can enter text. If you assign the read-only property to an image field which uses graphics from a database, the user will not be able to insert new graphics into the database. -
-
-Border -Determines if the field's border should be displayed "Without frame", with a "3-D look" or "Flat".With control fields that have a frame, you can determine the border display on the form using the Border property. You can select among the "Without frame", "3-D look" or "Flat" options. -
-
-Tab order -The Tab order property determines the order in which the controls are focused in the form when you press the Tab key. In a form that contains more than one control, the focus moves to the next control when you press the Tab key. You can specify the order in which the focus changes with an index under Tab order. -The Tab order property is not available to Hidden Controls. If you want, you can also set this property for image buttons and image controls, so that you can select these controls with the Tab key. -When creating a form, an index is automatically assigned to the control fields that are added to this form; every control field added is assigned an index increased by 1. If you change the index of a control, the indices of the other controls are updated automatically. Elements that cannot be focused (Tabstop = No) are also assigned a value. However, these controls are skipped when using the Tab key. -You can also easily define the indices of the different controls in the Tab Order dialog. -
-
-Default status -Specifies whether an option or a check box is selected by default. -For a reset type button, you can define the status of the control if the reset button is activated by the user. -For grouped option fields, the status of the group corresponding to the default setting is defined by the Default Status property.UFI: what does this mean? Cannot understand that sentence. -
-
-Default selection -Specifies the list box entry to mark as the default entry.Specifies the list box entry to mark as the default entry. -For a Reset type button, the Default selection entry defines the status of the list box if the reset button is activated by the user. -For a List box that contains a value list, you can click the ... button to open the Default selection dialog. -In the Default selection dialog, select the entries that you want to mark as selected when you open the form that contains the list box. -
-
+ groups;of controls + forms; grouping controls +mw changed "grouping;" to "groups;" +The name is also used to group different controls that belong together functionally, such as radio buttons. To do so, give the same name to all members of the group: controls with identical names form a group. Grouped controls can be represented visually by using a Group Box. +
+
+ +Navigation bar + Specifies whether to display the navigation bar on the lower border of the table control.Specifies whether to display the navigation bar on the lower border of table controls. +
+
+ +Read-only + Determines if the control is read-only (Yes) or if it can be edited (No).The Read-only property can be assigned to all controls in which the user can enter text. If you assign the read-only property to an image field which uses graphics from a database, the user will not be able to insert new graphics into the database. +
+
+ +Border + Determines if the field's border should be displayed "Without frame", with a "3-D look" or "Flat".With control fields that have a frame, you can determine the border display on the form using the Border property. You can select among the "Without frame", "3-D look" or "Flat" options. +
+
+ +Tab order + The Tab order property determines the order in which the controls are focused in the form when you press the Tab key. In a form that contains more than one control, the focus moves to the next control when you press the Tab key. You can specify the order in which the focus changes with an index under Tab order. + The Tab order property is not available to Hidden Controls. If you want, you can also set this property for image buttons and image controls, so that you can select these controls with the Tab key. + When creating a form, an index is automatically assigned to the control fields that are added to this form; every control field added is assigned an index increased by 1. If you change the index of a control, the indices of the other controls are updated automatically. Elements that cannot be focused (Tabstop = No) are also assigned a value. However, these controls are skipped when using the Tab key. + You can also easily define the indices of the different controls in the Tab Order dialog. +
+
+ +Mouse wheel scroll + Sets whether the value changes when the user scrolls a mouse wheel. Never: No change of the value. When focused: (default) The value changes when the control has the focus and the wheel is pointing at the control and gets scrolled. Always: The value changes when the wheel is pointing at the control and gets scrolled, no matter which control has the focus. +
+
+ +Default status + Specifies whether an option or a check box is selected by default. + For a reset type button, you can define the status of the control if the reset button is activated by the user. + For grouped option fields, the status of the group corresponding to the default setting is defined by the Default Status property.UFI: what does this mean? Cannot understand that sentence. +
+
+ +Default selection + Specifies the list box entry to mark as the default entry.Specifies the list box entry to mark as the default entry. + For a Reset type button, the Default selection entry defines the status of the list box if the reset button is activated by the user. + For a List box that contains a value list, you can click the ... button to open the Default selection dialog. + In the Default selection dialog, select the entries that you want to mark as selected when you open the form that contains the list box. +
+
-Default value -Sets the default value for the control field. For example, the default value will be entered when a form is opened. -For a Reset type button, the Default value entry defines the status of the control if the reset button is activated by the user. -
-
-Default scroll value -Sets the default value for the scrollbar. -
-
-Scroll value max. -Specify the maximum value of a scrollbar control. -
-
-Scroll value min. -Specify the minimum value of a scrollbar control. -
-
-Small change -Specify the value to add or subtract when the user clicks the arrow icon on the scrollbar. -
-
-Large change -Specify the value to add or subtract when the user clicks next to the slider on the scrollbar. -
-
-Default time -Sets the default time. -If you do not enter a value, the current time is inserted. -
-
-Default date -Sets the default date. -If you do not enter a value, the current date is inserted. -
-
-Default text -Sets the default text for a text box or a combo box. -
-
-Default button -The Default button property specifies that the corresponding button will be operated when you press the Return key.The Default button property specifies that the corresponding button will be operated when you press the Return key. If you open the dialog or form and do not carry out any further action, the button with this property is the default button. -This property should be assigned only to a single button within the document. -When using Web page forms, you might come across this property in search masks. These are edit masks that contain a text field and a Submit type button. The search term is entered in the text field and the search is started by activating the button. If the button is defined as the default button, however, simply hit Enter after entering the search term in order to start the search. -
-
-Prefix symbol -Determines if the currency symbol is displayed before or after the number when using currency fields. The default setting is currency symbols are not prefixed. -
-
-Tabstop -The Tabstop property determines if a control field can be selected with the tab key. The following options are available:UFI: Default entry row deleted from table - - - -No - - -When using the tab key, focusing skips the control. - - - - -Yes - - -The control can be selected with the Tab key. - - -
-
-
-Thousands separator -Inserts a thousands separator.With numerical and currency fields you can determine whether thousands separators are used. -
-
-Label -The Label property sets the label of the control field that is displayed in the form.The Label property sets the label of the control field that is displayed in the form. This property determines the visible label or the column header of the data field in table control forms. -When you create a new control, the description predefined in the Name property is used as the default for labeling the control. The label consists of the control field name and an integer numbering the control (for example, CommandButton1). With the Title property, you can assign another description to the control so that the label reflects the function of the control. Change this entry in order to assign an expressive label to the control that is visible to the user. + +Default value + Sets the default value for the control field. For example, the default value will be entered when a form is opened. + For a Reset type button, the Default value entry defines the status of the control if the reset button is activated by the user. +
+
+ +Default scroll value + Sets the default value for the scrollbar. +
+
+ +Scroll value max. + Specify the maximum value of a scrollbar control. +
+
+ +Scroll value min. + Specify the minimum value of a scrollbar control. +
+
+ +Small change + Specify the value to add or subtract when the user clicks the arrow icon on the scrollbar. +
+
+ +Large change + Specify the value to add or subtract when the user clicks next to the slider on the scrollbar. +
+
+ +Default time + Sets the default time. + If you do not enter a value, the current time is inserted. +
+
+ +Default date + Sets the default date. + If you do not enter a value, the current date is inserted. +
+
+ +Default text + Sets the default text for a text box or a combo box. +
+
+ +Default button + The Default button property specifies that the corresponding button will be operated when you press the Return key.The Default button property specifies that the corresponding button will be operated when you press the Return key. If you open the dialog or form and do not carry out any further action, the button with this property is the default button. + This property should be assigned only to a single button within the document. + When using Web page forms, you might come across this property in search masks. These are edit masks that contain a text field and a Submit type button. The search term is entered in the text field and the search is started by activating the button. If the button is defined as the default button, however, simply hit Enter after entering the search term in order to start the search. +
+
+ +Prefix symbol + Determines if the currency symbol is displayed before or after the number when using currency fields. The default setting is currency symbols are not prefixed. +
+
+ +Tabstop + The Tabstop property determines if a control field can be selected with the tab key. The following options are available:UFI: Default entry row deleted from table + + + + No + + + When using the tab key, focusing skips the control. + + + + + Yes + + + The control can be selected with the Tab key. + + +
+ +
+
+ +Thousands separator + Inserts a thousands separator.With numerical and currency fields you can determine whether thousands separators are used. +
+
+ +Label + The Label property sets the label of the control field that is displayed in the form.The Label property sets the label of the control field that is displayed in the form. This property determines the visible label or the column header of the data field in table control forms. + When you create a new control, the description predefined in the Name property is used as the default for labeling the control. The label consists of the control field name and an integer numbering the control (for example, CommandButton1). With the Title property, you can assign another description to the control so that the label reflects the function of the control. Change this entry in order to assign an expressive label to the control that is visible to the user. multi-line titles in forms -names; multi-line titles -controls; multi-line titles + names; multi-line titles + controls; multi-line titles -To create a multi-line title, open the combo box using the arrow button. You can enter a line break by pressing Shift+CommandCtrl+Enter. -The Title property is only used for labeling a form element in the interface visible to the user. If you work with macros, note that at runtime, a control is always addressed through the Name property. -
-
-URL -Specifies the URL address that opens when you click an "Open document / web page" button.Enter the URL address for a Open document or web page button type in the URL box. The address opens when you click the button. -If you move the mouse over the button in User mode, the URL appears as the extended tip, provided that no other Help text was entered. -
-
-Currency symbol -You can enter a character or a string for the currency symbol.In a currency field, you can pre-define the currency symbol by entering the character or string in the Currency symbol property. -
-
-Value -You can enter the data that is inherited by the hidden control.In a hidden control, under Value, you can enter the data which is inherited by the hidden control. This data will be transferred when sending the form. -
-
-Password characters -If the text box is used as a password input, enter the ASCII-code of the display character. This character is displayed instead of the characters typed by the user for the password.If the user enters a password, you can determine the characters that will be displayed instead of the characters typed by the user. Under Password character, enter the ASCII code of the desired character. You can use the values from 0 to 255. -The characters and their ASCII codes can be seen in the Special Characters dialog (Insert - Special Character). -
-
-Literal mask -Defines the literal mask. The literal mask contains the initial values and is always visible after downloading a form.With masked fields you can specify a literal mask. A literal mask contains the initial values of a form, and is always visible after downloading a form. Using a character code for the Edit mask, you can determine the entries that the user can type into the masked field. -The length of the literal mask should always correspond to the length of the edit mask. If this is not the case, the edit mask is either cut off or filled with blanks up to the length of the edit mask. -
-
-FontUFI: dba.features "Character set property renamed to Font" -Select the font for the text that is in the control field.For control fields which have visible text or titles, select the display font that you want to use. To open the Font dialog, click the ... button. The selected font is used in control fields names and to display data in table control fields. -
-
-Row height -Specifies the row height of a table control field.In table controls, enter a value for the row height. If you want, you can enter a value followed by valid measurement unit, for example, 2 cm. -
-
-Text lines end with -For text fields, select the line end code to be used when writing text into a database column.UFI: spec dba-features: "form text fields: New property Text lines end with" -
-
-Time format -You can define the desired format for the time display.You can define the desired format for the time display. -
-
-Help text -Specifies additional information or a descriptive text for the control field.In each control field you can specify additional information or a descriptive text for the control field. This property helps the programmer to save additional information that can be used in the program code. This field can be used, for example, for variables or other evaluation parameters. -
-
-Formatting -Specifies the format code for the control. Click the ... button to select the format code. -
-
-Scale -Resizes the image to fit the size of the control. -
-
-Acting on a record -Specifies to show or hide the action items in a selected Navigation Bar control. Action items are the following: Save record, Undo, New record, Delete record, Refresh. -
-
-Positioning -Specifies to show or hide the positioning items in a selected Navigation Bar control. Positioning items are the following: Record label, Record position, Record count label, Record count. -
-
-Navigation -Specifies to show or hide the navigation items in a selected Navigation Bar control. Navigation items are the following: First record, Previous record, Next record, Last record. -
-
-Filtering / Sorting -Specifies to show or hide the filtering and sorting items in a selected Navigation Bar control. Filtering and sorting items are the following: Sort ascending, Sort descending, Sort, Automatic filter, Default filter, Apply filter, Remove filter/sort. -
-
-Icon Size -Specifies whether the icons in a selected Navigation Bar should be small or large. -
-
-Visible size -Specifies the size of scrollbar thumb in "value units". A value of ("Scroll value max." minus "Scroll value min." ) / 2 would result in a thumb which occupies half of the background area. -If set to 0, then the thumb's width will equal its height. -
-
-Orientation -Specifies the horizontal or vertical orientation for a scrollbar or spin button. -
- - +To create a multi-line title, open the combo box using the arrow button. You can enter a line break by pressing Shift+Command +Ctrl+Enter. + The Title property is only used for labeling a form element in the interface visible to the user. If you work with macros, note that at runtime, a control is always addressed through the Name property. +
+
+ +URL + Specifies the URL address that opens when you click an "Open document / web page" button.Enter the URL address for a Open document or web page button type in the URL box. The address opens when you click the button. + If you move the mouse over the button in User mode, the URL appears as the extended tip, provided that no other Help text was entered. +
+
+ +Currency symbol + You can enter a character or a string for the currency symbol.In a currency field, you can pre-define the currency symbol by entering the character or string in the Currency symbol property. +
+
+ +Value + You can enter the data that is inherited by the hidden control.In a hidden control, under Value, you can enter the data which is inherited by the hidden control. This data will be transferred when sending the form. +
+
+ +Password characters + If the text box is used as a password input, enter the ASCII-code of the display character. This character is displayed instead of the characters typed by the user for the password.If the user enters a password, you can determine the characters that will be displayed instead of the characters typed by the user. Under Password character, enter the ASCII code of the desired character. You can use the values from 0 to 255. + The characters and their ASCII codes can be seen in the Special Characters dialog (Insert - Special Character). +
+
+ +Literal mask + Defines the literal mask. The literal mask contains the initial values and is always visible after downloading a form.With masked fields you can specify a literal mask. A literal mask contains the initial values of a form, and is always visible after downloading a form. Using a character code for the Edit mask, you can determine the entries that the user can type into the masked field. + The length of the literal mask should always correspond to the length of the edit mask. If this is not the case, the edit mask is either cut off or filled with blanks up to the length of the edit mask. +
+
+ +FontUFI: dba.features "Character set property renamed to Font" + Select the font for the text that is in the control field.For control fields which have visible text or titles, select the display font that you want to use. To open the Font dialog, click the ... button. The selected font is used in control fields names and to display data in table control fields. +
+
+ +Row height + Specifies the row height of a table control field.In table controls, enter a value for the row height. If you want, you can enter a value followed by valid measurement unit, for example, 2 cm. +
+
+ +Text lines end with + For text fields, select the line end code to be used when writing text into a database column.UFI: spec dba-features: "form text fields: New property Text lines end with" +
+
+ +Time format + You can define the desired format for the time display.You can define the desired format for the time display. +
+
+ +Help text + Specifies additional information or a descriptive text for the control field.In each control field you can specify additional information or a descriptive text for the control field. This property helps the programmer to save additional information that can be used in the program code. This field can be used, for example, for variables or other evaluation parameters. +
+
+ +Formatting + Specifies the format code for the control. Click the ... button to select the format code. +
+
+ +Scale + Resizes the image to fit the size of the control. +
+
+ +Acting on a record + Specifies to show or hide the action items in a selected Navigation Bar control. Action items are the following: Save record, Undo, New record, Delete record, Refresh. +
+
+ +Positioning + Specifies to show or hide the positioning items in a selected Navigation Bar control. Positioning items are the following: Record label, Record position, Record count label, Record count. +
+
+ +Navigation + Specifies to show or hide the navigation items in a selected Navigation Bar control. Navigation items are the following: First record, Previous record, Next record, Last record. +
+
+ +Filtering / Sorting + Specifies to show or hide the filtering and sorting items in a selected Navigation Bar control. Filtering and sorting items are the following: Sort ascending, Sort descending, Sort, Automatic filter, Default filter, Apply filter, Remove filter/sort. +
+
+ +Icon Size + Specifies whether the icons in a selected Navigation Bar should be small or large. +
+
+ +Visible + Defines whether the control will be visible in live mode. In design mode, the control is always visible. + Note that if this property is set to "Yes" (the default), this does not necessarily mean the control will really appear on the screen. Additional constraints are applied when calculating a control's effective visibility. For instance, a control placed in a hidden section in Writer will never be visible at all, until at least the section itself becomes visible. + If the property is set to "No", then the control will always be hidden in live mode. + Older OpenOffice.org versions up to 3.1 will silently ignore this property when reading documents which make use of it. +
+
+ +Visible size + Specifies the size of scrollbar thumb in "value units". A value of ("Scroll value max." minus "Scroll value min." ) / 2 would result in a thumb which occupies half of the background area. + If set to 0, then the thumb's width will equal its height. +
+
+ +Orientation + Specifies the horizontal or vertical orientation for a scrollbar or spin button. +
+ + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170103.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170103.xhp index c42ce96d80..5c596f944e 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170103.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170103.xhp @@ -1,9 +1,8 @@ - - - + + - - - + + - -Events -/text/shared/02/01170103.xhp - - - -
+ + Events + /text/shared/02/01170103.xhp + + + +
controls; events -events; controls -macros; assigning to events in forms + events; controls + macros; assigning to events in forms -Events -On the Events tab page you can link macros to events that occur in a form's control fields. -
-When the event occurs, the linked macro will be called. To assign a macro to an event, press the ... button. An Assign Macro +Events + On the Events tab page you can link macros to events that occur in a form's control fields. +
+ When the event occurs, the linked macro will be called. To assign a macro to an event, press the ... button. An Assign Macro dialog opens. -
- -
-Depending on the control, different events are available. Only the available events for the selected control and context are listed on the Events tab page. The following events are defined: -Before commencing -This event takes place before an action is triggered by clicking the control. For example, clicking a "Submit" button initiates a send action; however, the actual "send" process is started only when the When initiating event occurs. The Before commencing event allows you to kill the process. If the linked method sends back FALSE, When initiating will not be executed. -When initiating -The When initiating event occurs when an action is started. For example, if you have a "Submit" button in your form, the send process represents the action to be initiated. -Changed -The Changed event takes place when the control loses the focus and the content of the control has changed since it lost the focus. -Text modified -The Text modified event takes place if you enter or modify a text in an input field. -Item status changed -The Item status changed event takes place if the status of the control field has changed.The Item status changed event takes place if he status of the control field has changed. -When receiving focus -The When receiving focus event takes place if a control field receives the focus. -When losing focus -The When losing focus event takes place if a control field looses the focus. -Key pressed -The Key pressed event occurs when the user presses any key while the control has the focus. This event may be linked to a macro for checking entries. -Key released -The Key released event occurs when the user releases any key while the control has the focus. -Mouse inside -The Mouse inside event takes place if the mouse is inside the control field. -Mouse moved while key pressed -The Mouse moved while key pressed event takes place when the mouse is dragged while a key is pressed. An example is when, during drag-and-drop, an additional key determines the mode (move or copy). -Mouse moved -The Mouse moved event occurs if the mouse moves over the control. -Mouse button pressed -The Mouse button pressed event occurs if the mouse button is pressed while the mouse pointer is on the control. -Note that this event is also used for notifying requests for a popup context menu on the control. If you are using this event by a program macro, you find more information in the "StarOffice 8 Programming Guide for BASIC".UFI: see #i40558# -Mouse button released -The Mouse button released event occurs if the mouse button is released while the mouse pointer is on the control. -Mouse outside -The Mouse outside event takes place when the mouse is outside the control field. - - - +
+ +
+ Depending on the control, different events are available. Only the available events for the selected control and context are listed on the Events tab page. The following events are defined: + +Approve actionrenamed from Before commencing, issue 97356 + This event takes place before an action is triggered by clicking the control. For example, clicking a "Submit" button initiates a send action; however, the actual "send" process is started only when the When initiating event occurs. The Approve action event allows you to kill the process. If the linked method sends back FALSE, When initiating will not be executed. + +Execute actionrenamed from When initiated, issue 97356 + The Execute action event occurs when an action is started. For example, if you have a "Submit" button in your form, the send process represents the action to be initiated. + +Changed + The Changed event takes place when the control loses the focus and the content of the control has changed since it lost the focus. + +Text modified + The Text modified event takes place if you enter or modify a text in an input field. + +Item status changed + The Item status changed event takes place if the status of the control field has changed.The Item status changed event takes place if he status of the control field has changed. + +When receiving focus + The When receiving focus event takes place if a control field receives the focus. + +When losing focus + The When losing focus event takes place if a control field looses the focus. + +Key pressed + The Key pressed event occurs when the user presses any key while the control has the focus. This event may be linked to a macro for checking entries. + +Key released + The Key released event occurs when the user releases any key while the control has the focus. + +Mouse inside + The Mouse inside event takes place if the mouse is inside the control field. + +Mouse moved while key pressed + The Mouse moved while key pressed event takes place when the mouse is dragged while a key is pressed. An example is when, during drag-and-drop, an additional key determines the mode (move or copy). + +Mouse moved + The Mouse moved event occurs if the mouse moves over the control. + +Mouse button pressed + The Mouse button pressed event occurs if the mouse button is pressed while the mouse pointer is on the control. + Note that this event is also used for notifying requests for a popup context menu on the control. If you are using this event by a program macro, you find more information in the "StarOffice 8 Programming Guide for BASIC".UFI: see #i40558# + +Mouse button released + The Mouse button released event occurs if the mouse button is released while the mouse pointer is on the control. + +Mouse outside + The Mouse outside event takes place when the mouse is outside the control field. + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170202.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170202.xhp index fc0441e815..09aca8fbb4 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170202.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170202.xhp @@ -1,8 +1,8 @@ - - + + + - - -Events -/text/shared/02/01170202.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - -
+ + Events + /text/shared/02/01170202.xhp + + + +
forms; events -events;in forms + events;in forms -Events -The Events tab page, allows you to assign a macro to certain events which occur in a form. -
-
- -
-To link an event with a macro, first write a macro that contains all the commands to be executed when the event happens. Then assign this macro to the respective event by clicking the ... button beside the corresponding event. The Assign Macro dialog opens, where you can select the macro. -The following actions can be configured individually, meaning that you can use your own dialogs to depict an action: - - -Displaying an error message, - - - - -Confirming a delete process (for data records), - - - - -Querying parameters, - - - - -Checking input when saving a data record. - - -For example, you can issue a "confirm deletion" request such as "Really delete customer xyz?" when deleting a data record. -The following lists and describes all events in a form that can be linked to a macro: +Events + The Events tab page, allows you to assign a macro to certain events which occur in a form. +
+
+ +
+ To link an event with a macro, first write a macro that contains all the commands to be executed when the event happens. Then assign this macro to the respective event by clicking the ... button beside the corresponding event. The Assign Macro dialog opens, where you can select the macro. + The following actions can be configured individually, meaning that you can use your own dialogs to depict an action: + + + Displaying an error message, + + + + + Confirming a delete process (for data records), + + + + + Querying parameters, + + + + + Checking input when saving a data record. + + + For example, you can issue a "confirm deletion" request such as "Really delete customer xyz?" when deleting a data record. + The events that are shown in the Events dialog cannot be edited directly. You can delete an event from the list by pressing the Del key. + The following lists and describes all events in a form that can be linked to a macro: -
UFI: removed help id -Before update -The Before update event occurs before the control content changed by the user is written into the data source. The linked macro can, for example, prevent this action by returning "FALSE". +
+ Before update + The Before update event occurs before the control content changed by the user is written into the data source. The linked macro can, for example, prevent this action by returning "FALSE". -After update -The After update event occurs after the control content changed by the user has been written into the data source. +After update + The After update event occurs after the control content changed by the user has been written into the data source. -Prior to reset -The Prior to reset event occurs before a form is reset. The linked macro can, for example, prevent this action by returning "FALSE". -A form is reset if one of the following conditions is met: - - -The user presses an (HTML) button that is defined as a reset button. - - -A new and empty record is created in a form that is linked to a data source. For example, in the last record, the Next Record button may be pressed. - - +Prior to reset + The Prior to reset event occurs before a form is reset. The linked macro can, for example, prevent this action by returning "FALSE". + A form is reset if one of the following conditions is met: + + + The user presses an (HTML) button that is defined as a reset button. + + + A new and empty record is created in a form that is linked to a data source. For example, in the last record, the Next Record button may be pressed. + + -After resetting -The After resetting event occurs after a form has been reset. -
-
+After resetting + The After resetting event occurs after a form has been reset. +
+
-Before submitting -The Before submitting event occurs before the form data is sent. -
-
+Before submitting + The Before submitting event occurs before the form data is sent. +
+
-When loading -The When loading event occurs directly after the form has been loaded. -
-
+When loading + The When loading event occurs directly after the form has been loaded. +
+
-Before reloading -The Before reloading event occurs before the form is reloaded. The data content has not yet been refreshed. -
-
+Before reloading + The Before reloading event occurs before the form is reloaded. The data content has not yet been refreshed. +
+
-When reloading -The When reloading event occurs directly after the form has been reloaded. The data content has already been refreshed. -
-
+When reloading + The When reloading event occurs directly after the form has been reloaded. The data content has already been refreshed. +
+
-Before unloading -The Before unloading event occurs before the form is unloaded; that is, separated from its data source. -
-
+Before unloading + The Before unloading event occurs before the form is unloaded; that is, separated from its data source. +
+
-When unloading -The When unloading event occurs directly after the form has been unloaded; that is, separated from its data source. -
-
+When unloading + The When unloading event occurs directly after the form has been unloaded; that is, separated from its data source. +
+
-Confirm deletion -The Confirm deletion event occurs as soon as data has been deleted from the form. For example, the linked macro can request confirmation in a dialog. -
-
+Confirm deletion + The Confirm deletion event occurs as soon as data has been deleted from the form. For example, the linked macro can request confirmation in a dialog. +
+
-Before record action -The Before record action event occurs before the current record is changed. For example, the linked macro can request confirmation in a dialog. -
-
+Before record action + The Before record action event occurs before the current record is changed. For example, the linked macro can request confirmation in a dialog. +
+
-After record action -The After record action event occurs directly after the current record has been changed. -
-
+After record action + The After record action event occurs directly after the current record has been changed. +
+
-Before record change -The Before record change event occurs before the current record pointer is changed.. For example, the linked macro can prevent this action by returning "FALSE". -
-
+Before record change + The Before record change event occurs before the current record pointer is changed.. For example, the linked macro can prevent this action by returning "FALSE". +
+
-After record change -The After record change event occurs directly after the current record pointer has been changed.. -
-
+After record change + The After record change event occurs directly after the current record pointer has been changed.. +
+
-Fill parameters -The Fill parameters event occurs when the form to be loaded has parameters that must be filled out. For example, the data source of the form can be the following SQL command: -SELECT * FROM address WHERE name=:name -Here :name is a parameter that must be filled out when loading. The parameter is automatically filled out from the parent form if possible. If the parameter cannot be filled out, this event is called and a linked macro can fill out the parameter. -
-
+Fill parameters + The Fill parameters event occurs when the form to be loaded has parameters that must be filled out. For example, the data source of the form can be the following SQL command: + SELECT * FROM address WHERE name=:name + Here :name is a parameter that must be filled out when loading. The parameter is automatically filled out from the parent form if possible. If the parameter cannot be filled out, this event is called and a linked macro can fill out the parameter. +
+
-Error occurred -The Error occurred event is activated if an error occurs when accessing the data source. This applies to forms, list boxes and combo boxes. -
+Error occurred + The Error occurred event is activated if an error occurs when accessing the data source. This applies to forms, list boxes and combo boxes. +
- + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12090100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12090100.xhp index 0575be96c8..9b6af4260e 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12090100.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12090100.xhp @@ -1,7 +1,8 @@ - - - + ************************************************************************ + --> + - - -Filter -/text/shared/02/12090100.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - + + Standard Filter + /text/shared/02/12090100.xhp + + + -Filter -Specifies the logical conditions to filter your table data. This dialog is called Standard Filter in Spreadsheet documents and Filter in database tables or database forms. The Filter dialog does not contain the More button. -
- -
+Standard Filter + Specifies the logical conditions to filter your table data. This dialog is available for spreadsheet documents, database tables and database forms. The dialog for databases does not contain the More Options button. +
+ +
- - - + + + -Filter criteria -You can define a filter by indicating the type of line, the name of the field, a logical condition and a value or a combination of arguments. +Filter criteria + You can define a filter by indicating the type of line, the name of the field, a logical condition and a value or a combination of arguments. -Operator -For the following arguments, you can choose between the logical operators AND / OR. +Operator + For the following arguments, you can choose between the logical operators AND / OR. -Field name -Specifies the field names from the current table to set them in the argument. You will see the column identifiers if no text is available for the field names. +Field name + Specifies the field names from the current table to set them in the argument. You will see the column identifiers if no text is available for the field names. -Condition -Specifies the comparative operators through which the entries in the Field name and Value fields can be linked. +Condition + Specifies the comparative operators through which the entries in the Field name and Value fields can be linked. -Value -Specifies a value to filter the field. -The Value list box contains all possible values for the specified Field name . Choose the value to be used in the filter. You can also choose the - empty - or -not empty - entries.. -If you use the filter function in database tables or forms, then type the value in the Value text box to be used for filtering. +Value + Specifies a value to filter the field. + The Value list box contains all possible values for the specified Field name . Choose the value to be used in the filter. You can also choose the - empty - or -not empty - entries.. + If you use the filter function in database tables or forms, then type the value in the Value text box to be used for filtering. -The Filter dialog does not contain the Options button. -More>> - +More Options + - + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12100200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12100200.xhp index 3d3f2d929c..8853dde826 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12100200.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12100200.xhp @@ -61,46 +61,46 @@ When searching a table, the data fields of the current table are searched. When searching in a form, the data fields of the table linked with the form are searched. The search described here is carried out by %PRODUCTNAME. If you want to use the SQL server to search in a database, then you should use the Form-based Filters icon on the Form Bar. The search function is also available for table controls. When calling the search function from a table control, you can search each column of the table control corresponding to the database columns of the linked database table. - Search for Specifies the type of search. -Text: +Text: Enter the search term in the box or select it from the list. The text under the cursor is already copied into the Text combo box. Note that while running a search in a form, tabs and line breaks cannot be processed. Your search terms will be saved as long as the table or the formula document is open. If you are running more than one search and you would like to repeat the search term, you can select a previously used search term from the combo box. -Field content is NULL Specifies that fields will be found that contain no data. -Field content is not NULL Specifies that fields will be found that contain data. - Where to search + Where to search Specifies the fields for the search. -Form Specifies the logical form in which you want the search to take place. The Form combo box is only visible if the current document is a form document with more than one logical form. It does not appear during a search in tables or queries. Form documents may contain multiple logical forms. These are individual form components, which are each linked to a table. The Form combo box contains the names of all logical forms for which controls exist. -All Fields Searches through all fields. If you are running a search in a table, all fields in the table will be searched. If you are running a search in a form, all fields of the logical form (entered under Form) will be searched. If you are running a search in a table control field, all columns that are linked to a valid database table field will be searched. Note that the fields of the current logical form do not have to be identical to the fields of the form document. If the form document contains fields that point to multiple data sources (that is, multiple logical forms), the All Fields option will only search for the fields linked to data sources in the form document. -Single field Searches through a specified data field. - Settings Defines settings to control the search. -Position Specifies the relationship of the search term and the field contents. The following options are available: @@ -140,7 +140,7 @@ If the Wildcard expression check box is marked, this function is not available. -Apply field format Specifies that all field formats are considered when searching in the current document. Field formats are all visible formats that are created using the following possibilities: @@ -226,19 +226,19 @@ If you are searching the values of check boxes, and Apply field format is on, then you will receive a "1" for marked check boxes, a "0" for unmarked check boxes, and an empty string for undefined (tristate) check boxes. If the search has been carried out with Apply field format set to off, you will see the language-dependent default values "TRUE" or "FALSE". If you use Apply field format when searching in list boxes, you find the text displayed in list boxes. If you do not use Apply field format, you will find the contents corresponding to the standard field format. -Match case Specifies that upper and lower case are taken into consideration during the search. -Search backwards Specifies that the search process will run in reverse direction, from the last to the first record. -From top / From bottom Restarts the search. A forward search restarts with the first record. A backwards search restarts with the last record. -Wildcard expression Allows a search with a * or ? wildcard. You can use the following wildcards:
@@ -281,7 +281,7 @@ If you want to search for the actual characters ? or *, preface them with a backslash: "\?" or "\*". However, this is only necessary when Wildcard expression is enabled. When the option is not enabled, the wildcard characters are processed like normal characters. -Regular expression Searches with regular expressions. The same regular expressions that are supported here are also supported in the %PRODUCTNAMEFind & Replace dialog. Searching with regular expressions offers more options than searching with wildcard expressions. If you search with regular expressions, the following characters correspond to those used in searches with wildcards: @@ -318,16 +318,16 @@ - State The State line shows the records returned by the search. If the search reaches the end (or the beginning) of a table, the search is automatically continued at the other end. In very large databases, finding the record in reverse search order can take some time. In this case, the status bar informs you that the records are still being counted. -Search / Cancel Starts or cancels the search. If the search is successfully completed, the corresponding field in the table is highlighted. You can continue the search by clicking the Search button again. You can cancel a search process by clicking the Cancel button. -Close Closes the dialog. The settings of the last search will be saved until you quit %PRODUCTNAME. If several tables or forms are open, you can set different search options for each document. When you close the documents only the search options of the document last closed are saved. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/04/01010000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/04/01010000.xhp index aece2782d2..15eb8adf11 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/04/01010000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/04/01010000.xhp @@ -53,8 +53,8 @@ Using Shortcut Keys - A great deal of your application's functionality can be called up by using shortcut keys. For example, the Command+O -Ctrl+O shortcut keys are shown next to the Open entry in the File menu. If you want to access this function by using the shortcut keys, press and hold down Command + A great deal of your application's functionality can be called up by using shortcut keys. For example, the Command+O +Ctrl+O shortcut keys are shown next to the Open entry in the File menu. If you want to access this function by using the shortcut keys, press and hold down Command Ctrl and then press the O key. Release both keys after the dialog appears. When operating your application, you can choose between using the mouse or the keyboard for almost all of the operations available. @@ -67,8 +67,8 @@ If you place the focus on a button, not only will you see the dotted line framing the name of the button, but also a thicker shadow under the button selected. This indicates that if you exit the dialog by pressing the Enter key, it is the equivalent of pressing that button itself. Shortcut Keys for Mouse Actions - If you are using drag-and-drop, selecting with the mouse or clicking objects and names, you can use the keys Shift, Command -Ctrl and occasionally Option + If you are using drag-and-drop, selecting with the mouse or clicking objects and names, you can use the keys Shift, Command +Ctrl and occasionally Option Alt to access additional functionality. The modified functions available when holding down keys during drag-and-drop are indicated by the mouse pointer changing form. When selecting files or other objects, the modifier keys can extend the selection - the functions are explained where applicable. You can open a context menu, which contains some of the most often-used commands. - Use the shortcut keys Shift+Command + Use the shortcut keys Shift+Command Ctrl+S to open the Special Characters dialog to insert one or more special characters. - Use Command + Use Command Ctrl+A to select the entire text. Use the right or left arrow key to remove the selection. @@ -92,11 +92,11 @@ A triple-click in a text input field selects the entire field. A triple-click in a text document selects the current sentence. - Use Command + Use Command Ctrl+Del to delete everything from the cursor position to the end of the word. - By using Command + By using Command Ctrl and right or left arrow key, the cursor will jump from word to word; if you also hold down the Shift key, one word after the other is selected. @@ -106,7 +106,7 @@ Drag-and-drop can be used within and outside of a text box. - The Command + The Command Ctrl+Z shortcut keys are used to undo modifications one step at a time; the text will then have the status it had before the first change. @@ -124,7 +124,7 @@ Interrupting Macros - If you want to terminate a macro that is currently running, press Shift+ Command + If you want to terminate a macro that is currently running, press Shift+ Command Ctrl+Q. List of General Shortcut Keys in $[officename] @@ -137,8 +137,8 @@ - Effect - +Effect + @@ -191,7 +191,7 @@ - Option + Option Alt+Down Arrow @@ -224,7 +224,7 @@ - Command + Command Ctrl+M @@ -233,7 +233,7 @@ - Command + Command Ctrl+Tab @@ -258,7 +258,7 @@ - Command + Command Ctrl+O @@ -267,7 +267,7 @@ - Command + Command Ctrl+S @@ -276,7 +276,7 @@ - Command + Command Ctrl+N @@ -285,7 +285,7 @@ - Shift+Command + Shift+Command Ctrl+N @@ -294,7 +294,7 @@ - Command + Command Ctrl+P @@ -303,7 +303,7 @@ - Command + Command Ctrl+Q @@ -312,7 +312,7 @@ - Command + Command Ctrl+X @@ -321,7 +321,7 @@ - Command + Command Ctrl+C @@ -330,7 +330,7 @@ - Command + Command Ctrl+V @@ -348,7 +348,7 @@ - Command + Command Ctrl+Shift+V @@ -357,7 +357,7 @@ - Command + Command Ctrl+A @@ -366,7 +366,7 @@ - Command + Command Ctrl+Z @@ -375,7 +375,7 @@ - Command + Command Ctrl+Y @@ -384,7 +384,7 @@ - Command + Command Ctrl+Shift+Y @@ -393,7 +393,7 @@ - Command + Command Ctrl+F @@ -402,7 +402,7 @@ - Command + Command Ctrl+Shift+F @@ -421,7 +421,7 @@ - Command + Command Ctrl+Shift+R @@ -430,7 +430,7 @@ - Shift+Command + Shift+Command Ctrl+I @@ -439,7 +439,7 @@ - Command + Command Ctrl+I @@ -448,7 +448,7 @@ - Command + Command Ctrl+B @@ -457,7 +457,7 @@ - Command + Command Ctrl+U @@ -477,8 +477,8 @@ - Effect - +Effect + @@ -512,8 +512,8 @@ - Command -Ctrl+F4 or Option + Command +Ctrl+F4 or Option Alt+F4 @@ -612,7 +612,7 @@ - Command + Command Ctrl+Enter @@ -629,7 +629,7 @@ - Command + Command Ctrl+U @@ -638,7 +638,7 @@ - Command + Command Ctrl+R @@ -647,7 +647,7 @@ - Command + Command Ctrl+D @@ -741,7 +741,7 @@ - Command + Command Ctrl+Shift+Insert @@ -750,7 +750,7 @@ - Command + Command Ctrl+I @@ -759,7 +759,7 @@ - Command + Command Ctrl+T @@ -768,7 +768,7 @@ - Command + Command Ctrl+P @@ -823,7 +823,7 @@ - Command + Command Ctrl+spacebar @@ -840,7 +840,7 @@ - Command + Command Ctrl+PgUp @@ -849,7 +849,7 @@ - Command + Command Ctrl+PgDn @@ -873,7 +873,7 @@ - Select the toolbar with F6. Use the Down Arrow and Right Arrow to select the desired toolbar icon and press Command + Select the toolbar with F6. Use the Down Arrow and Right Arrow to select the desired toolbar icon and press Command Ctrl+Enter @@ -882,7 +882,7 @@ - Select the document with Command + Select the document with Command Ctrl+F6 and press Tab @@ -907,7 +907,7 @@ - Command + Command Ctrl+Home @@ -916,7 +916,7 @@ - Command + Command Ctrl+End @@ -949,7 +949,7 @@ - Option + Option Alt+Up/Down/Left/Right Arrow @@ -979,7 +979,7 @@ - Command + Command Ctrl+Tab @@ -989,7 +989,7 @@ - Shift+Command + Shift+Command Ctrl+Tab @@ -998,7 +998,7 @@ - Command + Command Ctrl+Enter @@ -1007,7 +1007,7 @@ - Command + Command Ctrl+Enter at the Selection icon @@ -1033,7 +1033,7 @@ - Option + Option Alt key while creating or scaling a graphic object diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/05/00000001.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/05/00000001.xhp index f7217c5de5..86a5d47629 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/05/00000001.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/05/00000001.xhp @@ -58,7 +58,7 @@ Mailing lists Ask about OpenOffice.org, find help by volunteers, and discuss topics on the public mailing lists. You can find many general and specialized mailing lists on the OpenOffice.org website at www.openoffice.org/mail_list.html. Forum - You can access web forums to ask and answer questions about OpenOffice.org. A list of web forums hosted by Sun Microsystems can be found at http://user.services.openoffice.org/en/forum/listforums.php. + You can access web forums to ask and answer questions about OpenOffice.org. A web forum hosted by Sun Microsystems can be found at http://user.services.openoffice.org/en/forum/. Security In case you are concerned about any security issue with using this software, you can contact the developers on the public mail list dev@openoffice.org. If you want to discuss any issue with other users, send an email to the public mail list discuss@openoffice.org. Downloads diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/05/00000110.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/05/00000110.xhp index 55d77ffb7f..6c22308e07 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/05/00000110.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/05/00000110.xhp @@ -1,9 +1,8 @@ - - - + + - - - + + - -The %PRODUCTNAME Help Window -/text/shared/05/00000110.xhp - - - + + The %PRODUCTNAME Help Window + /text/shared/05/00000110.xhp + + + -The %PRODUCTNAME Help Window + +The %PRODUCTNAME Help Window -The Help system for OpenOffice.org and StarOffice/StarSuite software from Sun Microsystems, Inc. is based on the same source files. Some of the functions described here may not be included in this particular %PRODUCTNAME distribution.removed "OpenSource" switch -Provides an overview of the Help systemThe Help window shows the currently selected Help page. -The Toolbar contains important functions for controlling the Help system: -
- - - -Icon + The Help system for OpenOffice.org and StarOffice/StarSuite software from Sun Microsystems, Inc. is based on the same source files. Some of the functions described here may not be included in this particular %PRODUCTNAME distribution.removed "OpenSource" switch + Provides an overview of the Help systemThe Help window shows the currently selected Help page. + +The Toolbar contains important functions for controlling the Help system: +
+ + + +Icon - - -Hides and shows the navigation pane - - - - - -Icon + + + +Hides and shows the navigation pane + + + + + +Icon - - -Moves back to the previous page - - - - - -Icon + + + +Moves back to the previous page + + + + + +Icon - - -Moves forward to the next page - - - - - -Icon + + + +Moves forward to the next page + + + + + +Icon - - -Moves to the first page of the current Help topic - - - - - -Icon + + + +Moves to the first page of the current Help topic + + + + + +Icon - - -Prints the current page - - - - - -Icon + + + +Prints the current page + + + + + +Icon - - -Adds this page to your bookmarks - - - - - -Search icon + + + +Adds this page to your bookmarks + + + + + +Search icon - - -Opens the Find on this page dialog. - - -
-These commands can also be found in the context menu of the Help document. -Help Page -You can copy from the Help Viewer to the clipboard on your operating system with standard copy commands. For example: - - -On a Help page, select the text that you want to copy. - - -Press CommandCtrl+C. - - -To search the current Help page: - - -Click the Find on this Page icon. -The Find on this Page dialog opens. -You can also click in the Help page and press CommandCtrl+F. - - -In the Search for box, enter the text that you want to find. - - -Select the search options that you want to use. - - -Click Find. -To find the next occurrence of the search term on the page, click Find again. - - -Enter the text that you want to search for or select a text entry in the list. -Finds complete words only. -Distinguishes between uppercase text and lowercase text. -Searches the entire Help page, starting at the current position of the cursor. -Searches backwards from the current position of the cursor. -Finds the next occurrence of the search term. -Navigation Pane -The navigation pane of the Help window contains the tab pages Contents, Index, Find and Bookmarks. -The list box located at the very top is where you can select other %PRODUCTNAME Help modules. The Index and Find tab pages only contain the data for the selected %PRODUCTNAME module. - - - -Contents - - -Displays an index of the main topics of all modules. - - - - -Index - - -Displays a list of index keywords for the currently selected %PRODUCTNAME module. - - - - -Find - - -Allows you to carry out a full-text search. The search will include the entire Help contents of the currently selected %PRODUCTNAME module. - - - - -Bookmarks - - -Contains user-defined bookmarks. You can edit or delete bookmarks, or click them to go to the corresponding pages. - - -
-
- - - - - -
- - + + + +Opens the Find on this page dialog. + + + + + These commands can also be found in the context menu of the Help document. + Help Page + You can copy from the Help Viewer to the clipboard on your operating system with standard copy commands. For example: + + + On a Help page, select the text that you want to copy. + + + Press Command +Ctrl+C. + + + To search the current Help page: + + + Click the Find on this Page icon. + The Find on this Page dialog opens. + You can also click in the Help page and press Command +Ctrl+F. + + + In the Search for box, enter the text that you want to find. + + + Select the search options that you want to use. + + + Click Find. + To find the next occurrence of the search term on the page, click Find again. + + + +Enter the text that you want to search for or select a text entry in the list. + +Finds complete words only. + +Distinguishes between uppercase text and lowercase text. + +Searches the entire Help page, starting at the current position of the cursor. + +Searches backwards from the current position of the cursor. + +Finds the next occurrence of the search term. + Navigation Pane + +The navigation pane of the Help window contains the tab pages Contents, Index, Find and Bookmarks. + +The list box located at the very top is where you can select other %PRODUCTNAME Help modules. The Index and Find tab pages only contain the data for the selected %PRODUCTNAME module. + + + + Contents + + + Displays an index of the main topics of all modules. + + + + + Index + + + Displays a list of index keywords for the currently selected %PRODUCTNAME module. + + + + + Find + + + Allows you to carry out a full-text search. The search will include the entire Help contents of the currently selected %PRODUCTNAME module. + + + + + Bookmarks + + + Contains user-defined bookmarks. You can edit or delete bookmarks, or click them to go to the corresponding pages. + + +
+ +
+ + + + + +
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/dabaadvpropdat.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/dabaadvpropdat.xhp index 54d89b3bd9..2350ad4e7b 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/dabaadvpropdat.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/dabaadvpropdat.xhp @@ -10,8 +10,8 @@ * * OpenOffice.org - a multi-platform office productivity suite * - * $RCSfile: dabaadvpropdat.xhp,v $ - * $Revision: 1.10.4.1 $ + * $RCSfile: soffice2xmlhelp.xsl,v $ + * $Revision: 1.8 $ * * This file is part of OpenOffice.org. * @@ -35,61 +35,64 @@ - -Special Settings -/text/shared/explorer/database/dabaadvpropdat.xhp - - - -
-Special Settings -Specifies the way you can work with data in a database. -
-
-In a database window, choose Edit - Database - Advanced Settings - -
-The availability of the following controls depends on the type of database: -Use SQL92 naming constraintsUFI: found this for dBase and for text file folder -Only allows characters that conform to the SQL92 naming convention in a name in a data source. All other characters are rejected. Each name must begin with a lowercase letter, an uppercase letter, or an underscore ( _ ). The remaining characters can be ASCII letters, numbers, and underscores. + + Special Settings + /text/shared/explorer/database/dabaadvpropdat.xhp + + + +
+ Special Settings + Specifies the way you can work with data in a database. +
+
+ In a database window, choose Edit - Database - Advanced Settings + +
+ The availability of the following controls depends on the type of database: + Use SQL92 naming constraintsUFI: found this for dBase and for text file folder + Only allows characters that conform to the SQL92 naming convention in a name in a data source. All other characters are rejected. Each name must begin with a lowercase letter, an uppercase letter, or an underscore ( _ ). The remaining characters can be ASCII letters, numbers, and underscores. -End text lines with CR + LFUFI: found for dBase and text file folder -Select to use the CR + LF code pair to end every text line (preferred for DOS and Windows operating systems). +End text lines with CR + LFUFI: found for dBase and text file folder + Select to use the CR + LF code pair to end every text line (preferred for DOS and Windows operating systems). -Append the table alias name in SELECT statements -Appends the alias to the table name in SELECT statements. +Append the table alias name in SELECT statements + Appends the alias to the table name in SELECT statements. -Use Outer Join syntax '{OJ }' -Use escape sequences for outer joins. The syntax for this escape sequence is {oj outer-join}copied from shared\explorer\database\02010100.xhp -Example: -select Article.* from {oj item LEFT OUTER JOIN orders ON item.no=orders.ANR} +Use Outer Join syntax '{OJ }' + Use escape sequences for outer joins. The syntax for this escape sequence is {oj outer-join}copied from shared\explorer\database\02010100.xhp + Example: + select Article.* from {oj item LEFT OUTER JOIN orders ON item.no=orders.ANR} -Ignore the privileges from the database driver -Ignores access privileges that are provided by the database driver. +Ignore the privileges from the database driver + Ignores access privileges that are provided by the database driver. -Replace named parameters with ? -Replaces named parameters in a data source with a question mark (?). +Replace named parameters with ? + Replaces named parameters in a data source with a question mark (?). -Display version columns (when available) -Some databases assign version numbers to fields to track changes to records. The version number of a field is incremented by one each time the contents of the field are changed. Displays the internal version number of the record in the database table.copied from shared\explorer\database\11090000.xhp +Display version columns (when available) + Some databases assign version numbers to fields to track changes to records. The version number of a field is incremented by one each time the contents of the field are changed. Displays the internal version number of the record in the database table.copied from shared\explorer\database\11090000.xhp -Use the catalog name in SELECT statements -Uses the current data source of the catalog. This option is useful when the ODBC data source is a database server. Do not select this option if the ODBC data source is a dBASE driver.copie from shared\explorer\database\11020000.xhp +Use the catalog name in SELECT statements + Uses the current data source of the catalog. This option is useful when the ODBC data source is a database server. Do not select this option if the ODBC data source is a dBASE driver.copie from shared\explorer\database\11020000.xhp -Use the schema name in SELECT statements -Allows you to use the schema name in SELECT statements.UFI: ??? +Use the schema name in SELECT statements + Allows you to use the schema name in SELECT statements.UFI: ??? -Create index with ASC or DESC statement -Creates an index with ASC or DESC statements.UFI: ??? +Create index with ASC or DESC statement + Creates an index with ASC or DESC statements.UFI: ??? -Comparison of Boolean values -Select the type of Boolean comparison that you want to use.UFI: ??? +Comparison of Boolean values + Select the type of Boolean comparison that you want to use.UFI: ??? -Form data input checks for required fieldsi82291 -When you enter a new record or update an existing record in a form, and you leave a field empty which is bound to a database column which requires input, then you will see a message complaining about the empty field. -If this control box is not enabled, then the forms in the current database will not be checked for required fields. -The control box is available for all data source types which support write access to their data. The control box does not exist for spreadsheets, text, csv, and the various read-only address books. -Ignore currency field information -Only for Oracle JDBC connections. When enabled it specifies that no column is treated as a currency field. The field type returned from the database driver is discarded. - - +Form data input checks for required fieldsi82291 + When you enter a new record or update an existing record in a form, and you leave a field empty which is bound to a database column which requires input, then you will see a message complaining about the empty field. + If this control box is not enabled, then the forms in the current database will not be checked for required fields. + The control box is available for all data source types which support write access to their data. The control box does not exist for spreadsheets, text, csv, and the various read-only address books. + Ignore currency field information + Only for Oracle JDBC connections. When enabled it specifies that no column is treated as a currency field. The field type returned from the database driver is discarded. + +Use ODBC conformant date/time literals + Check to use ODBC conformant date/time literals. + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/dabadoc.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/dabadoc.xhp index dc2e256c0b..4b8457afd1 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/dabadoc.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/dabadoc.xhp @@ -1,7 +1,8 @@ - - - + ************************************************************************ + --> + - - -Database File -/text/shared/explorer/database/dabadoc.xhp - - -UFI: the main database document window -YJ: checked - - - -
-Database File -The database file window organizes the tables, views, queries, links, and reports of a database in %PRODUCTNAME. -
-
-Working with databases in %PRODUCTNAME -
- - + + Database File + /text/shared/explorer/database/dabadoc.xhp + + + +
+ Database File + The database file window organizes the tables, views, queries, and reports of a database in %PRODUCTNAME. +
+
+ Working with databases in %PRODUCTNAME +
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/rep_main.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/rep_main.xhp index ee3e9162f4..e98a063af7 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/rep_main.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/rep_main.xhp @@ -1,9 +1,8 @@ - - - + + - - - + + - -Report Builder -/text/shared/explorer/database/rep_main.xhp - - - + + Report Builder + /text/shared/explorer/database/rep_main.xhp + + + Report Builder -Report Builder +Report Builder -The Report Builder is a tool to create your own database reports. Unlike with the Report Wizard, using the Report Builder you can take control to design the report the way you want. The generated report is a Writer document that you can edit, too. -To use the Report Builder, the Report Builder extension must be installed. In addition, the Java Runtime Environment (JRE) software must be installed, and this software must be selected in %PRODUCTNAME. -To Install the Report Builder Extension - - -Choose Tools - Extension Manager to open the Extension Manager. - - -Click the link "Get more extensions here". This opens your web browser at the address http://extensions.services.openoffice.org and shows a list of available extensions. - - -Find the Sun Report Builder extension. Click at the icon or the "click here" text link. This opens the download page for the extension. - - -Click the "Get it!" icon. The file "sun-report-builder.oxt" will be downloaded to your computer. - - -Switch back from your web browser to the %PRODUCTNAME window. The Extension Manager should still be visible. - - -In the Extension Manager, click Add to open the Add extensions dialog. - - -Select the "sun-report-builder.oxt" file that you downloaded. Click Open. -This starts the installation of the Sun Report Builder extension. - - -Read the license. If you accept the license, click Accept to continue the installation. - - -Click Close to close the Extension Manager. - - -To install the JRE software -The Report Builder requires an installed Java Runtime Environment (JRE). - - -Choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME - Java. - - -Wait up to one minute, while %PRODUCTNAME collects information on installed Java software on your system. -If a recent JRE version is found on your system, you see an entry in the list. - - -Click the option button in front of the entry to enable this JRE version for use in %PRODUCTNAME. - - -Ensure that Use a Java runtime environment is enabled. - - -If no JRE version is found on your system, open your web browser and download the JRE software from http://www.java.com. Install the JRE software. Then restart %PRODUCTNAME and open Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME - Java again. -To open the Report Builder - - -Open a Base file or create a new database. The database must contain at least one table with at least one data field and a primary key field. - - -Click the Reports icon in the Base window, then choose Create Report in Design View. -The Report Builder window opens. - - -The Report Builder is divided into three parts. On the top you see the menu, with the toolbars below. -On the right you see the Properties window with the property values of the currently selected object. -The left part of the Report Builder window shows the Report Builder view. The Report Builder view is initially divided into three sections, from top to bottom: - - - -Page Header - drag control fields with fixed text into the Page Header area - - - -Detail - drag and drop database fields into the Detail area - - - -Page Footer - drag control fields with fixed text into the Page Footer area - - -To insert an additional Report Header and Report Footer area choose Edit - Insert Report Header/Footer. These areas contain text that appears at the start and end of the whole report.id="par_id2685323" l10n="NEW"If you want a multi-column report, choose Format - Page, click the Columns tab, and set the number of columns. Now you can also specify a Column Header and Column Footer in the Report Builder view.column header/footerClick the "-" icon in front of an area name to collapse that area to one line in the Report Builder view. The "-" icon changes to a "+" icon, and you can click this to expand the area again. -You insert database fields by drag-and-drop into the Detail area. See the section "To insert fields into the report" below. -In addition, you can click the Label Field or Text Box icon in the toolbar, then drag a rectangle in the Page Header or Page Footer area, to define a text that is the same on all pages. You enter the text in the Label box of the corresponding Properties window. You can also add graphics by using the Graphics icon. -To connect the report to a database table -First you must connect the report to a database table. - - -Move the mouse to the Properties view. You see two tab pages General and Data. - - -On the Data tab page, click Content to open the combo box. - - -Select the table for that you want to create the report. - - -After selecting the table, press the Tab key to leave the Content box. - - -The Add Field window opens automatically and shows all fields of the selected table. -To insert fields into the report -The Add Field window helps you to insert the table entries in the report. Click the Add Field icon in the toolbar to open the Add Field window. - - -Drag and drop the field names one by one from the Add Field window into the Detail area of the report. Position the fields as you like. Use the icons in the toolbars to align the fields. -It is not possible to overlap the fields. If you drop a table field on the Detail area, then a label and a text box are inserted. - - -You can also insert text that should be the same on every page of the report. Click the Label Field icon -label field icon + The Report Builder is a tool to create your own database reports. Unlike with the Report Wizard, using the Report Builder you can take control to design the report the way you want. The generated report is a Writer document that you can edit, too. + To use the Report Builder, the Report Builder extension must be installed. In addition, the Java Runtime Environment (JRE) software must be installed, and this software must be selected in %PRODUCTNAME. + To Install the Report Builder Extension + + + Choose Tools - Extension Manager to open the Extension Manager. + + + Click the link "Get more extensions here". This opens your web browser at the address http://extensions.services.openoffice.org and shows a list of available extensions. + + + Find the Sun Report Builder extension. Click at the icon or the "click here" text link. This opens the download page for the extension. + + + Click the "Get it!" icon. The file "sun-report-builder.oxt" will be downloaded to your computer. + + + Switch back from your web browser to the %PRODUCTNAME window. The Extension Manager should still be visible. + + + In the Extension Manager, click Add to open the Add extensions dialog. + + + Select the "sun-report-builder.oxt" file that you downloaded. Click Open. + This starts the installation of the Sun Report Builder extension. + + + Read the license. If you accept the license, click Accept to continue the installation. + + + Click Close to close the Extension Manager. + + + To install the JRE software + The Report Builder requires an installed Java Runtime Environment (JRE). + + + Choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME - Java. + + + Wait up to one minute, while %PRODUCTNAME collects information on installed Java software on your system. + If a recent JRE version is found on your system, you see an entry in the list. + + + Click the option button in front of the entry to enable this JRE version for use in %PRODUCTNAME. + + + Ensure that Use a Java runtime environment is enabled. + + + If no JRE version is found on your system, open your web browser and download the JRE software from http://www.java.com. Install the JRE software. Then restart %PRODUCTNAME and open Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME - Java again. + To open the Report Builder + + + Open a Base file or create a new database. The database must contain at least one table with at least one data field and a primary key field. + + + Click the Reports icon in the Base window, then choose Create Report in Design View. + The Report Builder window opens. + + + The Report Builder is divided into three parts. On the top you see the menu, with the toolbars below. + On the right you see the Properties window with the property values of the currently selected object. + The left part of the Report Builder window shows the Report Builder view. The Report Builder view is initially divided into three sections, from top to bottom: + + + + Page Header - drag control fields with fixed text into the Page Header area + + + + Detail - drag and drop database fields into the Detail area + + + + Page Footer - drag control fields with fixed text into the Page Footer area + + + To insert an additional Report Header and Report Footer area choose Edit - Insert Report Header/Footer. These areas contain text that appears at the start and end of the whole report.id="par_id2685323" l10n="NEW"If you want a multi-column report, choose Format - Page, click the Columns tab, and set the number of columns. Now you can also specify a Column Header and Column Footer in the Report Builder view.column header/footer +Click the "-" icon in front of an area name to collapse that area to one line in the Report Builder view. The "-" icon changes to a "+" icon, and you can click this to expand the area again. + You insert database fields by drag-and-drop into the Detail area. See the section "To insert fields into the report" below. + In addition, you can click the Label Field or Text Box icon in the toolbar, then drag a rectangle in the Page Header or Page Footer area, to define a text that is the same on all pages. You enter the text in the Label box of the corresponding Properties window. You can also add graphics by using the Graphics icon. + To connect the report to a database table + First you must connect the report to a database table. + + + Move the mouse to the Properties view. You see two tab pages General and Data. + + + On the Data tab page, click Content to open the combo box. + + + Select the table for that you want to create the report. + + + After selecting the table, press the Tab key to leave the Content box. + + + The Add Field window opens automatically and shows all fields of the selected table. + To insert fields into the report + The Add Field window helps you to insert the table entries in the report. Click the Add Field icon in the toolbar to open the Add Field window. + + + Drag and drop the field names one by one from the Add Field window into the Detail area of the report. Position the fields as you like. Use the icons in the toolbars to align the fields. + It is not possible to overlap the fields. If you drop a table field on the Detail area, then a label and a text box are inserted. + + + You can also insert text that should be the same on every page of the report. Click the Label Field icon +Icon , then drag a rectangle in the Page Header or Page Footer area. Edit the Label property to show the text you want. - -Align at Section toolbar -Select two or more objects and click this icon to align the objects at the left margin of the area. -Select two or more objects and click this icon to align the objects at the right margin of the area. -Select two or more objects and click this icon to align the objects at the top margin of the area. -Select two or more objects and click this icon to align the objects at the bottom margin of the area.Object Resizing toolbar -Select two or more objects and click this icon to resize the objects to the smallest width. -Select two or more objects and click this icon to resize the objects to the smallest height. -Select two or more objects and click this icon to resize the objects to the greatest width. -Select two or more objects and click this icon to resize the objects to the greatest height.Report Controls toolbar -Inserts a horizontal line to the current area. -Inserts a vertical line to the current area. -After inserting fields in the Detail view, the report is ready for execution. -To execute a report - - -Click the Execute Report icon -execute report icon + + Align at Section toolbar + +Select two or more objects and click this icon to align the objects at the left margin of the area. + +Select two or more objects and click this icon to align the objects at the right margin of the area. + +Select two or more objects and click this icon to align the objects at the top margin of the area. + +Select two or more objects and click this icon to align the objects at the bottom margin of the area.Object Resizing toolbar + +Select two or more objects and click this icon to resize the objects to the smallest width. + +Select two or more objects and click this icon to resize the objects to the smallest height. + +Select two or more objects and click this icon to resize the objects to the greatest width. + +Select two or more objects and click this icon to resize the objects to the greatest height.Report Controls toolbar + +Inserts a horizontal line to the current area. + +Inserts a vertical line to the current area.Shrink toolbar + +Shrinks the selected section to remove top and bottom empty space. + +Shrinks the selected section to remove top empty space. + +Shrinks the selected section to remove bottom empty space. + After inserting fields in the Detail view, the report is ready for execution. + To execute a report + + + Click the Execute Report icon +Icon on the toolbar. - - -A Writer document opens and shows the report you have created, which contains all values of the database table which you have insert. -If the database contents did change, execute the report again to update the result report.automatic? message? -To edit a report -First decide if you want to edit the generated report, which is a static Writer document, or if you want to edit the Report Builder view and then generate a new report based on the new design. -The Writer document is opened read-only. To edit the Writer document, click Edit File -edit file icon + + + A Writer document opens and shows the report you have created, which contains all values of the database table which you have insert. + If the database contents did change, execute the report again to update the result report.automatic? message? + To edit a report + First decide if you want to edit the generated report, which is a static Writer document, or if you want to edit the Report Builder view and then generate a new report based on the new design. + The Writer document is opened read-only. To edit the Writer document, click Edit File +Icon on the Standard toolbar.saved automatically with the Base file? -If you want to edit the Report Builder view, you can change some of its properties. -Click in the Details area. Then in the Properties window, change some properties, for example the background color. -After finishing, click the Execute Report icon -execute report icon + If you want to edit the Report Builder view, you can change some of its properties. + Click in the Details area. Then in the Properties window, change some properties, for example the background color. + After finishing, click the Execute Report icon +Icon to create a new report. -If you close the Report Builder, you will be asked if the report should be saved. Click Yes, give the report a name, and click OK.report part of Base file? -Sorting the report -Without sorting or grouping, the records will be inserted into the report in the order in which they are retrieved from the database. - - -Open the Report Builder view and click the Sorting and Grouping icon -sorting and grouping icon + If you close the Report Builder, you will be asked if the report should be saved. Click Yes, give the report a name, and click OK.report part of Base file? + Sorting the report + Without sorting or grouping, the records will be inserted into the report in the order in which they are retrieved from the database. + + + Open the Report Builder view and click the Sorting and Grouping icon +Icon on the toolbar. You see the Sorting and Grouping dialog. - - -In the Groups box, click the field which you want as the first sort field, and set the Sorting property.what meaning has the order of fields / move up down button? - - -Execute the report. - - -Grouping - - -Open the Report Builder view and click the Sorting and Grouping icon -sorting and grouping icon + + + In the Groups box, click the field which you want as the first sort field, and set the Sorting property.what meaning has the order of fields / move up down button? + + + Execute the report. + + + Grouping + + + Open the Report Builder view and click the Sorting and Grouping icon +Icon on the toolbar. You see the Sorting and Grouping dialog. - - -In the Groups box, open the Group Header list box and select to show a group header. - - -Click the Add Field icon -add field icon + + + In the Groups box, open the Group Header list box and select to show a group header. + + + Click the Add Field icon +Icon to open the Add Field window. - - -Drag-and-drop the field entry that you want to group into the group header section. Then drag-and-drop the remaining fields into the Detail section. - - -Execute the report. The report shows the grouped records. - - -If you like to sort and group, open the Report Builder view, then open the Sorting and Grouping dialog. Select to show a Group Header for the fields that you want to group, and select to hide the Group Header for the fields that you want to be sorted. Close the Sorting and Grouping window and execute the report. -Updating and printing your data -When you insert some new data or edit data in the table, a new report will show the updated data. -Click the Reports icon -reports icon + + + Drag-and-drop the field entry that you want to group into the group header section. Then drag-and-drop the remaining fields into the Detail section. + + + Execute the report. The report shows the grouped records. + + + If you like to sort and group, open the Report Builder view, then open the Sorting and Grouping dialog. Select to show a Group Header for the fields that you want to group, and select to hide the Group Header for the fields that you want to be sorted. Close the Sorting and Grouping window and execute the report. + Updating and printing your data + When you insert some new data or edit data in the table, a new report will show the updated data. + Click the Reports icon +Icon and double-click your last saved report. A new Writer document will be created which shows the new data. -To print a report, choose File - Print from the Writer document. - - + To print a report, choose File - Print from the Writer document. + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/rep_sort.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/rep_sort.xhp index 39edac3b06..8dde7a43e9 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/rep_sort.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/rep_sort.xhp @@ -1,9 +1,8 @@ - - - + + - - - + + - -Sorting and Grouping -/text/shared/explorer/database/rep_sort.xhp - - - -
-Sorting and Grouping + + Sorting and Grouping + /text/shared/explorer/database/rep_sort.xhp + + + +
+ +Sorting and Grouping -In the Sorting and Grouping dialog of Report Builder, you can define the fields that should be sorted in your report, and the fields that should be kept together to form a group. If you group your report by a certain field, all records with the same value of that field will be kept together in one group. -
-The Groups box shows the fields in an order from top to bottom. You can select any field, then click the Move Up or Move Down button to move this field up or down in the list. -The sorting and grouping will be applied in the order of the list from top to bottom. -Lists the fields that will be used for sorting or grouping. The field at the top has the highest priority, the second field has the second priority, and so on. -Click to open a list from which you can select a field. -Moves the selected field up in the list. -Moves the selected field down in the list. -Select the sorting order. -Select to show or hide the Group Header. -Select to show or hide the Group Footer. -Select to create a new group on each changed value, or on other properties. -By default a new group is created on every changed value of a record from the selected field. You can change this property depending on the type of field: - - -For fields of type Text, you can select Prefix Characters and enter a number n of characters in the text box below. The records which are identical in the first n characters will be grouped together. - - -For fields of type Date/Time, you can group the records by the same year, quarter, month, week, day, hour, or minute. You can additionally specify an interval for weeks and hours: 2 weeks groups data in biweekly groups, 12 hours groups data in half-day groups. - - -For fields of type AutoNumber, Currency, or Number, you specify an interval.how? - - -Enter the group interval value that records are grouped by. -Select the level of detail by which a group is kept together on the same page. -When you specify to keep together some records on the same page, you have three choices: - - -No - page boundaries are not taken into account. - - -Whole Group - prints the group header, detail section, and group footer on the same page. - - -With First Detail - prints the group header on a page only if the first detail record also can be printed on the same page. - - - - + In the Sorting and Grouping dialog of Report Builder, you can define the fields that should be sorted in your report, and the fields that should be kept together to form a group. If you group your report by a certain field, all records with the same value of that field will be kept together in one group. +
+ The Groups box shows the fields in an order from top to bottom. You can select any field, then click the Move Up or Move Down button to move this field up or down in the list. + The sorting and grouping will be applied in the order of the list from top to bottom. + +Lists the fields that will be used for sorting or grouping. The field at the top has the highest priority, the second field has the second priority, and so on. + +Click to open a list from which you can select a field. + + +Moves the selected field up in the list. + + +Moves the selected field down in the list. + +Select the sorting order. + +Select to show or hide the Group Header. + +Select to show or hide the Group Footer. + +Select to create a new group on each changed value, or on other properties. + +Removes the selected field from the list. + By default a new group is created on every changed value of a record from the selected field. You can change this property depending on the type of field: + + + For fields of type Text, you can select Prefix Characters and enter a number n of characters in the text box below. The records which are identical in the first n characters will be grouped together. + + + For fields of type Date/Time, you can group the records by the same year, quarter, month, week, day, hour, or minute. You can additionally specify an interval for weeks and hours: 2 weeks groups data in biweekly groups, 12 hours groups data in half-day groups. + + + For fields of type AutoNumber, Currency, or Number, you specify an interval.how? + + + +Enter the group interval value that records are grouped by. + +Select the level of detail by which a group is kept together on the same page. + When you specify to keep together some records on the same page, you have three choices: + + + No - page boundaries are not taken into account. + + + Whole Group - prints the group header, detail section, and group footer on the same page. + + + With First Detail - prints the group header on a page only if the first detail record also can be printed on the same page. + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/breaking_lines.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/breaking_lines.xhp index 943d1988b5..e6ea007e49 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/breaking_lines.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/breaking_lines.xhp @@ -1,8 +1,8 @@ - - + + + - - -Inserting Line Breaks in Cells -/text/shared/guide/breaking_lines.xhp - - - -UFI 04/04/27, added links to this file in scalc/guide/main.xhp and swriter/guide/main.xhp -YJ: checked - - - + + Inserting Line Breaks in Cells + /text/shared/guide/breaking_lines.xhp + + + line breaks; in cells -cells; line breaks -text flow; in cells -text breaks in cells -wrapping text; in cells -words; wrapping in cells -automatic line breaks -new lines in cells -inserting;line breaks in cells -tables;inserting line breaks + cells; line breaks + text flow; in cells + text breaks in cells + wrapping text; in cells + words; wrapping in cells + automatic line breaks + new lines in cells + inserting;line breaks in cells + tables;inserting line breaks -Inserting Line Breaks in Cells +Inserting Line Breaks in Cells -Inserting line breaks in $[officename] Calc spreadsheet cells - - -To insert a line break in a spreadsheet cell, press the CommandCtrl+Enter keys. -This will work only with the text edit cursor inside the cell, not at the input line. So first double-click the cell, then single-click at the text position where you want the line break. - - -Formatting $[officename] Calc cells for automatic line wrapping - - -Select the cells for which you want an automatic line break. - - -Choose Format - Cells - Alignment. - - -Select Wrap text automatically. - - -Inserting line breaks in $[officename] Writer text document tables - - -To insert a line break in a text document table cell, press the Enter key. - - -An automatic line break will be performed while you type across the end of each cell. -
-Alignment -
- - + Inserting line breaks in $[officename] Calc spreadsheet cells + + + To insert a line break in a spreadsheet cell, press the Command +Ctrl+Enter keys. + This will work only with the text edit cursor inside the cell, not at the input line. So first double-click the cell, then single-click at the text position where you want the line break. + + + You can search for a newline character in the Find & Replace dialog by searching for \n as a regular expression. You can use the text function CHAR(10) to insert a newline character into a text formula. + Formatting $[officename] Calc cells for automatic line wrapping + + + Select the cells for which you want an automatic line break. + + + Choose Format - Cells - Alignment. + + + Select Wrap text automatically. + + + Inserting line breaks in $[officename] Writer text document tables + + + To insert a line break in a text document table cell, press the Enter key. + + + An automatic line break will be performed while you type across the end of each cell. +
+ Alignment +
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/keyboard.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/keyboard.xhp index 088b863ab9..b96480ce25 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/keyboard.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/keyboard.xhp @@ -179,7 +179,7 @@ Selecting objects - Press Shift+F4 to select the first object in the current document. When an object is selected, press Tab to select the next object, or press Esc to go back to the text. + Press Shift+F4 to select the first object in the current document. When an object is selected, press Tab to select the next object, or press Esc to go back to the text. Edit Objects A selected OLE object can be activated with the Enter key. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/protection.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/protection.xhp index 7983488972..dbc30c2161 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/protection.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/protection.xhp @@ -147,8 +147,8 @@ - - + + Protecting Content in %PRODUCTNAME Writer Protecting Cells in %PRODUCTNAME Calc diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/startcenter.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/startcenter.xhp index cf4cc16071..1b591b1114 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/startcenter.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/startcenter.xhp @@ -10,8 +10,8 @@ * * OpenOffice.org - a multi-platform office productivity suite * - * $RCSfile: startcenter.xhp,v $ - * $Revision: 1.1.2.1 $ + * $RCSfile: soffice2xmlhelp.xsl,v $ + * $Revision: 1.8 $ * * This file is part of OpenOffice.org. * @@ -35,49 +35,49 @@ - -Start Center - - - - + + Start Center + + + + backing window -start center + start center -Start Center +Start Center -Welcome to %PRODUCTNAME. Thank you for using the %PRODUCTNAME application help. Press F1 whenever you need help using the %PRODUCTNAME software. -You see the Start Center when no document is open in %PRODUCTNAME. Click an icon to open a new document, to open a file dialog, or to browse to a featured web page. -The top six icons each open a new document of the specified type, using the default template for a new document: - - - -Text Document opens %PRODUCTNAME Writer - - - -Spreadsheet opens %PRODUCTNAME Calc - - - -Presentation opens %PRODUCTNAME Impress - - - -Drawing opens %PRODUCTNAME Draw - - - -Database opens %PRODUCTNAME Base - - - -Formula opens %PRODUCTNAME Math - - -The Templates icon opens the Templates and Documents dialog. -The Open a document icon presents a file open dialog. -The remaining icons open your system default browser to show different web pages related to %PRODUCTNAME. - - + Welcome to %PRODUCTNAME. Thank you for using the %PRODUCTNAME application help. Press F1 whenever you need help using the %PRODUCTNAME software. + You see the Start Center when no document is open in %PRODUCTNAME. Click an icon to open a new document, to open a file dialog, or to browse to a featured web page. + The top six icons each open a new document of the specified type, using the default template for a new document: + + + + Text Document opens %PRODUCTNAME Writer + + + + Spreadsheet opens %PRODUCTNAME Calc + + + + Presentation opens %PRODUCTNAME Impress + + + + Drawing opens %PRODUCTNAME Draw + + + + Database opens %PRODUCTNAME Base + + + + Formula opens %PRODUCTNAME Math + + + The Templates icon opens the Templates and Documents dialog. + The Open a document icon presents a file open dialog. + The remaining icons open your system default browser to show different web pages related to %PRODUCTNAME. + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01020400.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01020400.xhp index 87fc84fa69..1d3343ac2c 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01020400.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01020400.xhp @@ -58,7 +58,7 @@ -Display documents in browser +Display documents in browser Enables the Browser Plug-in to show %PRODUCTNAME documents in a browser window. Select, click OK, then restart your browser. Then, in the browser window, click any %PRODUCTNAME document hyperlink. The plug-in needs a version of Mozilla, Netscape, or Firefox installed on your system. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/improvement.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/improvement.xhp index 286224a9ff..53bc948858 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/improvement.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/improvement.xhp @@ -70,8 +70,8 @@ Click Yes, I am willing to participate … to enable the automatic feedback. Click No, I do not wish to participate to disable the automatic feedback. - Tracked data - The following data will be recorded and sent: + Tracked data + The following data will be recorded and sent: Clicks on toolbar buttons, including extension toolbars @@ -98,7 +98,7 @@ Each recorded item also includes a time stamp and the module (Writer, Calc, Impress, …) where it has been called - The following data will not be recorded and sent: + The following data will not be recorded and sent: User names and passwords @@ -113,7 +113,7 @@ User's source code - Show Data + Show Data Click the button to show the currently collected data. This data will be sent next time, plus any data that gets collected until you end the current session. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/00/00000402.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/00/00000402.xhp index a83c6933ee..89f6772bc9 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/00/00000402.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/00/00000402.xhp @@ -44,7 +44,7 @@ Edit Menu
Choose Edit - Duplicate - + Shift+F3
Choose Edit - Cross-fading (%PRODUCTNAME Draw only) diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/06050000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/06050000.xhp index b7b84e9ffc..c10bc41ccb 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/06050000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/06050000.xhp @@ -52,7 +52,7 @@
You can copy and paste animations into %PRODUCTNAME Writer. - Animation + Animation Shows a preview of the objects in the animation. You can also press the Play button to view the animation. Jumps to the first image in the animation sequence. @@ -130,22 +130,22 @@ -Image Number Indicates the position of the current image in the animation sequence. If you want to view another image, enter its number or click the up and down arrows. -Duration Enter the number of seconds to display the current image. This option is only available if you select the Bitmap object option in the Animation group field. -Loop count Sets the number of times that the animation is played. If you want the animation to play continuously, choose Max. - Image Adds or removes objects from your animation. -Apply Object Adds selected object(s) as a single image. @@ -162,7 +162,7 @@
-Apply Objects Individually Adds an image for each selected object. If you select a grouped object, an image is created for each object in the group. You can also select an animation, such as an animated GIF, and click this icon to open it for editing. When you are finished editing the animation, click Create to insert a new animation into your slide. @@ -180,7 +180,7 @@ -Delete Current Image Deletes current image from the animation sequence. @@ -197,7 +197,7 @@
-Delete All Images Deletes all of the images in the animation. @@ -213,26 +213,26 @@
- Number Total number of images in the animation. - Animation group Sets object properties for your animation. -Group object Assembles images into a single object so that they can be moved as a group. You can still edit individual objects by double-clicking the group in the slide. -Bitmap object Combines images into a single image. -Alignment Aligns the images in your animation.. -Create Inserts the animation into the current slide.
diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/guide/line_arrow_styles.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/guide/line_arrow_styles.xhp index e9c70c32c9..65d758bfaa 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/guide/line_arrow_styles.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/guide/line_arrow_styles.xhp @@ -51,7 +51,7 @@ oldref="48">Loading Line and Arrow Styles You can use styles to organize similar line and arrow types. $[officename] provides a few standard style files that you can load and use in your document. If you want, you can add or delete elements from a style file, or even create a custom style file. - To load a line styles file: @@ -65,7 +65,7 @@ To save a line styles file, click the Save Line Styles button, enter a filename, and then click OK. - To load an arrow styles file: diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/00/00000403.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/00/00000403.xhp index 10abde0897..58fe5ef621 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/00/00000403.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/00/00000403.xhp @@ -48,19 +48,19 @@
Choose View - Field Shadings - + Command Ctrl+F8
Choose View - Field Names - + Command Ctrl+F9
Choose View - Nonprinting Characters - + Command Ctrl+F10 On Standard bar, click @@ -82,7 +82,7 @@
Choose View - Web Layout - + On Tools bar, enable
diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/00/00000405.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/00/00000405.xhp index fb6c5f5266..daea80f176 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/00/00000405.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/00/00000405.xhp @@ -139,7 +139,7 @@ Choose Format - Frame/Object - Wrap tabChoose Insert - Frame - Wrap tabChoose Format - Wrap - +Choose Format - Wrap - Edit Contour @@ -160,9 +160,9 @@ Choose Insert/Format - Picture - Macro tabChoose Insert/Format - Frame/Object - Macro tabChoose Edit - AutoText - AutoText (button) - Macro - +Choose Edit - ImageMap - open context menu - Macro - +Choose Insert - Hyperlink - Events icon (look for Help tip)Choose Format - Character - Hyperlink tab - Events button @@ -182,7 +182,7 @@
Choose Table - Merge Cells - + On the Table Bar, click
@@ -202,7 +202,7 @@
Choose Table - Split Cells - + On the Table Bar, click
@@ -233,7 +233,7 @@
Choose Table - Autofit - Optimal Row Height - + Open Optimize toolbar from Table Bar, click
@@ -253,7 +253,7 @@
Choose Table - Autofit - Distribute Rows Equally - + Open Optimize toolbar from Table Bar, click
@@ -275,7 +275,7 @@
Choose Table - Delete - Rows - + On Table Bar, click
@@ -299,7 +299,7 @@
Choose Table - Autofit - Optimal Column Width - + Open Optimize toolbar from Table Bar, click
@@ -319,7 +319,7 @@
Choose Table - Autofit - Distribute Columns Equally - + Open Optimize toolbar from Table Bar, click
@@ -341,9 +341,9 @@
Choose Table - Insert - Columns - + Choose Table - Insert - Rows - + On Table Bar, click
@@ -371,7 +371,7 @@
Choose Table - Delete - Columns - + On Table Bar, click
@@ -391,7 +391,7 @@
Choose Format - Frame/Object - +
diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04090001.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04090001.xhp index e3da657c79..ad94508674 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04090001.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04090001.xhp @@ -10,8 +10,8 @@ * * OpenOffice.org - a multi-platform office productivity suite * - * $RCSfile: 04090001.xhp,v $ - * $Revision: 1.8.4.1 $ + * $RCSfile: soffice2xmlhelp.xsl,v $ + * $Revision: 1.8 $ * * This file is part of OpenOffice.org. * @@ -35,213 +35,218 @@ - -Document -/text/swriter/01/04090001.xhp - - - -
+ + Document + /text/swriter/01/04090001.xhp + + + +
-Document -Fields are used to insert information about the current document, for example, file name, template, statistics, user data, date, and time. -
-
- -
-For the HTML export and import of date and time fields, special $[officename] formats are used. -
+Document + Fields are used to insert information about the current document, for example, file name, template, statistics, user data, date, and time. +
+
+ +
+ For the HTML export and import of date and time fields, special $[officename] formats are used. +
-Type -Lists the available field types. To add a field to your document, click a field type, click a field in the Select list, and then click Insert. The following fields are available: -
-
- - -Type - - -Meaning - - - - -Author - - -Inserts the name of the user who first saved the document. -To view the name of the author, choose File - Properties, click the General tab, and then look at the Created line. The name of the author is appended to the Created line only if the Apply user data check box is selected.we must define the difference of (first) Author and (current) User somewhere, so it is here next to the Author index entry - - - - -Chapter - - -Inserts the chapter number and/or the chapter name. - - - - -Date - - -Inserts the current date. You can insert the date as a fixed field - Date (fixed) - that does not change, or as a dynamic field - Date - that it is updated automatically. To manually update the Date field, press F9. - - - - -File name - - -Inserts the filename and/or the directory path of the current document, as well as the filename without extension. - - - - -Page - - -Inserts the page number of the current, previous, or next page. - - - - -Sender - - -Inserts fields containing user data. You can change the user-data that is displayed by choosingTools - Options - $[officename] - User Data. - - - - -Statistics - - -Inserts document statistics, such as page and word counts, as a field. To view the statistics of a document, choose File - Properties, and then click the Statistics tab. - - - - - -Templates - - -Inserts the filename, the path, or the filename without the file extension of the current template. You can also insert the names of the "Category" and the "Style" formats used in the current template. To view the names of the template categories and the styles used in the templates, choose File - Templates -Organize. - - - - -Time - - -Inserts the current time. You can insert the time as a fixed field - Time (fixed) - that does not change, or as a dynamic field - Time - that it is updated automatically. To manually update the Time field, press F9. - - -
+Type + Lists the available field types. To add a field to your document, click a field type, click a field in the Select list, and then click Insert. The following fields are available: +
+ + + + Type + + + Meaning + + + + + Author + + + Inserts the name of the current user. + + + + + Chapter + + + Inserts the chapter number and/or the chapter name. + + + + + Date + + + Inserts the current date. You can insert the date as a fixed field - Date (fixed) - that does not change, or as a dynamic field - Date - that it is updated automatically. To manually update the Date field, press F9. + + + + + File name + + + Inserts the filename and/or the directory path of the current document, as well as the filename without extension. + + + + + Page + + + Inserts the page number of the current, previous, or next page. + + + + + Sender + + + Inserts fields containing user data. You can change the user-data that is displayed by choosingTools - Options - $[officename] - User Data. + + + + + Statistics + + + Inserts document statistics, such as page and word counts, as a field. To view the statistics of a document, choose File - Properties, and then click the Statistics tab. + + + + + + Templates + + + Inserts the filename, the path, or the filename without the file extension of the current template. You can also insert the names of the "Category" and the "Style" formats used in the current template. To view the names of the template categories and the styles used in the templates, choose File - Templates -Organize. + + + + + Time + + + Inserts the current time. You can insert the time as a fixed field - Time (fixed) - that does not change, or as a dynamic field - Time - that it is updated automatically. To manually update the Time field, press F9. + + +
-
-The following fields can only be inserted if the corresponding field type is selected in the Type list. -
-
+
+ The following fields can only be inserted if the corresponding field type is selected in the Type list. +
+
-Selecton "Document" and "DocInformation" tab page this is called "Select", on the other tab pages "Selection" -Lists the available fields for the field type selected in the Type list. To insert a field, click the field, and then click Insert. -To quickly insert a field from the list, hold down Command +Selecton "Document" and "DocInformation" tab page this is called "Select", on the other tab pages "Selection" + Lists the available fields for the field type selected in the Type list. To insert a field, click the field, and then click Insert. + To quickly insert a field from the list, hold down Command Ctrl and double-click the field. - - - -Fields - - -Function - - - - -Previous page - - -Inserts the page number of the previous page in the document. - - - - -Next page - - -Inserts the page number of the next page in the document. - - - - -Page Number - - -Inserts the current page number. - - -
+ + + + Fields + + + Function + + + + + Previous page + + + Inserts the page number of the previous page in the document. + + + + + Next page + + + Inserts the page number of the next page in the document. + + + + + Page Number + + + Inserts the current page number. + + +
-In the Format, click the numbering format that you want to use. -If you want, you can enter an Offset for the displayed page number. With an Offset value of 1, the field will display a number that is 1 more than the current page number, but only if a page with that number exists. On the last page of the document, this same field will be empty. -
-
+ In the Format, click the numbering format that you want to use. + If you want, you can enter an Offset for the displayed page number. With an Offset value of 1, the field will display a number that is 1 more than the current page number, but only if a page with that number exists. On the last page of the document, this same field will be empty. +
+
-Offset -Enter the offset value that you want to apply to a page number field, for example "+1". -
-If you want to change the actual page number and not the displayed number, do not use the Offset value. To change page numbers, read the Page Numbers guide. -
+Offset + Enter the offset value that you want to apply to a page number field, for example "+1". +
+ If you want to change the actual page number and not the displayed number, do not use the Offset value. To change page numbers, read the Page Numbers guide. +
-Format -Click the format that you want to apply to the selected field, or click "Additional formats" to define a custom format. -
-When you click "Additional formats", the Number Format dialog opens, where you can define a custom format. +Format + Click the format that you want to apply to the selected field, or click "Additional formats" to define a custom format. +
+ When you click "Additional formats", the Number Format dialog opens, where you can define a custom format. -If you choose "Chapter number without separator" for a chapter field, the separators that are specified for chapter number in Tools - Outline numbering are not displayed. -If you choose "chapter number" as the format for reference fields, only the number of the chapter heading containing the referenced object is displayed in the field. If the paragraph style for the chapter heading is not numbered, the field is left blank. -The following number range formats are for paragraphs formatted with numbered or bulleted lists: - - - -Category and number - - -The format contains everything between the beginning of the paragraph and directly after the number-range field - - - - -Caption text - - -The format contains the text following the number-range field up to the end of the paragraph - - - - -Number - - -The format only contains the reference number - - -
+ If you choose "Chapter number without separator" for a chapter field, the separators that are specified for chapter number in Tools - Outline numbering are not displayed. + If you choose "chapter number" as the format for reference fields, only the number of the chapter heading containing the referenced object is displayed in the field. If the paragraph style for the chapter heading is not numbered, the field is left blank. + The following number range formats are for paragraphs formatted with numbered or bulleted lists: + + + + Category and number + + + The format contains everything between the beginning of the paragraph and directly after the number-range field + + + + + Caption text + + + The format contains the text following the number-range field up to the end of the paragraph + + + + + Number + + + The format only contains the reference number + + +
-Inserts the field as static content, that is, the field cannot be updated. - +Inserts the field as static content, that is, the field cannot be updated. + -Layer -Select the chapter heading level that you want to include in the selected field. +Layer + Select the chapter heading level that you want to include in the selected field. -Offset in days/minutes -Enter the offset that you want to apply to a date or time field. -
-Value -Enter the contents that you want to add to a user-defined field. -
- - +Offset in days/minutes + Enter the offset that you want to apply to a date or time field. +
+ Value + Enter the contents that you want to add to a user-defined field. +
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04090200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04090200.xhp index 78e49d8174..66da064bd8 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04090200.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04090200.xhp @@ -108,7 +108,7 @@ You cannot use internal variables, such as page and chapter numbers, in condition expression. - Conditions and Variables The following examples use a variable called "x": @@ -161,7 +161,7 @@
The "equal" comparative operator must be represented by two equal signs (==) in a condition. For example, if you define a variable "x" with the value of 1, you can enter the condition as x==1. - User Data You can include user data when you define conditions. To change your user data, choose Tools - Options - $[officename] - User data. User data must be entered in the form of strings. You can query the user data with "==" (EQ), "!=" (NEQ), or "!"(NOT). The following table lists user data variables and their meanings: @@ -297,7 +297,7 @@ For example, to hide a paragraph, text, or a section from a user with a specific initial, such as "LM", enter the condition: user_initials=="LM". - Conditions and Database Fields You can define conditions for accessing databases, or database fields. For example, you can check the contents of a database field from a condition, or use database fields in logical expressions. The following table lists a few more examples of using databases in conditions: @@ -358,10 +358,10 @@ NOT Addressbook.Addresses.CompanyIf the COMPANY database field is empty, the condition is true and the paragraph is hidden.To display hidden paragraphs on the screen, you can choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Formatting Aids, and clear the Fields: Hidden paragraphs check box. - Examples of Conditions in FieldsThe following examples use the Conditional text field, although they can be applied to any fields that can be linked to a condition. The syntax used for conditions is also used for the Hidden text, Hidden paragraph, Any record or Next record fields. - To display conditional text based on the number of pages: @@ -383,7 +383,7 @@ Click Insert, and then click Close. - To display conditional text based on a user-defined Variable @@ -418,7 +418,7 @@ To edit the contents of the "Profit" variable, double-click the variable field. - To display conditional text based on the contents of a database field:The first part of this example inserts a space between the "First Name" and "Last Name" fields in a document, and the second part inserts text based on the contents of a field. This example requires that an address data source is registered with $[officename]. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120229.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120229.xhp index 0f9b8c1c42..ecd1772727 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120229.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120229.xhp @@ -47,10 +47,10 @@
- Entry data + Entry data Enter a short name and select the appropriate source type. You can now enter data into the other fields belonging for the entry. -Short name +Short name Displays the short name for the bibliography entry. You can only enter a name here if you are creating a new bibliography entry. @@ -82,7 +82,7 @@ This is where you select the desired entry data for your bibliography. -Type +Type Select the source for the bibliography entry.removed two paras Formatting bibliography entries diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04200000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04200000.xhp index be00fd2c1a..f292a83af5 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04200000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04200000.xhp @@ -59,25 +59,25 @@ Jump to Next Script. To specify if the script is printed at the end of the page or at the end of the document, choose File - Print - Options, and select the appropriate check box. - Contents + Contents -Script Type +Script Type Enter the type of script that you want to insert. The script is identified in the HTML source code by the tag <SCRIPT LANGUAGE="JavaScript">. -URL Adds a link to a script file. Click the URL radio button, and then enter the link in the box. You can also click the browse button (...), locate the file, and then click Insert. The linked script file is identified in the HTML source code by the following tags: <SCRIPT LANGUAGE="JavaScript" SRC="url"> /* ignore all text here */ </SCRIPT> -... Locate the script file that you want to link to, and then click Insert. -Text Enter the script code that you want to insert. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05040600.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05040600.xhp index ed87ac0702..28232c2455 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05040600.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05040600.xhp @@ -49,38 +49,38 @@
removed a note -Footnote area +Footnote area Set the height of the footnote area. -Not larger than page area +Not larger than page area Automatically adjusts the height of the footnote area depending on the number of footnotes. -Maximum Footnote Height +Maximum Footnote Height Sets a maximum height for the footnote area. Select this check box, and then enter the height. -Maximum Footnote Height +Maximum Footnote Height Enter the maximum height for the footnote area. -Distance from text Enter the amount of space to leave between the bottom page margin and the first line of text in the footnote area. - Separator Line Specifies the position and length of the separator line. -Position Select the horizontal alignment for the line that separates the main text from the footnote area. -Length Enter the length of the separator line as a percentage of the page width area. -Weight Select the formatting style for the separator line. If you do not want a separator line, choose "0.0 pt". -Spacing Enter the amount of space to leave between the separator line and the first line of the footnote area. To specify the spacing between two footnotes, choose Format - Paragraph, and then click the Indents & Spacing tab. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05060800.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05060800.xhp index b665028d9e..ff638acd8e 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05060800.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05060800.xhp @@ -54,30 +54,30 @@
- Link to + Link to Set the link properties. -URL +URL Enter the complete path to the file that you want to open. -Browse Locate the file that you want the hyperlink to open, and then click Open. The target file can be on your machine or on an FTP server in the Internet. -Name Enter a name for the hyperlink. -Frame +Frame Specify the name of the frame where you want to open the targeted file. The predefined target frame names are described here. - Image Map + Image Map Select the type of ImageMap that you want to use. The ImageMap settings override the hyperlink settings that you enter on this page. -Server-side image map Uses a server-side image map. -Client-side image map Uses the image map that you created for the selected object. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05140000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05140000.xhp index 1b70870dc5..1bb6beca65 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05140000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05140000.xhp @@ -55,7 +55,7 @@ To dock the Styles and Formatting window, drag its title bar to the left or to the right side of the workspace. To undock the window, double-click a free space on its toolbar. - How to apply a style: @@ -67,7 +67,7 @@ You can assign shortcut keys to Styles on the Tools - Customize - Keyboard tab page. The Styles and Formatting toolbar contains icons for formatting your documents: - Style Category @@ -190,7 +190,7 @@
More information about styles. - Applied Styles diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06100000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06100000.xhp index b7ce1cf926..c8f05fc716 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06100000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06100000.xhp @@ -58,23 +58,23 @@
- Sort criteria + Sort criteria -Keys 1 to 3 +Keys 1 to 3 Specifies additional sorting criteria. You can also combine sort keys. -Column 1 to 3 +Column 1 to 3 Enter the number of the table column that you want to use as a basis for sorting.removed a para -Key type 1 to 3 +Key type 1 to 3 Select the sorting option that you want to use. - Order Ascending @@ -84,41 +84,41 @@ -Descending Sorts in descending order (for example, 9, 8, 7 or z, y, x). - Direction -Columns Sorts the columns in the table according to the current sort options. -Rows Sorts the rows in the table or the paragraphs in the selection according to the current sort options. - Separator Paragraphs are separated by nonprinting paragraph marks. You can also specify that tabs or a character act as separators when you sort paragraphs. -Tabs If the selected paragraphs correspond to a list separated by tabs, select this option. -Character Enter the character that you want to use as a separator in the selected area. By using the separator, $[officename] can determine the position of the sorting key in the selected paragraph. -... Opens the Special Characters dialog, where you can select the character that you want to use as a separator. -Language Select the language that defines the sorting rules. Some languages sort special characters differently than other languages. -Match case Distinguishes between uppercase and lowercase letters when you sort a table. For Asian languages special handling applies. For Asian languages, select Match case to apply multi-level collation. In the multi-level collation, the primitive forms of the entries are first compared with the cases of the forms and diacritics ignored. If the forms are the same, the diacritics of the forms are compared. If the forms are still the same, the cases, character widths, and Japanese Kana differences of the forms are compared.UFI: see #112590# and #112507# diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/auto_numbering.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/auto_numbering.xhp index cf49dee4d7..6d10bcb750 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/auto_numbering.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/auto_numbering.xhp @@ -60,7 +60,7 @@ Choose Tools - AutoCorrect Options, click the Options tab, and then select “Apply numbering – symbol”. - Choose Format - AutoCorrect, and ensure that While Typing is selected. + Choose Format - AutoCorrect, and ensure that While Typing is selected. The automatic numbering option is only applied to paragraphs that are formatted with the "Default", "Text body", or "Text body indent" paragraph style. @@ -68,7 +68,7 @@ oldref="21">To Create a Numbered or Bulleted List While You Type - Type 1., i., or I. to start a numbered list. Type * or - to start a bulleted list. You can also type a right parenthesis after the number instead of a period , for example, 1) or i). + Type 1., i., or I. to start a numbered list. Type * or - to start a bulleted list. You can also type a right parenthesis after the number instead of a period , for example, 1) or i). Enter a space, type your text, and then press Enter. The new paragraph automatically receives the next number or bullet. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/auto_off.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/auto_off.xhp index fcc194e0ac..f46ea279bf 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/auto_off.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/auto_off.xhp @@ -66,7 +66,7 @@ Ctrl+Z. - To turn off most AutoCorrect features, remove the check mark from the menu Format - AutoCorrect - While Typing. + To turn off most AutoCorrect features, remove the check mark from the menu Format - AutoCorrect - While Typing. Choose Tools - AutoCorrect Options. - Click the Replace tab. + Click the Replace tab. - In the AutoCorrect list, select the word pair that you want to remove. + In the AutoCorrect list, select the word pair that you want to remove. - Click Delete. + Click Delete. To Stop Replacing Quotation Marks @@ -91,7 +91,7 @@ Choose Tools - AutoCorrect Options. - Click the Custom Quotes tab + Click the Custom Quotes tab Clear the “Replace” check box(es). @@ -103,7 +103,7 @@ Choose Tools – AutoCorrect Options. - Click the Options tab. + Click the Options tab. Clear the “Capitalize first letter of every sentence” check box. @@ -117,7 +117,7 @@ Choose Tools - AutoCorrect Options. - Click the Options tab. + Click the Options tab. Clear the “Apply border” check box. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/auto_spellcheck.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/auto_spellcheck.xhp index ad87e71b06..0e7964dc6c 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/auto_spellcheck.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/auto_spellcheck.xhp @@ -54,14 +54,14 @@ oldref="41">To Check Spelling Automatically While You Type - Activate the AutoSpellcheck icon on the Standard bar. + Activate the AutoSpellcheck icon on the Standard bar. - Right-click a word with a red wavy underline, and then choose a suggested replacement word from the list, or from the AutoCorrect submenu. + Right-click a word with a red wavy underline, and then choose a suggested replacement word from the list, or from the AutoCorrect submenu. If you choose a word from the AutoCorrect submenu, the underlined word and the replacement word are automatically added to the AutoCorrect list for the current language. To view the AutoCorrect list, choose Tools – AutoCorrect Options, and then click the Replace tab. - You can also add the underlined word to your custom dictionary by choosing Add. + You can also add the underlined word to your custom dictionary by choosing Add. To Exclude Words From the Spellcheck diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/autocorr_except.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/autocorr_except.xhp index d4aae67c09..2e4e173bb3 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/autocorr_except.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/autocorr_except.xhp @@ -49,15 +49,15 @@ Adding Exceptions to the AutoCorrect List - You can prevent AutoCorrect from correcting specific abbreviations or words that have mixed capital letters and lowercase letters. + You can prevent AutoCorrect from correcting specific abbreviations or words that have mixed capital letters and lowercase letters. Choose Tools - AutoCorrect Options, and then click the Exceptions tab. Do one of the following: - Type the abbreviation followed by a period in the Abbreviations (no subsequent capital) box and click New. - Type the word in the Words with TWo INitial CApitals box and click New. + Type the abbreviation followed by a period in the Abbreviations (no subsequent capital) box and click New. + Type the word in the Words with TWo INitial CApitals box and click New. To quickly undo an AutoCorrect replacement, press Command diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/autotext.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/autotext.xhp index bc5aded4aa..7396910600 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/autotext.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/autotext.xhp @@ -67,13 +67,13 @@ Select the category where you want to store the AutoText. - Type a name that is longer than four characters. This allows you to use the Display remainder of name as suggestion while typing AutoText option. If you want, you can modify the proposed shortcut. + Type a name that is longer than four characters. This allows you to use the Display remainder of name as suggestion while typing AutoText option. If you want, you can modify the proposed shortcut. - Click the AutoText button, and then choose New. + Click the AutoText button, and then choose New. - Click the Close button. + Click the Close button. Click in your document where you want to insert an AutoText entry. - Choose Edit - AutoText. + Choose Edit - AutoText. Select the AutoText that you want to insert, and then click @@ -97,16 +97,16 @@ oldref="45">To Print a List of AutoText Entries - Choose Tools - Macros - Organize Macros - %PRODUCTNAME Basic. + Choose Tools - Macros - Organize Macros - %PRODUCTNAME Basic. - In the Macro from list, double-click "%PRODUCTNAME Macros - Gimmicks". + In the Macro from list, double-click "%PRODUCTNAME Macros - Gimmicks". - Select "AutoText" and then click Run. A list of the current AutoText entries is generated in a separate text document. + Select "AutoText" and then click Run. A list of the current AutoText entries is generated in a separate text document. - Choose File - Print. + Choose File - Print. tables; backgrounds cells; backgrounds MW transferred 4 index entries from shared/guide/background.xhp and added 3 new entries -Defining Background Colors or Background Graphics +Defining Background Colors or Background Graphics MW built this file from splitting shared/guide/background.xhp You can define a background color or use a graphic as a background for various objects in $[officename] Writer. To Apply a Background To Text Characters @@ -57,10 +57,10 @@ Select the characters. - Choose Format - Character. + Choose Format - Character. - Click the Background tab, select the background color. + Click the Background tab, select the background color. To Apply a Background To a Paragraph @@ -69,10 +69,10 @@ Place the cursor in the paragraph or select several paragraphs. - Choose Format - Paragraph. + Choose Format - Paragraph. - On the Background tab page, select the background color or a background graphic. + On the Background tab page, select the background color or a background graphic. Place the cursor in the table in your text document. - Choose Table - Table Properties. + Choose Table - Table Properties. - On the Background tab page, select the background color or a background graphic. + On the Background tab page, select the background color or a background graphic. - In the For box, choose whether the color or graphic should apply to the current cell, the current row or the whole table. If you select several cells or rows before opening the dialog, the change applies to the selection. + In the For box, choose whether the color or graphic should apply to the current cell, the current row or the whole table. If you select several cells or rows before opening the dialog, the change applies to the selection. You may also use an icon to apply a background to table parts. - To apply a background color to cells, select the cells and click the color on the Background Color toolbar. + To apply a background color to cells, select the cells and click the color on the Background Color toolbar. To apply a background color to a text paragraph within a cell, place the cursor into the text paragraph, then click the color on the Background Color diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/border_object.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/border_object.xhp index eaf714494c..c03db769a6 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/border_object.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/border_object.xhp @@ -59,7 +59,7 @@ Select the object for which you want to define a border. - Click the Borders icon on the OLE-Object toolbar or Frame toolbar to open the Borders window. + Click the Borders icon on the OLE-Object toolbar or Frame toolbar to open the Borders window. Click one of the predefined border styles. This replaces the current border style of the object with the selected style. @@ -74,19 +74,19 @@ Choose Format - (object name) – Borders.
Replace (object name) with the actual name of the object type you selected. - In the User-defined area select the edge(s) that you want to appear in a common layout. Click on an edge in the preview to toggle the selection of an edge. + In the User-defined area select the edge(s) that you want to appear in a common layout. Click on an edge in the preview to toggle the selection of an edge. - Select a line style and color for the selected border style in the Line area. These settings apply to all border lines that are included in the selected border style. + Select a line style and color for the selected border style in the Line area. These settings apply to all border lines that are included in the selected border style. Repeat the last two steps for every border edge. - Select the distance between the border lines and the page contents in the Spacing to Contents area. + Select the distance between the border lines and the page contents in the Spacing to Contents area. - Click OK to apply the changes. + Click OK to apply the changes.
diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/border_page.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/border_page.xhp index 8cc62c0e03..c43a6440f1 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/border_page.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/border_page.xhp @@ -47,46 +47,46 @@ defining;page borders MW deleted "adding;" Defining Borders for Pages + oldref="15">Defining Borders for Pages In Writer, you define borders for page styles, not individual pages. All changes made to borders apply to all pages that use the same page style. Note that page style changes cannot be undone by the Undo function in $[officename]. To Set a Predefined Border Style - Choose Format - Page - Borders. + Choose Format - Page - Borders. - Select one of the default border styles in the Default area. + Select one of the default border styles in the Default area. - Select a line style and color for the selected border style in the Line area. These settings apply to all border lines that are included in the selected border style. + Select a line style and color for the selected border style in the Line area. These settings apply to all border lines that are included in the selected border style. - Select the distance between the border lines and the page contents in the Spacing to contents area. + Select the distance between the border lines and the page contents in the Spacing to contents area. - Click OK to apply the changes. + Click OK to apply the changes. To Set a Customized Border Style - Choose Format - Page - Borders. + Choose Format - Page - Borders. - In the User-defined area select the edge(s) that you want to appear in a common layout. Click on an edge in the preview to toggle the selection of an edge. + In the User-defined area select the edge(s) that you want to appear in a common layout. Click on an edge in the preview to toggle the selection of an edge. - Select a line style and color for the selected border style in the Line area. These settings apply to all border lines that are included in the selected border style. + Select a line style and color for the selected border style in the Line area. These settings apply to all border lines that are included in the selected border style. Repeat the last two steps for every border edge. - Select the distance between the border lines and the page contents in the Spacing to contents area. + Select the distance between the border lines and the page contents in the Spacing to contents area. - Click OK to apply the changes. + Click OK to apply the changes.
diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/borders.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/borders.xhp index 5bfb7d60d7..4c592d7152 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/borders.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/borders.xhp @@ -58,13 +58,13 @@ Choose Table - Table properties. - In the dialog, click the Borders tab. + In the dialog, click the Borders tab. - Choose the border options you want to apply and click OK. + Choose the border options you want to apply and click OK. - The options in the Line arrangement area can be used to apply multiple border styles. + The options in the Line arrangement area can be used to apply multiple border styles. Selection of cells Depending on the selection of cells, the area looks different. @@ -129,7 +129,7 @@
Default settings - Click one of the Default icons to set or reset multiple borders. + Click one of the Default icons to set or reset multiple borders. The thin gray lines inside an icon show the borders that will be reset or cleared. @@ -142,7 +142,7 @@ Examples - Select a block of about 8x8 cells, then choose Format - Cells - Borders. + Select a block of about 8x8 cells, then choose Format - Cells - Borders. default icons for borders @@ -159,7 +159,7 @@ Now you can continue to see which lines the other icons will set or remove. User defined settings - In the User defined area, you can click to set or remove individual lines. The preview shows lines in three different states. + In the User defined area, you can click to set or remove individual lines. The preview shows lines in three different states. Repeatedly click an edge or a corner to switch through the three different states. @@ -217,7 +217,7 @@ Examples - Select a single cell in a Writer table, then choose Table - Table properties - Borders. + Select a single cell in a Writer table, then choose Table - Table properties - Borders. Select a thick line style. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/calculate.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/calculate.xhp index b073827dd5..55aaf12f33 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/calculate.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/calculate.xhp @@ -58,7 +58,7 @@ You can also click the Formula icon on the Formula Bar, and then choose a function for your formula. - To reference cells in a Writer text table, enclose the cell address or the cell range in angle brackets. For example, to reference cell A1 from another cell, enter =<A1> into the cell. + To reference cells in a Writer text table, enclose the cell address or the cell range in angle brackets. For example, to reference cell A1 from another cell, enter =<A1> into the cell. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/calculate_clipboard.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/calculate_clipboard.xhp index f0f49ed9a0..49a1a42c0a 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/calculate_clipboard.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/calculate_clipboard.xhp @@ -48,13 +48,13 @@ Calculating and Pasting the Result of a Formula in a Text Document - If your text already contains a formula, for example "12+24*2", $[officename] can calculate, and then paste the result of the formula in your document, without using the Formula Bar. + If your text already contains a formula, for example "12+24*2", $[officename] can calculate, and then paste the result of the formula in your document, without using the Formula Bar. Select the formula in the text. The formula can only contain numbers and operators and cannot contain spaces. - Choose Tools - Calculate, or press Command + Choose Tools - Calculate, or press Command Ctrl+Plus Sign (+). diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/calculate_intable.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/calculate_intable.xhp index fbf0531e6e..bca54eea2e 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/calculate_intable.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/calculate_intable.xhp @@ -52,7 +52,7 @@ - Choose Insert - Table, and insert a table with one column and more than one row into a text document. + Choose Insert - Table, and insert a table with one column and more than one row into a text document. Type a number in each cell of the column, but leave the last cell in the column empty. @@ -65,7 +65,7 @@ Click in the first cell of the series you want to sum up, drag to the final cell, and then release.
$[officename] inserts a formula for calculating the sum of the values in the current column. - Press Enter, or click Apply in the Formula bar.
The sum of the values in the current column is entered in the cell. + Press Enter, or click Apply in the Formula bar.
The sum of the values in the current column is entered in the cell. If you enter a different number anywhere in the column, the sum is updated as soon as you click in the last column cell. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/calculate_intext.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/calculate_intext.xhp index c3a6e0b33c..989321140d 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/calculate_intext.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/calculate_intext.xhp @@ -61,7 +61,7 @@ Type the three numbers, separated by vertical slashes (|). - Press Enter. The result is inserted as a field into the document. + Press Enter. The result is inserted as a field into the document. To edit the formula, double-click the field in the document. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/calculate_intext2.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/calculate_intext2.xhp index 1f07d04bd4..333ad1ebef 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/calculate_intext2.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/calculate_intext2.xhp @@ -65,7 +65,7 @@ Click in a cell in the larger table that contains a number, press the plus sign (+), and then click in a different cell containing a number. - Press Enter. + Press Enter. If you want, you can format the table to behave as normal text. Insert the table into a frame, and then anchor the frame as a character. The frame remains anchored to the adjacent text when you insert or delete text. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/calculate_multitable.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/calculate_multitable.xhp index e3fb1fbe77..9632e90ef1 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/calculate_multitable.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/calculate_multitable.xhp @@ -65,7 +65,7 @@ Click in a cell containing a number, press the plus sign (+), and then click in a different cell containing a number. - Press Enter. + Press Enter. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/captions.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/captions.xhp index 73d2ef1cc1..f92e4a12a3 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/captions.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/captions.xhp @@ -67,7 +67,7 @@ Select the item that you want to add a caption to. - Choose Insert - Caption. + Choose Insert - Caption. Select the options that you want, and then click OK. If you want, you can also enter different text in the Category @@ -76,7 +76,7 @@ You can edit caption text directly in the document. A caption is formatted with the paragraph style that matches the name of the caption category. For example, if you insert a "Table" caption, the "Table" paragraph style is applied to the caption text. - $[officename] can automatically add a caption when you insert an object, graphic, frame, or table. Choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - AutoCaption. + $[officename] can automatically add a caption when you insert an object, graphic, frame, or table. Choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - AutoCaption. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/captions_numbers.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/captions_numbers.xhp index f394db1d2e..3b983a9cd8 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/captions_numbers.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/captions_numbers.xhp @@ -49,7 +49,7 @@ inserting;chapter numbers in captions MW changed "adding;" to "inserting;" Adding Chapter Numbers to Captions + oldref="14">Adding Chapter Numbers to Captions You can include chapter numbers in captions. Ensure that the text in your document is organized by chapters, and that the chapter titles and, if you want, the section titles, use one of the predefined heading paragraph styles. You must also assign a numbering option to the heading paragraph styles. @@ -58,7 +58,7 @@ Select the item that you want to add a caption to. - Choose Insert - Caption. + Choose Insert - Caption. Select a caption title from the Category @@ -67,7 +67,7 @@ box. - Click Options. + Click Options. In the Level @@ -78,10 +78,10 @@ Separator box, and then click OK. - In the Caption dialog, click OK. + In the Caption dialog, click OK. - $[officename] can automatically add a caption when you insert an object, graphic, or table. Choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - AutoCaption. + $[officename] can automatically add a caption when you insert an object, graphic, or table. Choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - AutoCaption.
AutoCaption dialog diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/change_header.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/change_header.xhp index a0e73b7f4d..0c5b16b470 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/change_header.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/change_header.xhp @@ -53,10 +53,10 @@ For example, you can create a page style that displays a particular header, and another page style that displays a different header. - Open a new text document, choose Format - Styles and Formatting, and then click the Page Styles icon. + Open a new text document, choose Format - Styles and Formatting, and then click the Page Styles icon. - Click the New Style from Selection icon and select New Styles from Selection from the submenu. + Click the New Style from Selection icon and select New Styles from Selection from the submenu. Type a name for the page in the Style name @@ -66,13 +66,13 @@ Double-click the name in the list to apply the style to the current page. - Choose Insert - Header, and choose the new page style from the list. + Choose Insert - Header, and choose the new page style from the list. Type the text that you want in the header. Position the cursor into the main text area outside of the header. - Choose Insert - Manual Break. + Choose Insert - Manual Break. In the Type diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/chapter_numbering.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/chapter_numbering.xhp index aae7059d74..f475c6d16d 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/chapter_numbering.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/chapter_numbering.xhp @@ -74,7 +74,7 @@ Click at the beginning of the text in the heading paragraph, after the number. - Press the Backspace key to delete the number. + Press the Backspace key to delete the number. tab. - Select the custom style in the Paragraph Style box. + Select the custom style in the Paragraph Style box. Click the heading level that you want to assign to the custom paragraph style in the Level list. - Click OK. + Click OK. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/conditional_text.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/conditional_text.xhp index dec3f49b46..6490e94495 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/conditional_text.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/conditional_text.xhp @@ -95,10 +95,10 @@ - Type the text that you want to display when the condition is met in the Then box. There is almost no limit to the length of the text that you can enter. You can paste a paragraph into this box. + Type the text that you want to display when the condition is met in the Then box. There is almost no limit to the length of the text that you can enter. You can paste a paragraph into this box. - Click Insert, and then click Close. + Click Insert, and then click Close. In this example, the conditional text is displayed when the value of the conditional variable is equal to 3. - Place your cursor in front of the field that you defined in the first part of this example, and then choose Edit - Fields. + Place your cursor in front of the field that you defined in the first part of this example, and then choose Edit - Fields. Replace the number in the Value diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/conditional_text2.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/conditional_text2.xhp index 394121272b..b9d058471c 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/conditional_text2.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/conditional_text2.xhp @@ -71,7 +71,7 @@ Type Page in the Else box. - Click Insert, and then click Close. + Click Insert, and then click Close. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/delete_from_dict.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/delete_from_dict.xhp index e7148912da..fc16d93155 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/delete_from_dict.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/delete_from_dict.xhp @@ -50,14 +50,14 @@ - Choose Tools - Options - Language Settings - Writing Aids. + Choose Tools - Options - Language Settings - Writing Aids. Select the user-defined dictionary that you want to edit in the User-defined list, and then click Edit. - Select the word that you want to delete in the Word list, and then click Delete. + Select the word that you want to delete in the Word list, and then click Delete. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/even_odd_sdw.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/even_odd_sdw.xhp index 9d30a9a299..d44a7e685e 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/even_odd_sdw.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/even_odd_sdw.xhp @@ -62,7 +62,7 @@ - $[officename] can automatically apply alternating page styles on even (left) and odd pages (right) in your document. For example, you can use page styles to display different headers and footers on even and odd pages. The current page style is displayed in the Status Bar at the bottom of the workplace. + $[officename] can automatically apply alternating page styles on even (left) and odd pages (right) in your document. For example, you can use page styles to display different headers and footers on even and odd pages. The current page style is displayed in the Status Bar at the bottom of the workplace.
@@ -74,22 +74,22 @@ icon. - In the list of page styles, right-click "Left Page" and choose Modify. + In the list of page styles, right-click "Left Page" and choose Modify. - Click the Organizer tab. + Click the Organizer tab. - Select "Right Page" in the Next Style box, and then click OK. + Select "Right Page" in the Next Style box, and then click OK. - In the list of page styles, right-click "Right Page" and choose Modify. + In the list of page styles, right-click "Right Page" and choose Modify. - Select "Left Page" in the Next Style box, and then click OK. + Select "Left Page" in the Next Style box, and then click OK. - Go to the first page in your document, and double-click "Right Page" in the list of page styles in the Styles and Formatting window. + Go to the first page in your document, and double-click "Right Page" in the list of page styles in the Styles and Formatting window. To add a header to one of the page styles, choose @@ -101,10 +101,10 @@ If two even or two odd pages directly follow each other in your document, Writer will insert an empty page by default. You can suppress those automatically generated empty pages from printing and from exporting to PDF. - Choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Print. + Choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Print. - Remove the check mark from Print automatically inserted blank pages. + Remove the check mark from Print automatically inserted blank pages.
diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/field_convert.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/field_convert.xhp index a412feb673..30983a7edd 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/field_convert.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/field_convert.xhp @@ -51,10 +51,10 @@ You can change a field to regular text, so that it is no longer updated. After you change a field to text, you cannot change the text back into a field. - Select the field and choose Edit - Cut. + Select the field and choose Edit - Cut. - Choose Edit - Paste Special. + Choose Edit - Paste Special. Click "Unformatted text" in the diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/fields.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/fields.xhp index 59cd127aa3..a1bcdfbadc 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/fields.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/fields.xhp @@ -53,8 +53,8 @@ Fields are used for data that changes in a document, such as the current date or the total number of pages in a document. Viewing Fields - Fields consist of a field name and the field content. To switch the field display between the field name or the field content, choose View - Field Names. - To display or hide field highlighting in a document, choose View - Field Shadings. To permanently disable this feature, choose Tools - Options - $[officename] - Appearance, and clear the check box in front of Field shadings. + Fields consist of a field name and the field content. To switch the field display between the field name or the field content, choose View - Field Names. + To display or hide field highlighting in a document, choose View - Field Shadings. To permanently disable this feature, choose Tools - Options - $[officename] - Appearance, and clear the check box in front of Field shadings. To change the color of field shadings, choose Tools - Options - $[officename] - Appearance, locate the Field shadings option, and then select a different color in the Color setting box. Field Properties @@ -106,7 +106,7 @@ Placeholder, hidden text, insert reference, variable, database, and user-defined fields display a help tip when you rest the mouse pointer over the field in a document. To enable this feature, ensure that the Extended Tipsoption (What's This?) is selected in the Help menu. Updating Fields - To update all of the fields in a document, press F9, or choose Edit - Select All, and then press F9. + To update all of the fields in a document, press F9, or choose Edit - Select All, and then press F9. To update a field that was inserted from a database, select the field, and then press F9. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/fields_date.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/fields_date.xhp index 69df26b4a2..b50331c86a 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/fields_date.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/fields_date.xhp @@ -52,7 +52,7 @@ You can insert the current date as a field that updates each time you open the document, or as a field that does not update. - Choose Insert - Fields - Other and click the Document tab. + Choose Insert - Fields - Other and click the Document tab. Click “Date” in the Type diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/fields_enter.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/fields_enter.xhp index 8c19afc6cb..ecdf29c63f 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/fields_enter.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/fields_enter.xhp @@ -46,7 +46,7 @@ input fields in text inserting;input fields MW deleted "adding;" -Adding Input Fields +Adding Input Fields An input field is a variable that you can click in a document to open a dialog where you can edit the variable. @@ -62,7 +62,7 @@ and type the text for the variable. - Click OK. + Click OK. To quickly open all input fields in a document for editing, press Ctrl+Shift+F9. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/fields_userdata.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/fields_userdata.xhp index f846f8803c..3efa954c88 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/fields_userdata.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/fields_userdata.xhp @@ -85,17 +85,17 @@ Select the text in the document that you want to hide. - Choose Insert - Section. + Choose Insert - Section. In the Hide area, select the Hide check box. - In the With Condition box, type user_lastname == "Doe", where "Doe" is the last name of the user that you want to hide the text from. + In the With Condition box, type user_lastname == "Doe", where "Doe" is the last name of the user that you want to hide the text from. - Click Insert and then save the document. + Click Insert and then save the document. The name of the hidden section can still be seen in the Navigator. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/finding.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/finding.xhp index e4e8c6f735..fa128de2a8 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/finding.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/finding.xhp @@ -61,16 +61,16 @@ To Find Text - Choose Edit - Find & Replace to open the Find & Replace dialog. + Choose Edit - Find & Replace to open the Find & Replace dialog. - Enter the text to find in the Search for text box. + Enter the text to find in the Search for text box. - Either click Find or Find All. + Either click Find or Find All. - When you click Find, Writer will show you the next text that is equal to your entry. You can watch and edit the text, then click Find again to advance to the next found text. + When you click Find, Writer will show you the next text that is equal to your entry. You can watch and edit the text, then click Find again to advance to the next found text. If you closed the dialog, you can press a key combination (Ctrl+Shift+F) to find the next text without opening the dialog. Alternatively, you can use the icons at the lower right of the document to navigate to the next text or to any other object in the document. When you click Find All, Writer selects all text that is equal to your entry. Now you can for example set all found text to bold, or apply a character style to all at once. @@ -78,34 +78,34 @@ Unlike searching text, replacing text cannot be restricted to the current selection only. - Choose Edit - Find & Replace to open the Find & Replace dialog. + Choose Edit - Find & Replace to open the Find & Replace dialog. - Enter the text to search in the Search for text box. + Enter the text to search in the Search for text box. - Enter the text to replace the found text in the Replace with text box. + Enter the text to replace the found text in the Replace with text box. - Either click Replace or Replace All. + Either click Replace or Replace All. - When you click Replace, Writer will search the whole document for the text in the Search for box, starting at the current cursor position. When text is found, Writer highlights the text and waits for your response. Click Replace to replace the highlighted text in the document with the text in the Replace with text box. Click Find to advance to the next found text without replacing the current selection. - When you click Replace All, Writer replaces all text that matches your entry. + When you click Replace, Writer will search the whole document for the text in the Search for box, starting at the current cursor position. When text is found, Writer highlights the text and waits for your response. Click Replace to replace the highlighted text in the document with the text in the Replace with text box. Click Find to advance to the next found text without replacing the current selection. + When you click Replace All, Writer replaces all text that matches your entry. To Find Styles You want to find all text in your document to which a certain Paragraph Style is assigned, for example the "Heading 2" style. - Choose Edit - Find & Replace to open the Find & Replace dialog. + Choose Edit - Find & Replace to open the Find & Replace dialog. - Click More Options to expand the dialog. + Click More Options to expand the dialog. Check Search for Styles.
The Search for text box now is a list box, where you can select any of the Paragraph Styles that are applied in the current document. - Select the style to search for, then click Find or Find All. + Select the style to search for, then click Find or Find All. To Find Formats @@ -113,29 +113,29 @@ Finding formats only finds direct character attributes, it does not find attributes applied as part of a style. - Choose Edit - Find & Replace to open the Find & Replace dialog. + Choose Edit - Find & Replace to open the Find & Replace dialog. - Click More Options to expand the dialog. + Click More Options to expand the dialog. - Click the Format button. + Click the Format button. - Click Find or Find All. + Click Find or Find All. More options The similarity search can find text that is almost the same as your search text. You can set the number of characters that are allowed to differ. - Check the Similarity search option and optionally click the ... button to change the settings. (Setting all three numbers to 1 works fine for English text.) - When you have enabled Asian language support under Tools - Options - Language Settings - Languages, the Find & Replace dialog offers options to search Asian text. + Check the Similarity search option and optionally click the ... button to change the settings. (Setting all three numbers to 1 works fine for English text.) + When you have enabled Asian language support under Tools - Options - Language Settings - Languages, the Find & Replace dialog offers options to search Asian text. The Navigator The Navigator is the main tool for finding and selecting objects. You can also use the Navigator to move and arrange chapters, providing an outline view to your document. - Choose Edit - Navigator to open the Navigator window. + Choose Edit - Navigator to open the Navigator window. Use the Navigator for inserting objects, links and references within the same document or from other open documents. See the Navigator guide for more information. - Click the icon with the blue circle at the bottom right part of your document to open the small Navigation window. + Click the icon with the blue circle at the bottom right part of your document to open the small Navigation window. Use the small Navigation window to quickly jump to the next object or find the next text in your document.
diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/footer_nextpage.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/footer_nextpage.xhp index a4e8444107..74836425f2 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/footer_nextpage.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/footer_nextpage.xhp @@ -52,24 +52,24 @@ The page number is only displayed if the following page exists. - Choose Insert - Footer and select the page style that you want to add the footer to. + Choose Insert - Footer and select the page style that you want to add the footer to. - Place the cursor in the footer and choose Insert - Fields - Other. + Place the cursor in the footer and choose Insert - Fields - Other. - In the Fields dialog, click the Document tab. + In the Fields dialog, click the Document tab. - Click 'Page' in the Type list and 'Next page' in the Select list. + Click 'Page' in the Type list and 'Next page' in the Select list. Click a numbering style in the Format list. - If you select 'Text' in the Format list, only the text that you enter in the Value box is displayed in the field. + If you select 'Text' in the Format list, only the text that you enter in the Value box is displayed in the field. - Click Insert to insert the field with the page number. + Click Insert to insert the field with the page number. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/footer_pagenumber.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/footer_pagenumber.xhp index 47d80b2364..8c9e05f016 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/footer_pagenumber.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/footer_pagenumber.xhp @@ -52,10 +52,10 @@ To Insert a Page Number - Choose Insert - Footer and select the page style that you want to add the footer to. + Choose Insert - Footer and select the page style that you want to add the footer to. - Choose Insert - Fields - Page Number. + Choose Insert - Fields - Page Number. If you want, you can align the page number field as you would text. @@ -65,7 +65,7 @@ Click in front of the page number field, type Page and enter a space; click after the field, enter a space and then type of and enter another space. - Choose Insert - Fields - Page Count. + Choose Insert - Fields - Page Count. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/footnote_usage.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/footnote_usage.xhp index 8eabbfd362..5daa018085 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/footnote_usage.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/footnote_usage.xhp @@ -59,7 +59,7 @@ Click in your document where you want to place the anchor of the note. - Choose Insert - Footnote/Endnote. + Choose Insert - Footnote/Endnote. In the Numbering @@ -71,7 +71,7 @@ or Endnote. - Click OK. + Click OK. Type the note. @@ -85,7 +85,7 @@ - You can also insert footnotes by clicking the Insert Footnote Directly icon on the Insert toolbar. + You can also insert footnotes by clicking the Insert Footnote Directly icon on the Insert toolbar. @@ -102,7 +102,7 @@ To edit the text of a footnote or endnote, click in the note, or click the anchor for the note in the text. - To change the format of a footnote, click in the footnote, press F11 to open the Styles and Formatting window, right-click "Footnote" in the list, and then choose Modify. + To change the format of a footnote, click in the footnote, press F11 to open the Styles and Formatting window, right-click "Footnote" in the list, and then choose Modify. To jump from the footnote or endnote text to the note anchor in the text, press PageUp. @@ -110,13 +110,13 @@ - To edit the numbering properties of a footnote or endnote anchor, click in front of the anchor, and choose Edit - Footnote/Endnote. + To edit the numbering properties of a footnote or endnote anchor, click in front of the anchor, and choose Edit - Footnote/Endnote. - To change the formatting that $[officename] applies to footnotes and endnotes, choose Tools - Footnotes/Endnotes. + To change the formatting that $[officename] applies to footnotes and endnotes, choose Tools - Footnotes/Endnotes. - To edit the properties of the text area for footnotes or endnotes, choose Format - Page, and then click the Footnote tab. + To edit the properties of the text area for footnotes or endnotes, choose Format - Page, and then click the Footnote tab. To remove a footnote, delete the footnote anchor in the text. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/footnote_with_line.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/footnote_with_line.xhp index 7f55f912f4..6343392f59 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/footnote_with_line.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/footnote_with_line.xhp @@ -56,13 +56,13 @@ Click in a footnote or endnote. - Choose Format - Styles and Formatting. + Choose Format - Styles and Formatting. - Right-click the Paragraph Style that you want to modify, for example, "Footnote", and choose Modify. + Right-click the Paragraph Style that you want to modify, for example, "Footnote", and choose Modify. - Click the Borders tab. + Click the Borders tab. In the Default @@ -77,7 +77,7 @@ box. If the background of the page is not white, select the color that best matches the background color. - In the Spacing to contents area, clear the Synchronize check box. + In the Spacing to contents area, clear the Synchronize check box. Enter a value in the Top @@ -85,7 +85,7 @@ boxes. - Click OK. + Click OK. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/globaldoc.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/globaldoc.xhp index 66136de433..0c2c6772b7 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/globaldoc.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/globaldoc.xhp @@ -74,7 +74,7 @@ A master document master.odm consists of some text and links to the subdocuments sub1.odt and sub2.odt. In each subdocument a new paragraph style with the same name Style1 is defined and used, and the subdocuments are saved. When you save the master document, the styles from the subdocuments are imported into the master document. First, the new style Style1 from the sub1.odt is imported. Next, the new styles from sub2.odt will be imported, but as Style1 now already is present in the master document, this style from sub2.odt will not be imported. In the master document you now see the new style Style1 from the first subdocument. All Style1 paragraphs in the master document will be shown using the Style1 attributes from the first subdocument. However, the second subdocument by itself will not be changed. You see the Style1 paragraphs from the second subdocument with different attributes, depending whether you open the sub2.odt document by itself or as part of the master document. - To avoid confusion, use the same document template for the master document and its subdocuments. This happens automatically when you create the master document and its subdocuments from an existing document with headings, using the command File - Send - Create Master Document. + To avoid confusion, use the same document template for the master document and its subdocuments. This happens automatically when you create the master document and its subdocuments from an existing document with headings, using the command File - Send - Create Master Document.
diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/globaldoc_howtos.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/globaldoc_howtos.xhp index 2e79a424c5..74eb5779c0 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/globaldoc_howtos.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/globaldoc_howtos.xhp @@ -73,7 +73,7 @@ - Choose File - Save. + Choose File - Save. - To remove a subdocument from the master document, right-click the subdocument in the Navigator list and choose Delete. The subdocument file is not deleted, only the entry in the Navigator is removed. + To remove a subdocument from the master document, right-click the subdocument in the Navigator list and choose Delete. The subdocument file is not deleted, only the entry in the Navigator is removed. - To add text to a master document, right-click an item in the Navigator list, and then choose Insert - Text. A text section is inserted before the selected item in the master document where you can type the text that you want. You cannot insert text next to an existing text entry in the Navigator.i81372 + To add text to a master document, right-click an item in the Navigator list, and then choose Insert - Text. A text section is inserted before the selected item in the master document where you can type the text that you want. You cannot insert text next to an existing text entry in the Navigator.i81372 @@ -102,7 +102,7 @@ - To add an index, such as a table of contents, right-click in the Navigator list, and then choose Insert - Index. + To add an index, such as a table of contents, right-click in the Navigator list, and then choose Insert - Index. @@ -113,12 +113,12 @@ - To update an index in a master document, select the index in the Navigator, and then click the Update icon. + To update an index in a master document, select the index in the Navigator, and then click the Update icon.
- When you insert an object like a frame or a picture into a master document, do not anchor the object "to page". Instead, set the anchor "to paragraph" on the Format - (Object type) - Type tab page, and then set the object's position relative to "Entire Page" in the Horizontal and Vertical list boxes. + When you insert an object like a frame or a picture into a master document, do not anchor the object "to page". Instead, set the anchor "to paragraph" on the Format - (Object type) - Type tab page, and then set the object's position relative to "Entire Page" in the Horizontal and Vertical list boxes. To Start Each Subdocument on a New Page @@ -126,10 +126,10 @@ Ensure that each subdocument starts with a heading that uses the same paragraph style, for example "Heading 1". - In the master document, choose Format - Styles and Formatting, and click the Paragraph Styles icon. + In the master document, choose Format - Styles and Formatting, and click the Paragraph Styles icon. - Right-click "Heading 1" and choose Modify. + Right-click "Heading 1" and choose Modify. Click the Text Flow @@ -141,10 +141,10 @@ box. - If you want each subdocument to start on an odd page, select With Page Style, and select "Right page" in the box. + If you want each subdocument to start on an odd page, select With Page Style, and select "Right page" in the box. - Click OK. + Click OK. Choose File - Export. - In the File format list, select a text document file format and click Export. + In the File format list, select a text document file format and click Export. The subdocuments will be exported as sections. Use Format - Sections to unprotect and remove sections, if you prefer a plain text document without sections. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/header_footer.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/header_footer.xhp index e5e60aa0e7..cdb65d8f5b 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/header_footer.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/header_footer.xhp @@ -49,13 +49,13 @@ oldref="38">About Headers and Footers Headers and footers are areas in the top and the bottom page margins, where you can add text or graphics. Headers and footers are added to the current page style. Any page that uses the same style automatically receives the header or footer that you add. You can insert Fields, such as page numbers and chapter headings, in headers and footers in a text document. - The page style for the current page is displayed in the Status Bar. + The page style for the current page is displayed in the Status Bar. - To add a header to a page, choose Insert - Header, and then select the page style for the current page from the submenu. + To add a header to a page, choose Insert - Header, and then select the page style for the current page from the submenu. - To add a footer to a page, choose Insert - Footer, and then select the page style for the current page from the submenu. + To add a footer to a page, choose Insert - Footer, and then select the page style for the current page from the submenu. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/header_pagestyles.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/header_pagestyles.xhp index 9e4149abb7..9bb053e039 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/header_pagestyles.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/header_pagestyles.xhp @@ -61,10 +61,10 @@ Open a new text document. - Choose Format - Styles and Formatting and click the Page Styles icon in the Styles and Formatting window. + Choose Format - Styles and Formatting and click the Page Styles icon in the Styles and Formatting window. - Right-click "Right Page" in the list of page styles and choose Modify. + Right-click "Right Page" in the list of page styles and choose Modify. In the Page Styles dialog, click the Header @@ -79,10 +79,10 @@ box, select "Left Page". - Click OK. + Click OK. - In the Styles and Formatting window, right-click "Left Page" in the list of page styles and choose Modify. + In the Styles and Formatting window, right-click "Left Page" in the list of page styles and choose Modify. In the Page Styles dialog, click the Header @@ -97,7 +97,7 @@ box, select "Right Page". - Click OK. + Click OK. Double-click "Right Page" in the list of page styles to apply the style to the current page. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/header_with_chapter.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/header_with_chapter.xhp index 9e59443b21..133f63c71a 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/header_with_chapter.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/header_with_chapter.xhp @@ -54,7 +54,7 @@ oldref="23">To Create a Paragraph Style for Chapter Titles - Choose Tools - Outline Numbering. + Choose Tools - Outline Numbering. In the Style @@ -73,7 +73,7 @@ box. - Click OK. + Click OK. list. - Click Insert and then click Close. + Click Insert and then click Close. The header on every page that uses the current page style automatically displays the chapter name and number. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/hidden_text.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/hidden_text.xhp index f2bf985956..c5e0a174d7 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/hidden_text.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/hidden_text.xhp @@ -47,20 +47,20 @@ hiding;text, with conditions variables;for hiding text mw deleted "comparisons;" and copied two entries to hidden_text_display.xhp and 2 entries to nonprintable_text.xhpMW added "variables;" -Hiding Text +Hiding Text You can use fields and sections to hide or display text in your document if a condition is met. Before you can hide text, you must first create a variable to use in the condition for hiding the text. To Create a Variable - Click in your document and choose Insert - Fields - Other. + Click in your document and choose Insert - Fields - Other. - Click the Variables tab and click "Set Variable" in the Type list. + Click the Variables tab and click "Set Variable" in the Type list. - Click "General" in the Format list. + Click "General" in the Format list. Type a name for the variable in the Name box, for example, Hide. @@ -69,7 +69,7 @@ Enter a value for the variable in the Value box, for example, 1. - To hide the variable in your document, select Invisible. + To hide the variable in your document, select Invisible. Click Insert and Close. @@ -82,16 +82,16 @@ Click in the document where you want to add the text. - Choose Insert - Fields - Other and click the Functions tab. + Choose Insert - Fields - Other and click the Functions tab. - Click "Hidden Text" in the Type list. + Click "Hidden Text" in the Type list. Enter a statement in the Condition box. For example, using the variable you previously defined, enter Hide==1. - Type the text that you want to hide in the Hidden text box. + Type the text that you want to hide in the Hidden text box. Click Insert and Close. @@ -104,10 +104,10 @@ Click in the paragraph where you want to add the text. - Choose Insert - Fields - Other and click the Functions tab. + Choose Insert - Fields - Other and click the Functions tab. - Click "Hidden Paragraph" in the Type list. + Click "Hidden Paragraph" in the Type list. Enter a statement in the Condition box. For example, using the variable you previously defined, enter Hide==1. @@ -116,7 +116,7 @@ Click Insert and Close. - You must enable this feature by removing the check mark from menu View - Hidden Paragraphs. When the check mark is set, you cannot hide any paragraph. + You must enable this feature by removing the check mark from menu View - Hidden Paragraphs. When the check mark is set, you cannot hide any paragraph. To Hide a Section @@ -124,7 +124,7 @@ Select the text that you want to hide in your document. - Choose Insert - Section. + Choose Insert - Section. In the Hide area, select Hide, and then enter an expression in the Condition box. For example, using the variable you previously defined, enter Hide==1. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/hidden_text_display.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/hidden_text_display.xhp index e8ab3ff3a4..dea4171c6b 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/hidden_text_display.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/hidden_text_display.xhp @@ -49,7 +49,7 @@ If you have a text that was hidden by defining a condition with a variable, you have several options to display the hidden text. Do one of the following: - Enable the check mark at View - Hidden Paragraphs. + Enable the check mark at View - Hidden Paragraphs. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/hyperlinks.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/hyperlinks.xhp index e69e08ad40..dd24a44857 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/hyperlinks.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/hyperlinks.xhp @@ -55,7 +55,7 @@ Open the document(s) containing the items you want to cross-reference. - On the Standard bar, click the Navigator icon. + On the Standard bar, click the Navigator icon. Click the arrow next to the Drag Mode icon, and ensure that Insert as Hyperlink diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indenting.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indenting.xhp index 3f3ff05b47..53d2801850 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indenting.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indenting.xhp @@ -51,7 +51,7 @@ mw made indents a two level entry, changed "paragraphs;" and copied "changing;indents" from writer guide "ruler.xhp" Indenting Paragraphs see i66307 -To change the measurement units, choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - General, and then select a new measurement unit in the Settings area. +To change the measurement units, choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - General, and then select a new measurement unit in the Settings area. You can change the indents for the current paragraph, or for all selected paragraphs, or for a Paragraph Style. You can also set indents using the ruler. To display the ruler, choose View - Ruler. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_delete.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_delete.xhp index 413b32626b..dccb8d8ebb 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_delete.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_delete.xhp @@ -57,11 +57,11 @@ Place the cursor immediately in front of the index entry in your document. - Choose Edit - Index Entry, and do one of the following: + Choose Edit - Index Entry, and do one of the following: - To cycle through the index entries in your document, click the next or the previous arrows in the Edit Index Entry dialog. + To cycle through the index entries in your document, click the next or the previous arrows in the Edit Index Entry dialog. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_edit.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_edit.xhp index 28779bfc79..69d33dbf55 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_edit.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_edit.xhp @@ -61,7 +61,7 @@ Right-click and choose an editing option from the menu. - You can also make changes directly to an index or table of contents. Right-click in the index or table of contents, choose Edit Index/Table, click Index/Table tab, and then clear the Protected from manual changes check box. + You can also make changes directly to an index or table of contents. Right-click in the index or table of contents, choose Edit Index/Table, click Index/Table tab, and then clear the Protected from manual changes check box. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_enter.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_enter.xhp index b8046ea518..c9c79abe09 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_enter.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_enter.xhp @@ -53,7 +53,7 @@ Click in a word, or select the words in your document that you want to use as an index entry. - Choose Insert - Indexes and Tables - Entry, and do one of the following: + Choose Insert - Indexes and Tables - Entry, and do one of the following: @@ -64,16 +64,16 @@ oldref="13">To Use a Custom Paragraph Style as a Table of Contents Entry - Choose Tools - Outline Numbering and click the Numbering tab. + Choose Tools - Outline Numbering and click the Numbering tab. - Select the paragraph style that you want to include in your table of contents in the Paragraph Style box. + Select the paragraph style that you want to include in your table of contents in the Paragraph Style box. - In the Level list, click the hierarchical level that you want to apply the paragraph style to. + In the Level list, click the hierarchical level that you want to apply the paragraph style to. - Click OK. You can now apply the style to headings in your document and include them in your table of contents. + Click OK. You can now apply the style to headings in your document and include them in your table of contents. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_form.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_form.xhp index fbe9a372c3..5bbe3ae58a 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_form.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_form.xhp @@ -52,27 +52,27 @@ Formatting an Index or a Table of Contents - You can apply different paragraph styles, assign hyperlinks to entries, change the layout of indexes, and change the background color of indexes in the Insert Index dialog. + You can apply different paragraph styles, assign hyperlinks to entries, change the layout of indexes, and change the background color of indexes in the Insert Index dialog. To Apply a Different Paragraph Style to an Index Level - Right-click in the index or table of contents, and then choose Edit Index/Table. + Right-click in the index or table of contents, and then choose Edit Index/Table. - Click the Styles tab. + Click the Styles tab. - Click an index level in the Levels list. + Click an index level in the Levels list. - Click the style that you want to apply in the Paragraph Style list. + Click the style that you want to apply in the Paragraph Style list. - Click the assign button <. + Click the assign button <. - Click OK. + Click OK. You can assign a cross-reference as a hyperlink to entries in a table of contents. - Right-click in the table of contents, and then choose Edit Index/Table. + Right-click in the table of contents, and then choose Edit Index/Table. - Click the Entries tab. + Click the Entries tab. In the Level list click the heading level that you want to assign hyperlinks to. - In the Structure area, click in the box in front of E#, and then click Hyperlink. + In the Structure area, click in the box in front of E#, and then click Hyperlink. - Click in the box behind the E, and then click Hyperlink. + Click in the box behind the E, and then click Hyperlink. Repeat for each heading level that you want to create hyperlinks for, or click the All button to apply the formatting to all levels. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_index.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_index.xhp index bd840257cc..fdf506cd97 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_index.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_index.xhp @@ -53,23 +53,23 @@ Click in your document where you want to insert the index. - Choose Insert - Indexes and Tables - Indexes and Tables. + Choose Insert - Indexes and Tables - Indexes and Tables. - On the Index/Table tab, select "Alphabetical Index" in the Type box. + On the Index/Table tab, select "Alphabetical Index" in the Type box. If you want to use a concordance file, select Concordance file in the Options area, click the File button, and then locate an existing file or create a new concordance file. - Set the formatting options for the index, either on the current tab, or on any of the other tabs of this dialog. For example, if you want to use single letter headings in your index, click the Entries tab, and then select Alphabetical delimiter. To change the formatting of levels in the index, click the Styles tab. + Set the formatting options for the index, either on the current tab, or on any of the other tabs of this dialog. For example, if you want to use single letter headings in your index, click the Entries tab, and then select Alphabetical delimiter. To change the formatting of levels in the index, click the Styles tab. - Click OK. + Click OK. - To update the index, right-click in the index, and then choose Update Index/Table. + To update the index, right-click in the index, and then choose Update Index/Table. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_literature.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_literature.xhp index c4f0be7120..9b9f998be0 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_literature.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_literature.xhp @@ -58,10 +58,10 @@ oldref="63">To Store Information in the Bibliography Database - Choose Tools - Bibliography Database + Choose Tools - Bibliography Database - Choose Insert - Record. + Choose Insert - Record. Type a name for the bibliography entry in the Short name @@ -79,10 +79,10 @@ Click in your document where you want to add the bibliography entry. - Choose Insert - Indexes and Tables - Bibliography Entry. + Choose Insert - Indexes and Tables - Bibliography Entry. - Select From document content and click New. + Select From document content and click New. Type a name for the bibliography entry in the Short name @@ -93,7 +93,7 @@ box, and then add additional information in the remaining boxes. - Click OK. + Click OK. In the Insert Bibliography Entry @@ -108,19 +108,19 @@ Click in your document where you want to add the bibliography entry. - Choose Insert - Indexes and Tables - Bibliography Entry. + Choose Insert - Indexes and Tables - Bibliography Entry. - Select From bibliography database. + Select From bibliography database. Select the name of the bibliography entry that you want to insert in the Short name box. - Click Insert and then click Close. + Click Insert and then click Close.
diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_multidoc.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_multidoc.xhp index 7dabd5f62f..496e80b1c3 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_multidoc.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_multidoc.xhp @@ -59,7 +59,7 @@ Insert - Section, select Link, click the browse button (...), and then locate and insert a named index section. - Create a master document, add as subdocuments the files that you want to include in the index, and then choose Insert - Index and Tables - Indexes and Tables. + Create a master document, add as subdocuments the files that you want to include in the index, and then choose Insert - Index and Tables - Indexes and Tables. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_toc.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_toc.xhp index a9017bb9c8..6da53cdb20 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_toc.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_toc.xhp @@ -55,16 +55,16 @@ Click in your document where you want to create the table of contents. - Choose Insert - Indexes and Tables - Indexes and Tables, and then click the Index/Table tab. + Choose Insert - Indexes and Tables - Indexes and Tables, and then click the Index/Table tab. - Select "Table of Contents" in the Type box. + Select "Table of Contents" in the Type box. Select any options that you want. - Click OK. + Click OK. If you want to use a different paragraph style as a table of contents entry, select the Additional Styles @@ -77,10 +77,10 @@ Do one of the following: - Right-click in the table of contents and choose Update Index/Table. + Right-click in the table of contents and choose Update Index/Table. - Choose Tools - Update - All Indexes and Tables. + Choose Tools - Update - All Indexes and Tables. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_userdef.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_userdef.xhp index acdb8541aa..df0039fcec 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_userdef.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_userdef.xhp @@ -55,7 +55,7 @@ Select a word or words that you want to add to a user-defined index. - Choose Insert - Indexes and Tables - Entry. + Choose Insert - Indexes and Tables - Entry. Click the New User-defined Index button next to the Index @@ -81,7 +81,7 @@ Click in the document where you want to insert the index. - Choose Insert - Indexes and Tables - Indexes and Tables. + Choose Insert - Indexes and Tables - Indexes and Tables. On the Index/Table tab, select the name of the user-defined index that you created in the Type @@ -93,7 +93,7 @@ Select any options that you want. - Click OK. + Click OK. If you want to use a different paragraph style as a table of contents entry, select Styles, and then click the (...) button next to the box. Click the style in the list, and then click the >> diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/insert_graphic_dialog.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/insert_graphic_dialog.xhp index 20a9b5ed91..2668208465 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/insert_graphic_dialog.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/insert_graphic_dialog.xhp @@ -52,10 +52,10 @@ Click in the document where you want to insert the graphic. - Choose Insert - Picture - From File. + Choose Insert - Picture - From File. - Locate the graphic file that you want to insert, and then click Open. + Locate the graphic file that you want to insert, and then click Open. By default, the inserted graphic is centered above the paragraph that you clicked in. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/insert_graphic_scan.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/insert_graphic_scan.xhp index b4d3dda2c9..3e87f7caf0 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/insert_graphic_scan.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/insert_graphic_scan.xhp @@ -49,14 +49,14 @@ To insert a scanned image, the scanner must be connected to your system and the scanner software drivers must be installed. The scanner must support the TWAIN standard. -The scanner must support the SANE standard. +The scanner must support the SANE standard. Click in the document where you want to insert the scanned image. - Choose Insert - Picture - Scan, and choose the scanning source from the submenu. + Choose Insert - Picture - Scan, and choose the scanning source from the submenu. Follow the scanning instructions. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/jump2statusbar.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/jump2statusbar.xhp index 5c8cead4fc..079f9dfdf4 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/jump2statusbar.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/jump2statusbar.xhp @@ -48,7 +48,7 @@ oldref="30">Going to Specific Bookmark To go to a specific bookmark in your document, hold down Ctrl and click -right-click in the Page field on the Status Bar, and then choose the bookmark. +right-click in the Page field on the Status Bar, and then choose the bookmark. Insert Bookmark diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/keyboard.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/keyboard.xhp index 49fccef514..9dd6ec440b 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/keyboard.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/keyboard.xhp @@ -55,14 +55,14 @@ oldref="5">To Insert Sections - Choose View - Toolbars - Insert to open the Insert toolbar. + Choose View - Toolbars - Insert to open the Insert toolbar. Press F6 until the focus is on the Insert toolbar. - Press the right arrow key until the Section icon is selected. + Press the right arrow key until the Section icon is selected. Press the down arrow key, and then press the right arrow key to set the width of the section that you want to insert. @@ -82,7 +82,7 @@ Standard toolbar. - Press the right arrow key until the Table icon is selected. + Press the right arrow key until the Table icon is selected. Press the down arrow key, and then use the arrow keys to select the number of columns and rows to include in the table. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/load_styles.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/load_styles.xhp index c0de27ebc1..39b3aa3b2e 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/load_styles.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/load_styles.xhp @@ -52,16 +52,16 @@ You can import styles from another document or template into the current document. - Choose Format - Styles and Formatting to open the Styles and Formatting window. + Choose Format - Styles and Formatting to open the Styles and Formatting window. - Click the arrow next to the New Style from Selection icon to open the submenu. + Click the arrow next to the New Style from Selection icon to open the submenu. - Choose Load styles. + Choose Load styles. - Use the check boxes at the bottom of the dialog to select the style types that you want to import. To replace styles in the current document that have the same name as the ones you are importing, select Overwrite. + Use the check boxes at the bottom of the dialog to select the style types that you want to import. To replace styles in the current document that have the same name as the ones you are importing, select Overwrite. Do one of the following: diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/navigator.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/navigator.xhp index 61fa84c798..965d1282cb 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/navigator.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/navigator.xhp @@ -56,10 +56,10 @@ The Navigatordisplays the different parts of your document, such as headings, tables, frames, objects, or hyperlinks. - To open the Navigator, press F5. + To open the Navigator, press F5. - To quickly jump to a location in your document, double-click an item listed in the Navigator window or enter the respective page number in the spin box. + To quickly jump to a location in your document, double-click an item listed in the Navigator window or enter the respective page number in the spin box. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/nonprintable_text.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/nonprintable_text.xhp index 146f8e5189..1c737cb8d5 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/nonprintable_text.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/nonprintable_text.xhp @@ -60,10 +60,10 @@ Options tab. - In the Properties area, clear the Print check box. + In the Properties area, clear the Print check box. - Click OK. + Click OK.
diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/number_sequence.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/number_sequence.xhp index 12fee7a6e9..393bce24bf 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/number_sequence.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/number_sequence.xhp @@ -72,7 +72,7 @@ - Click Insert, and then click Close. + Click Insert, and then click Close. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/numbering_lines.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/numbering_lines.xhp index 25c64deba5..ed00103314 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/numbering_lines.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/numbering_lines.xhp @@ -56,35 +56,35 @@ To Add Line Numbers to an Entire Document - Choose Tools - Line Numbering. + Choose Tools - Line Numbering. - Select Show numbering, and then select the options that you want. + Select Show numbering, and then select the options that you want. - Click OK. + Click OK. To Add Line Numbers to Specific Paragraphs - Choose Tools - Line Numbering. + Choose Tools - Line Numbering. - Select Show numbering. + Select Show numbering. - Press F11 to open the Styles and Formatting window, and then click the Paragraph Styles icon. + Press F11 to open the Styles and Formatting window, and then click the Paragraph Styles icon. - Right-click the "Default" paragraph style and choose Modify. + Right-click the "Default" paragraph style and choose Modify. All paragraph styles are based on the "Default" style. - Click the Numbering tab. + Click the Numbering tab. In the Line Numbering @@ -92,7 +92,7 @@ check box. - Click OK. + Click OK. Select the paragraph(s) where you want to add the line numbers. @@ -102,10 +102,10 @@ tab. - Select Include this paragraph in line numbering. + Select Include this paragraph in line numbering. - Click OK. + Click OK. You can also create a paragraph style that includes line numbering, and apply it to the paragraphs that you want to add line numbers to. @@ -132,7 +132,7 @@ box. - Click OK. + Click OK. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/numbering_paras.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/numbering_paras.xhp index 6949f80682..39b7834ffa 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/numbering_paras.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/numbering_paras.xhp @@ -51,7 +51,7 @@ Modifying Numbering in a Numbered List You can remove the numbering from a paragraph in a numbered list or change the number that a numbered list starts with. - If you want numbered headings, use the Tools - Outline Numbering menu command to assign a numbering to a paragraph style. Do not use the Numbering icon on the Formatting toolbar. + If you want numbered headings, use the Tools - Outline Numbering menu command to assign a numbering to a paragraph style. Do not use the Numbering icon on the Formatting toolbar. To Remove the Number From a Paragraph in a Numbered List @@ -69,14 +69,14 @@ Click anywhere in the numbered list. - Choose Format - Bullets and Numbering, and then click the Options tab. + Choose Format - Bullets and Numbering, and then click the Options tab. Enter the number you want the list to start with in the Start at box. - Click OK. + Click OK. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/page_break.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/page_break.xhp index a5fb09b70c..c59472b6d9 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/page_break.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/page_break.xhp @@ -72,13 +72,13 @@ oldref="10">To Delete a Manual Page Break That Occurs Before a Table - Right-click in the table, and choose Table. + Right-click in the table, and choose Table. - Click the Text Flow tab. + Click the Text Flow tab. - Clear the Break check box. + Clear the Break check box. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/pagebackground.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/pagebackground.xhp index 46828f209e..0cd0eb9882 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/pagebackground.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/pagebackground.xhp @@ -53,31 +53,31 @@ To Change the Page Background - Choose Format - Styles and Formatting. + Choose Format - Styles and Formatting. - Click the Page Styles icon. + Click the Page Styles icon. - In the list of page styles, right-click an item, and then choose New. + In the list of page styles, right-click an item, and then choose New. - On the Organizer tab page, type a name for the page style in the Name box. + On the Organizer tab page, type a name for the page style in the Name box. - In the Next Style box, select the page style that you want to apply to the next page. + In the Next Style box, select the page style that you want to apply to the next page. - Click the Background tab. + Click the Background tab. In the list box at the top, select whether you want a solid color or a graphic. Then select your options from the tab page. - Click OK. + Click OK.
@@ -85,10 +85,10 @@ Before you begin, ensure that you have created a page style that uses a page background. See To Change the Page Background for details. - Choose Format - Styles and Formatting. + Choose Format - Styles and Formatting. - Click the Page Styles icon. + Click the Page Styles icon. Double-click the page style that uses the page background that you want to apply. @@ -101,10 +101,10 @@ Click in front of the first character of the paragraph where you want to change the page background. - Choose Insert - Manual Break. + Choose Insert - Manual Break. - Select Page break. + Select Page break. In the Style @@ -114,7 +114,7 @@ - Click OK. + Click OK. If you want to change the page background later on in the document, repeat steps 1 to 3. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/pagenumbers.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/pagenumbers.xhp index 9e9c78c676..4d3e9ae9e5 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/pagenumbers.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/pagenumbers.xhp @@ -53,8 +53,8 @@ In Writer, a page number is a field that you can insert into your text. To Insert Page Numbers - Choose Insert - Fields - Page Number to insert a page number at the current cursor position. - If you see the text "Page number" instead of the number, choose View - Field names. + Choose Insert - Fields - Page Number to insert a page number at the current cursor position. + If you see the text "Page number" instead of the number, choose View - Field names. However, these fields will change position when you add or remove text. So it is best to insert the page number field into a header or footer that has the same position and that is repeated on every page. Choose Insert - Header - (name of page style) or Insert - Footer - (name of page style) to add a header or footer to all pages with the current page style. To Start With a Defined Page Number @@ -64,10 +64,10 @@ Click into the first paragraph of your document. - Choose Format - Paragraph - Text flow. + Choose Format - Paragraph - Text flow. - In the Breaks area, enable Insert. Enable With Page Style just to be able to set the new Page number. Click OK. + In the Breaks area, enable Insert. Enable With Page Style just to be able to set the new Page number. Click OK. The new page number is an attribute of the first paragraph of the page. @@ -75,10 +75,10 @@ You want roman page numbers running i, ii, iii, iv, and so on. - Double-click directly before the page number field. You see the Edit Fields dialog. + Double-click directly before the page number field. You see the Edit Fields dialog. - Select a number format and click OK. + Select a number format and click OK. Using Different Page Number Styles @@ -92,8 +92,8 @@ A manually inserted page break can be applied without or with a change of page styles. - If you just press Ctrl+Enter, you apply a page break without a change of styles. - If you choose Insert - Manual break, you can insert a page break without or with a change of style or with a change of page number. + If you just press Ctrl+Enter, you apply a page break without a change of styles. + If you choose Insert - Manual break, you can insert a page break without or with a change of style or with a change of page number. It depends on your document what is best: to use a manually inserted page break between page styles, or to use an automatic change. If you just need one title page with a different style than the other pages, you can use the automatic method: @@ -103,10 +103,10 @@ Click into the first page of your document. - Choose Format - Styles and Formatting. + Choose Format - Styles and Formatting. - In the Styles and Formatting window, click the Page Styles icon. + In the Styles and Formatting window, click the Page Styles icon. Double-click the "First Page" style. @@ -120,7 +120,7 @@ Click at the start of the first paragraph on the page where a different page style will be applied. - Choose Insert - Manual Break. You see the Insert Break dialog. + Choose Insert - Manual Break. You see the Insert Break dialog. In the Style list box, select a page style. You may set a new page number, too. Click OK. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/pageorientation.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/pageorientation.xhp index f5df3c65b1..00a59a324a 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/pageorientation.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/pageorientation.xhp @@ -61,16 +61,16 @@ If your text document consists only of pages with the same page style, you can change the page properties directly: - Choose Format - Page. + Choose Format - Page. - Click the Page tab. + Click the Page tab. Under Paper format, select “Portrait” or “Landscape”. - Click OK. + Click OK. To Change the Page Orientation Only for Some Pages @@ -80,54 +80,54 @@ To change the page orientation for all pages that share the same page style, you first need a page style, then apply that style: - Choose Format - Styles and Formatting. + Choose Format - Styles and Formatting. - Click the Page Styles icon. + Click the Page Styles icon. - Right-click a page style and choose New. The new page style initially gets all properties of the selected page style. + Right-click a page style and choose New. The new page style initially gets all properties of the selected page style. - On the Organizer tab page, type a name for the page style in the Name box, for example "My Landscape". + On the Organizer tab page, type a name for the page style in the Name box, for example "My Landscape". - In the Next Style box, select the page style that you want to apply to the next page that follows a page with the new style. See the section about the scope of page styles at the end of this help page. + In the Next Style box, select the page style that you want to apply to the next page that follows a page with the new style. See the section about the scope of page styles at the end of this help page. - Click the Page tab. + Click the Page tab. Under Paper format, select “Portrait” or “Landscape”. - Click OK. + Click OK. - Now you have defined a proper page style with the name "My Landscape". To apply the new style, double-click the "My Landscape" page style in the Styles and Formatting window. All pages in the current scope of page styles will be changed. If you defined the "next style" to be a different style, only the first page of the current scope of page styles will be changed. + Now you have defined a proper page style with the name "My Landscape". To apply the new style, double-click the "My Landscape" page style in the Styles and Formatting window. All pages in the current scope of page styles will be changed. If you defined the "next style" to be a different style, only the first page of the current scope of page styles will be changed.
The Scope of Page Styles You should be aware of the scope of page styles in %PRODUCTNAME. Which pages of your text document get affected by editing a page style? One Page Long Styles A page style can be defined to span one page only. The “First Page” style is an example. You set this property by defining another page style to be the "next style", on the Format - Page - Organizer tab page. A one page long style starts from the lower border of the current page style range up to the next page break. The next page break appears automatically when the text flows to the next page, which is sometimes called a "soft page break". Alternatively, you can insert a manual page break. - To insert a manual page break at the cursor position, press Ctrl+Enter or choose Insert - Manual Break and just click OK. + To insert a manual page break at the cursor position, press Ctrl+Enter or choose Insert - Manual Break and just click OK. Manually Defined Range of a Page style The “Default” page style does not set a different "next style" on the Format - Page - Organizer tab page. Instead, the "next style" is set also to be “Default”. All page styles that are followed by the same page style can span multiple pages. The lower and upper borders of the page style range are defined by "page breaks with style". All the pages between any two "page breaks with style" use the same page style. You can insert a "page break with style" directly at the cursor position. Alternatively, you can apply the "page break with style" property to a paragraph or to a paragraph style. Perform any one of the following commands: - To insert a "page break with style" at the cursor position, choose Insert - Manual Break, select a Style name from the listbox, and click OK. + To insert a "page break with style" at the cursor position, choose Insert - Manual Break, select a Style name from the listbox, and click OK. - To apply the "page break with style" property to the current paragraph, choose Format - Paragraph - Text Flow. In the Breaks area, activate Enable and With Page Style. Select a page style name from the listbox. + To apply the "page break with style" property to the current paragraph, choose Format - Paragraph - Text Flow. In the Breaks area, activate Enable and With Page Style. Select a page style name from the listbox. - To apply the "page break with style" property to the current paragraph style, right-click the current paragraph. Choose Edit Paragraph Style from the context menu. Click the Text Flow tab. In the Breaks area, activate Enable and With Page Style. Select a page style name from the listbox. + To apply the "page break with style" property to the current paragraph style, right-click the current paragraph. Choose Edit Paragraph Style from the context menu. Click the Text Flow tab. In the Breaks area, activate Enable and With Page Style. Select a page style name from the listbox. - To apply the "page break with style" property to an arbitrary paragraph style, choose Format - Styles and Formatting. Click the Paragraph Styles icon. Right-click the name of the paragraph style you want to modify and choose Modify. Click the Text Flow tab. In the Breaks area, activate Enable and With Page Style. Select a page style name from the listbox. + To apply the "page break with style" property to an arbitrary paragraph style, choose Format - Styles and Formatting. Click the Paragraph Styles icon. Right-click the name of the paragraph style you want to modify and choose Modify. Click the Text Flow tab. In the Breaks area, activate Enable and With Page Style. Select a page style name from the listbox.
diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/pagestyles.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/pagestyles.xhp index 94349ac66c..017d521c83 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/pagestyles.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/pagestyles.xhp @@ -45,7 +45,7 @@ defining;page styles styles;for pages MW deleted "applying;" and added "styles;" -Creating and Applying Page Styles +Creating and Applying Page Styles $[officename] uses page styles to specify the layout of a page, including the page orientation, background, margins, headers, footers, and text columns. To change the layout of an individual page in a document, you must create and apply a custom page style to the page. @@ -63,13 +63,13 @@ - Click the Page Styles icon. + Click the Page Styles icon. - In the list of page styles, right-click an item, and then choose New. + In the list of page styles, right-click an item, and then choose New. - On the Organizer tab, type a name in the Name box. + On the Organizer tab, type a name in the Name box. Do one of the following: @@ -78,7 +78,7 @@ - Use the tabs in the dialog to set the layout options for the page style, and then click OK. + Use the tabs in the dialog to set the layout options for the page style, and then click OK. Click in the document where you want a new page to start. - Choose Insert - Manual Break. + Choose Insert - Manual Break. - Select Page break. + Select Page break. In the Style box, select the page style that you want to apply to the page that follows the manual break. - Click OK. + Click OK. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/print_brochure.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/print_brochure.xhp index a58703a79c..74f13d4b40 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/print_brochure.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/print_brochure.xhp @@ -52,10 +52,10 @@ To Print a Brochure - Choose File - Print. + Choose File - Print. - In the Print dialog, click Properties. + In the Print dialog, click Properties. In the properties dialog for your printer, set the paper orientation to landscape. @@ -64,10 +64,10 @@ If your printer prints duplex, and because brochures always print in landscape mode, you should use the "duplex - short edge" setting in your printer setup dialog. - Return to Print dialog, and click Options. + Return to Print dialog, and click Options. - In the Pages area of the Printer Options dialog, select Brochure. + In the Pages area of the Printer Options dialog, select Brochure. For a printer that automatically prints on both sides of a page, specify to print right pages and left pages. @@ -75,10 +75,10 @@ - In the Print dialog, click OK. + In the Print dialog, click OK. - If %PRODUCTNAME prints the pages in the wrong order, open the Printer Options dialog, select Reversed, and then print the document again. + If %PRODUCTNAME prints the pages in the wrong order, open the Printer Options dialog, select Reversed, and then print the document again. \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/print_preview.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/print_preview.xhp index 91e21cec45..034d3f3b01 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/print_preview.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/print_preview.xhp @@ -51,14 +51,14 @@ - Choose File - Page Preview. + Choose File - Page Preview. - Use the zoom icons on the Page Preview bar to reduce or enlarge the view of the page. - To print your document scaled down, print the zoomed preview. Click Print options page view icon to set the print options. + Use the zoom icons on the Page Preview bar to reduce or enlarge the view of the page. + To print your document scaled down, print the zoomed preview. Click Print options page view icon to set the print options. - Use the arrow keys or the arrow icons on the Page Preview bar to scroll through the document. + Use the arrow keys or the arrow icons on the Page Preview bar to scroll through the document.
diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/print_small.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/print_small.xhp index 70ff3b30d3..391a4eae6d 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/print_small.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/print_small.xhp @@ -48,12 +48,12 @@ reduced printing of multiple pages MW changed "overviews;" Printing Multiple Pages on One Sheet + oldref="17">Printing Multiple Pages on One Sheet In Page Preview mode, you have the option to print multiple pages on one sheet. - Choose File - Page Preview. + Choose File - Page Preview. Do one of the following: diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/printer_tray.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/printer_tray.xhp index af8605de3b..edbd8edd73 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/printer_tray.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/printer_tray.xhp @@ -49,21 +49,21 @@ Use page styles to specify different paper sources for different pages in your document. - Choose Format - Styles and Formatting. + Choose Format - Styles and Formatting. Click the Page Styles icon. - Right-click the page style in the list that you want to specify the paper source for, and then choose Modify. + Right-click the page style in the list that you want to specify the paper source for, and then choose Modify. In the Paper tray box, select the paper tray that you want to use. - Click OK. + Click OK. Repeat steps 1-5 for each page style that you want to specify the paper for. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/printing_order.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/printing_order.xhp index 083a6792e3..7d765fbc7f 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/printing_order.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/printing_order.xhp @@ -48,10 +48,10 @@ - Choose File - Print. + Choose File - Print. - Click Options button. + Click Options button. In the Pages diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/protection.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/protection.xhp index 32219dbddf..3eca2b98c1 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/protection.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/protection.xhp @@ -49,7 +49,7 @@ protecting;tables and sections cells;protecting/unprotecting mw transferred 4 index entries from shared/guide/protection.xhp, then changed "sections;" and "tables;", then added 3 new entries -Protecting Content in %PRODUCTNAME Writer +Protecting Content in %PRODUCTNAME Writer The following is an overview of the different ways of protecting contents in %PRODUCTNAME Writer from being modified, deleted or viewed. Turning on protection - Select the text. Choose Insert - Section - Section, then under Write protection mark the Protect and With password check boxes. (If the section already exists: Format - Sections.) Enter and confirm a password of at least 5 characters. + Select the text. Choose Insert - Section - Section, then under Write protection mark the Protect and With password check boxes. (If the section already exists: Format - Sections.) Enter and confirm a password of at least 5 characters. @@ -70,7 +70,7 @@ Turning off protection - Choose Format - Sections - Section and under Write protection clear the Protect check box. Enter the correct password. + Choose Format - Sections - Section and under Write protection clear the Protect check box. Enter the correct password. @@ -85,7 +85,7 @@ Turning on protection - Place the cursor in a cell or select cells. Right-click to open the context menu, then choose Cell - Protect. + Place the cursor in a cell or select cells. Right-click to open the context menu, then choose Cell - Protect. @@ -93,8 +93,8 @@ Turning off protection - Place the cursor in the cell or select the cells. First, if necessary, choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Formatting Aids and mark Cursor in protected areas - Enable. Then right-click the cell to open the context menu, choose Cell - Unprotect. - Select the table in the Navigator, open the context menu and select Table - Unprotect. + Place the cursor in the cell or select the cells. First, if necessary, choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Formatting Aids and mark Cursor in protected areas - Enable. Then right-click the cell to open the context menu, choose Cell - Unprotect. + Select the table in the Navigator, open the context menu and select Table - Unprotect. Use Shift+Ctrl+T to remove protection for the entire current table or all selected tables. @@ -111,7 +111,7 @@ Place the cursor in the index/table of contents. - From the context menu choose Edit Index/Table. On the Index/Table tab page, mark Protected against manual changes. + From the context menu choose Edit Index/Table. On the Index/Table tab page, mark Protected against manual changes. @@ -119,9 +119,9 @@ Turning off protection - Place the cursor in the index. First of all, if necessary, under Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Formatting Aids , mark Cursor in protected areas - Enable. - From the context menu choose Edit Index/Table. On the Index/Table tab page, unmark Protected against manual changes. - In the Navigator, select the index, then open the context menu in the Navigator and select Index - Read-only. + Place the cursor in the index. First of all, if necessary, under Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Formatting Aids , mark Cursor in protected areas - Enable. + From the context menu choose Edit Index/Table. On the Index/Table tab page, unmark Protected against manual changes. + In the Navigator, select the index, then open the context menu in the Navigator and select Index - Read-only. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/references.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/references.xhp index 6d87b6197b..75ffbd20e5 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/references.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/references.xhp @@ -66,13 +66,13 @@ Select the text that you want to use as a target for the cross-reference. - Choose Insert - Cross-reference. + Choose Insert - Cross-reference. In the Type list, select “Set Reference”. - Type a name for the target in the Name box. The selected text is displayed in the Value box. + Type a name for the target in the Name box. The selected text is displayed in the Value box. Click Insert. The name of the target is added to the Selection @@ -87,54 +87,54 @@ Position the cursor in the text where you want to insert a cross-reference. - Choose Insert - Cross-reference to open the dialog, if it is not open already. + Choose Insert - Cross-reference to open the dialog, if it is not open already. - In the Type list, select "Insert Reference". + In the Type list, select "Insert Reference". - In the Selection list, select the target that you want to cross-reference. + In the Selection list, select the target that you want to cross-reference. - In the Insert reference to list, select the format for the cross-reference. The format specifies the type of information that is displayed as the cross-reference. For example, "Reference" inserts the target text, and "Page" inserts the page number where the target is located. For footnotes the footnote number is inserted. + In the Insert reference to list, select the format for the cross-reference. The format specifies the type of information that is displayed as the cross-reference. For example, "Reference" inserts the target text, and "Page" inserts the page number where the target is located. For footnotes the footnote number is inserted. - Click Insert. + Click Insert. - Click Close when finished. + Click Close when finished. Cross-Referencing an Object - You can cross-reference most objects in your document, such as graphics, drawing objects, OLE objects, and tables, so long as they have a caption. To add a caption to an object, select the object, and then choose Insert - Caption. + You can cross-reference most objects in your document, such as graphics, drawing objects, OLE objects, and tables, so long as they have a caption. To add a caption to an object, select the object, and then choose Insert - Caption. Click in the document where you want to insert the cross-reference. - Choose Insert - Cross-reference. + Choose Insert - Cross-reference. - In the Type list, select the caption category of the object. + In the Type list, select the caption category of the object. - In the Selection list, select the caption number of the object that you want to cross-reference. + In the Selection list, select the caption number of the object that you want to cross-reference. - In the Insert reference to list, select the format of the cross-reference. The format specifies the type of information that is displayed as the cross-reference. For example, "Reference" inserts the caption category and caption text of the object. + In the Insert reference to list, select the format of the cross-reference. The format specifies the type of information that is displayed as the cross-reference. For example, "Reference" inserts the caption category and caption text of the object. - Click Insert. + Click Insert. - Click Close when finished. + Click Close when finished. Updating Cross-References To manually update the cross-references in a document, press F9. - Choose View - Fields to switch between viewing the reference names and the reference contents. + Choose View - Fields to switch between viewing the reference names and the reference contents. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/references_modify.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/references_modify.xhp index 1ed3615ec5..13ddae4f7c 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/references_modify.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/references_modify.xhp @@ -51,13 +51,13 @@ Click in front of the cross-reference that you want to modify. - If you cannot see the field shading of the cross-reference, choose View - Field Shadings or press Ctrl+F8. + If you cannot see the field shading of the cross-reference, choose View - Field Shadings or press Ctrl+F8. - Choose Edit - Fields. + Choose Edit - Fields. - Set the options that you want, and then click OK. + Set the options that you want, and then click OK. Use the arrow buttons in the Edit Fields diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/registertrue.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/registertrue.xhp index 8dee7a4e7e..e7a19601ac 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/registertrue.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/registertrue.xhp @@ -58,7 +58,7 @@ Select the whole document. - Choose Format - Page - Page. + Choose Format - Page - Page. Select the Register-true checkbox and click OK. @@ -69,11 +69,11 @@ Do one of the following: - Select all the paragraphs you want to exempt, then choose Format - Paragraph - Indents & Spacing. - Open the Styles and Formatting window, click the Paragraph Style you want to exempt, right-click that style, choose Modify. In the dialog, click the Indents & Spacing tab. + Select all the paragraphs you want to exempt, then choose Format - Paragraph - Indents & Spacing. + Open the Styles and Formatting window, click the Paragraph Style you want to exempt, right-click that style, choose Modify. In the dialog, click the Indents & Spacing tab. - Clear the Register-true checkbox. + Clear the Register-true checkbox.
diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/removing_line_breaks.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/removing_line_breaks.xhp index 88827e2f26..9b41f96748 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/removing_line_breaks.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/removing_line_breaks.xhp @@ -59,10 +59,10 @@ - On the Options tab, ensure that Combine single line paragraphs if length greater than 50% is selected. To change the minimum percentage for the line length, double-click the option in the list, and then enter a new percentage. + On the Options tab, ensure that Combine single line paragraphs if length greater than 50% is selected. To change the minimum percentage for the line length, double-click the option in the list, and then enter a new percentage. - Click OK. + Click OK. Select the text containing the line breaks that you want to remove. @@ -72,7 +72,7 @@ box on the Formatting bar, choose “Default”. - Choose Format - AutoCorrect - Apply. + Choose Format - AutoCorrect - Apply.
diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/reset_format.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/reset_format.xhp index 89772e7bac..ee1dbff6df 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/reset_format.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/reset_format.xhp @@ -57,7 +57,7 @@ You can quickly exit manual formatting by pressing the right-arrow key. For example, if you have pressed Ctrl+B to apply the bold typeface to the text that you type, press the right arrow to return to the default character format of the paragraph. - To reset all direct formatting of existing text, select that text, then choose the menu command Format - Default Formatting. + To reset all direct formatting of existing text, select that text, then choose the menu command Format - Default Formatting. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/ruler.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/ruler.xhp index 00b7d7adc4..e607ffbe44 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/ruler.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/ruler.xhp @@ -53,7 +53,7 @@ mw made "indent settings..." a two level entry and cut "changing;indents" Using Rulers - To show or hide rulers, choose View - Ruler. To show the vertical ruler, choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - View, and then select Vertical ruler in the Ruler area. + To show or hide rulers, choose View - Ruler. To show the vertical ruler, choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - View, and then select Vertical ruler in the Ruler area. Adjusting Page Margins The margins of a page are indicated by the filled areas at the ends of the rulers. @@ -68,7 +68,7 @@ To change the first line indent of a selected paragraph, drag the top left triangle on the horizontal ruler to a new location. - You can also double-click anywhere on the horizontal ruler, and adjust the indents in the Paragraph dialog. + You can also double-click anywhere on the horizontal ruler, and adjust the indents in the Paragraph dialog.
diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/search_regexp.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/search_regexp.xhp index d066989d41..5d1d14e71c 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/search_regexp.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/search_regexp.xhp @@ -35,60 +35,63 @@ - - Using Wildcards in Text Searches - /text/swriter/guide/search_regexp.xhp - - - + +Using Wildcards in Text Searches +/text/swriter/guide/search_regexp.xhp + + + wildcards, see regular expressions - searching; with wildcards - regular expressions;searching - examples for regular expressions +searching; with wildcards +regular expressions;searching +examples for regular expressions +characters;finding all +invisible characters;finding mw deleted "wildcards;" and inserted wildcards crossreference Using Wildcards in Text Searches +oldref="15">Using Wildcards in Text Searches - You can use wildcards when you find and replace text in a document. For example, "s.n" finds "sun" and "son". - - - Choose Edit - Find & Replace. - - - Click More Options to expand the dialog. - - - Select the Regular expressions check box. - - - In the Search for - box, type the search term and the wildcard(s) that you want to use in your search. - - - Click Find - or - Find All. - - - Regular Expression Examples - - - The wildcard for a single character is a period (.). - - - The wildcard for zero or more occurrences of the previous character is an asterisk. For example: "123*" finds "12" "123", and "1233". - - - The wildcard combination to search for zero or more occurrences of any character is a period and asterisk (.*). - - - The wildcard for the end of a paragraph is a dollar sign ($). The wildcard character combination for the start of a paragraph is a caret and a period (^.). - - - You can only search for regular expressions within the same paragraph. That is, you cannot search for one term in a paragraph and a different term in the next paragraph. -
- List of Wildcards -
- +Wildcards or placeholders can be used to search for some unspecified or even invisible characters. +You can use wildcards when you find and replace text in a document. For example, "s.n" finds "sun" and "son". + + +Choose Edit - Find & Replace. + + +Click More Options to expand the dialog. + + +Select the Regular expressions check box. + + +In the Search for box, type the search term and the wildcard(s) that you want to use in your search. + + +Click Find or Find All. + + +Regular Expression Examples + + +The wildcard for a single character is a period (.). + + +The wildcard for zero or more occurrences of the previous character is an asterisk. For example: "123*" finds "12" "123", and "1233". + + +The wildcard combination to search for zero or more occurrences of any character is a period and asterisk (.*). + + +The wildcard for the end of a paragraph is a dollar sign ($). The wildcard character combination for the start of a paragraph is a caret and a period (^.). + + +The wildcard for a tab character is \t. + + +You can only search for regular expressions within the same paragraph. That is, you cannot search for one term in a paragraph and a different term in the next paragraph. +
+List of Wildcards +
+ \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/section_edit.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/section_edit.xhp index 0b475a1fac..2b9b0f9786 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/section_edit.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/section_edit.xhp @@ -49,12 +49,12 @@ hiding;sections Editing Sections + oldref="13">Editing Sections You can protect, hide, and convert sections to normal text in your document. - Choose Format - Sections. + Choose Format - Sections. In the Section @@ -67,7 +67,7 @@ - Set the other options that you want, and then click OK. + Set the other options that you want, and then click OK. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/section_insert.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/section_insert.xhp index 1f4423d840..d4e9ab7859 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/section_insert.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/section_insert.xhp @@ -59,27 +59,27 @@ If you select a text that occurs within a paragraph, the text is automatically converted into a new paragraph. - Choose Insert - Section. + Choose Insert - Section. In the New Section box, type a name for the section. - Set the options for the section, and then click Insert. + Set the options for the section, and then click Insert. To Insert a Section as a Link Before you can insert a section as link, you must first create sections in the source document. - When you open a document that contains linked sections, $[officename] prompts you to update the contents of the sections. To manually update a link, choose Tools - Update - Links. + When you open a document that contains linked sections, $[officename] prompts you to update the contents of the sections. To manually update a link, choose Tools - Update - Links. You can also insert linked sections in HTML documents. When you view the page in a web browser, the content of the sections corresponds to the content of the sections at the time the HTML document was last saved. Click in your document where you want to insert the linked section. - Choose Insert - Section. + Choose Insert - Section. In the New Section @@ -96,14 +96,14 @@ box. - Locate the document containing the section that you want to link to, and then click Insert. + Locate the document containing the section that you want to link to, and then click Insert. In the Section box, select the section that you want to insert. - Click Insert. + Click Insert. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/send2html.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/send2html.xhp index e26d831411..96ebf8aab3 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/send2html.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/send2html.xhp @@ -55,14 +55,14 @@ Apply one of the default $[officename] heading paragraph styles, for example, "Heading 1", to the paragraphs where you want to generate a new HTML page. - Choose File - Send - Create HTML Document. + Choose File - Send - Create HTML Document. In the Styles box, select the paragraph style that you want to use to generate a new HTML page. - Enter a path and a name for the HTML document, and then click Save. + Enter a path and a name for the HTML document, and then click Save. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/smarttags.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/smarttags.xhp index 09835ec8aa..6221aaf545 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/smarttags.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/smarttags.xhp @@ -55,7 +55,7 @@ To install a Smart Tag, do one of the following: - Save the *.oxt extension file to your hard drive, then double-click the *.oxt file in your file manager. Alternatively, in %PRODUCTNAME choose Tools - Extension Manager to open the Extension Manager, click Add and browse to the file. + Save the *.oxt extension file to your harddrive, then double-click the *.oxt file in your file manager. Alternatively, in %PRODUCTNAME choose Tools - Extension Manager to open the Extension Manager, click Add and browse to the file. Click a Smart Tag *.oxt file link on a web page and open the link with the default application. This requires a properly configured Web browser. @@ -64,7 +64,7 @@ Smart Tags Menu Any text in a Writer document can be marked with a Smart Tag, by default a magenta colored underline. You can change the color in Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME - Appearance. When you point to a Smart Tag, a tip help informs you to Ctrl-click to open the Smart Tags menu. If you don't use a mouse, position the cursor inside the marked text and open the context menu by Shift+F10. - In the Smart Tags menu you see the available actions that are defined for this Smart Tag. Choose an option from the menu. The Smart Tags Options command opens the Smart Tags page of Tools - Autocorrect Options. + In the Smart Tags menu you see the available actions that are defined for this Smart Tag. Choose an option from the menu. The Smart Tags Options command opens the Smart Tags page of Tools - Autocorrect Options. To Enable and Disable Smart Tags When you have installed at least one Smart Tags extension, you see the Smart Tags page in Tools - Autocorrect Options. Use this dialog to enable or disable Smart Tags and to manage the installed tags. Text that is recognized as a Smart Tag is not checked by the automatic spellcheck. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/spellcheck_dialog.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/spellcheck_dialog.xhp index 3df8959043..125ac74d13 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/spellcheck_dialog.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/spellcheck_dialog.xhp @@ -56,7 +56,7 @@ Click in the document, or select the text that you want to check. - Choose Tools - Spelling and Grammar. + Choose Tools - Spelling and Grammar. When a possible spelling error is encountered, the Spellcheck @@ -64,9 +64,9 @@ Do one of the following: - To accept a correction, click the suggestion, and then click Change. - Edit the sentence in the upper text box, and then click Change. - To add the unknown word to a user-defined dictionary, click Add. + To accept a correction, click the suggestion, and then click Change. + Edit the sentence in the upper text box, and then click Change. + To add the unknown word to a user-defined dictionary, click Add.
diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/stylist_fillformat.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/stylist_fillformat.xhp index ee02470759..962785a2ac 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/stylist_fillformat.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/stylist_fillformat.xhp @@ -54,7 +54,7 @@ You can quickly apply styles, such as paragraph and character styles, in your document by using the Fill Format Mode in the Styles and Formatting window. - Choose Format - Styles and Formatting. + Choose Format - Styles and Formatting. Click the icon of the style category that you want to apply. @@ -68,13 +68,13 @@ Move the mouse pointer to where you want to apply the style in the document, and click. To apply the style to more than one item, drag to select the items, and then release. - Press Esc when finished. + Press Esc when finished.
- - + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/stylist_fromselect.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/stylist_fromselect.xhp index a82b917155..4ae74a254f 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/stylist_fromselect.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/stylist_fromselect.xhp @@ -52,7 +52,7 @@ oldref="35">To Create a New Style From a Manually Formatted Selection - Choose Format - Styles and Formatting. + Choose Format - Styles and Formatting. Click the icon of the style category that you want to create. @@ -69,14 +69,14 @@ box. - Click OK. + Click OK. To Create a New Style by Drag-And-Drop - Choose Format - Styles and Formatting. + Choose Format - Styles and Formatting. Click the icon of the style category that you want to create. @@ -85,11 +85,11 @@ Select at least one character, or object, in the style that you want to copy. For page and frame styles, select at least one character or object in the page or frame. - Drag the character or object to the Styles and Formatting window and release. + Drag the character or object to the Styles and Formatting window and release. For paragraph and character styles, you can drag-and-drop onto the respective icon in the Styles and Formatting window. You do not need to open that style category in advance. - You can also drag-and-drop a frame into the Styles and Formatting window to create a new frame style: Click the frame, wait a moment with the mouse button pressed down, but without moving the mouse, then drag to the Styles and Formatting window and drop the frame onto the Frame Styles icon. + You can also drag-and-drop a frame into the Styles and Formatting window to create a new frame style: Click the frame, wait a moment with the mouse button pressed down, but without moving the mouse, then drag to the Styles and Formatting window and drop the frame onto the Frame Styles icon.
diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/table_cellmerge.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/table_cellmerge.xhp index 5086c0c7ed..498da189cf 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/table_cellmerge.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/table_cellmerge.xhp @@ -56,7 +56,7 @@ Select the adjacent cells. - Choose Table - Merge Cells. + Choose Table - Merge Cells. To Split Cells @@ -65,7 +65,7 @@ Place the cursor in the cell to be split. - Choose Table - Split Cells. + Choose Table - Split Cells. A dialog allows you to split the cell into two or more cells, horizontally or vertically. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/table_delete.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/table_delete.xhp index 82b4f0bdce..b6d287ba9b 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/table_delete.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/table_delete.xhp @@ -49,7 +49,7 @@ You can delete a table from your document, or delete the contents of the table. - To delete a whole table, click in the table, and then choose Table - Delete - Table. + To delete a whole table, click in the table, and then choose Table - Delete - Table. To delete the contents of a table, click in the table, press Command diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/table_insert.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/table_insert.xhp index 9049df3bf6..bc30c97f2f 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/table_insert.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/table_insert.xhp @@ -60,13 +60,13 @@ Place the cursor in your document where you want to insert the table. - On the Standard bar, click the arrow next to the Table icon. + On the Standard bar, click the arrow next to the Table icon. In the table grid, drag to select the numbers of rows and columns that you want, and then release. - To cancel, drag to the other side until Cancel appears in the preview area of the grid.make it RTL compliant + To cancel, drag to the other side until Cancel appears in the preview area of the grid.make it RTL compliant To Insert a Table With a Menu Command @@ -74,13 +74,13 @@ Place the cursor in your document where you want to insert the table. - Choose Table - Insert - Table. + Choose Table - Insert - Table. - In the Size area, enter the number of rows and columns. + In the Size area, enter the number of rows and columns. - Select the options that you want, click OK. + Select the options that you want, click OK. In the spreadsheet, drag to select the cells. - Choose Edit - Copy. + Choose Edit - Copy. In your text document, do one of the following: diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/table_repeat_multiple_headers.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/table_repeat_multiple_headers.xhp index 21a575ecc9..8aae55f216 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/table_repeat_multiple_headers.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/table_repeat_multiple_headers.xhp @@ -54,7 +54,7 @@ You can repeat a table heading on each new page that the table spans. - Choose Table - Insert - Table. + Choose Table - Insert - Table. Select the Heading @@ -65,7 +65,7 @@ Select the number of rows and columns for the table. - Click OK. + Click OK. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/table_sizing.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/table_sizing.xhp index 655f06effa..79076a622f 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/table_sizing.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/table_sizing.xhp @@ -81,26 +81,26 @@ Rest the mouse pointer over the column dividing line on the ruler until the pointer becomes a separator icon, and then drag the line to a new location. - Hold down Command + Hold down Command Ctrl and then click and drag a line to scale all cells right or above the line proportionally. - Place the cursor in a cell in the column, hold down the Option + Place the cursor in a cell in the column, hold down the Option Alt key, and then press the left or the right arrow key. - To increase the distance from the left edge of the page to the edge of the table, hold down Option + To increase the distance from the left edge of the page to the edge of the table, hold down Option Alt+Shift, and then press the right arrow key. - You can specify the behavior for the arrow keys by choosing Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Table, and selecting the options that you want in the Keyboard handling area. + You can specify the behavior for the arrow keys by choosing Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Table, and selecting the options that you want in the Keyboard handling area. To Change the Width of a Cell - Hold down Option+Command + Hold down Option+Command Alt+Ctrl, and then press the left or the right arrow key Changing the Height of a Row - To change the height of a row, place the cursor in a cell in the row, hold down the Option + To change the height of a row, place the cursor in a cell in the row, hold down the Option Alt key, and then press the up or the down arrow key. Resizing a Whole Table To change the width and height of a table, do one of the following: @@ -112,8 +112,8 @@ Click inside the table. Choose Table - Table Properties to open a dialog and set the properties to the numbers. - To wrap text to the sides of a table, and to arrange two tables next to another, you must insert the tables into a frame. Click inside the table, press Command -Ctrl+A twice to select the whole table, then choose Insert - Frame. + To wrap text to the sides of a table, and to arrange two tables next to another, you must insert the tables into a frame. Click inside the table, press Command +Ctrl+A twice to select the whole table, then choose Insert - Frame. Tables within HTML pages do not offer the full range of properties and commands as tables in OpenDocument format. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/tablemode.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/tablemode.xhp index f5deecc31e..389dd53ce1 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/tablemode.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/tablemode.xhp @@ -60,15 +60,15 @@ - Fixed - changes only affect the adjacent cell, and not the entire table. For example, when you widen a cell, the adjacent cell becomes narrower, but the width of the table remains constant. +Fixed - changes only affect the adjacent cell, and not the entire table. For example, when you widen a cell, the adjacent cell becomes narrower, but the width of the table remains constant. - Fixed, proportional - changes affect the entire table, and wide cells shrink more than narrow cells. For example, when you widen a cell, the adjacent cells become proportionally narrower, but the width of the table remains constant. +Fixed, proportional - changes affect the entire table, and wide cells shrink more than narrow cells. For example, when you widen a cell, the adjacent cells become proportionally narrower, but the width of the table remains constant. - Variable - changes affect the table size. For example, when you widen a cell, the width of the table increases. +Variable - changes affect the table size. For example, when you widen a cell, the width of the table increases. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/template_create.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/template_create.xhp index 94246db9b5..1be6ca96ec 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/template_create.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/template_create.xhp @@ -53,7 +53,7 @@ Create a document and add the content and formatting styles that you want. - Choose File - Templates - Save. + Choose File - Templates - Save. In the New Template @@ -64,7 +64,7 @@ list. - Click OK. + Click OK. To create a document based on the template, choose diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/template_default.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/template_default.xhp index c51d656269..1d881647ae 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/template_default.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/template_default.xhp @@ -56,40 +56,40 @@ Create a document and the content and formatting styles that you want. - Choose File - Templates - Save. + Choose File - Templates - Save. - In the New Template box, type a name for the new template. + In the New Template box, type a name for the new template. In the Categories list, select "My Templates", and then click OK. - Choose File - Templates - Organize. + Choose File - Templates - Organize. In the category list, double-click the "My Templates" folder. - Right-click the template that you created, and choose Set as Default Template. + Right-click the template that you created, and choose Set as Default Template. - Click Close. + Click Close. To Reset the Default Template - Choose File - Templates - Organize. + Choose File - Templates - Organize. Right-click a folder in the category list, choose Reset Default Template - Text Document. - Click Close. + Click Close. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/text_animation.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/text_animation.xhp index 0ce7043996..2c7d59ae7d 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/text_animation.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/text_animation.xhp @@ -62,7 +62,7 @@ box, select the animation that you want. - Set the properties of the effect, and then click OK. + Set the properties of the effect, and then click OK. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/text_capital.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/text_capital.xhp index df18d0a352..fc15a72f82 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/text_capital.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/text_capital.xhp @@ -53,7 +53,7 @@ Changing the Case of Text You can change the case of text, format text with small capitals, or capitalize the first letter of each word in a selection. - When you apply a formatting to your text by Format - Character, the text stays the same, it is only displayed in another way. On the other hand, when you choose Format - Change Case, the text is permanently changed. + When you apply a formatting to your text by Format - Character, the text stays the same, it is only displayed in another way. On the other hand, when you choose Format - Change Case, the text is permanently changed. To Capitalize Text diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/text_centervert.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/text_centervert.xhp index 4bc14b21b7..ab9a7082e2 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/text_centervert.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/text_centervert.xhp @@ -53,7 +53,7 @@ Select the text that you want to center on the page. - Choose Insert - Frame. + Choose Insert - Frame. In the Anchor @@ -70,7 +70,7 @@ boxes. - Click OK. + Click OK. To hide the borders of the frame, select the frame, and then choose Format - Frame/Object. Click the Borders tab, and then click in the diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/text_direct_cursor.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/text_direct_cursor.xhp index 9481de122c..d0a1f89fa3 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/text_direct_cursor.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/text_direct_cursor.xhp @@ -52,7 +52,7 @@ oldref="24">Using the Direct Cursor The direct cursor allows you to enter text anywhere on a page. - To set the behavior of the direct cursor, choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Formatting Aids. + To set the behavior of the direct cursor, choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Formatting Aids. On the Tools bar, click the Direct Cursor icon diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/text_emphasize.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/text_emphasize.xhp index 2d8ddd6187..b1d5ce54f5 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/text_emphasize.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/text_emphasize.xhp @@ -53,16 +53,16 @@ Select the text and apply a different font style or effect, such as bold. - Right-click in a paragraph, choose Paragraph, set the options that you want, for example, the background color, and then click OK. + Right-click in a paragraph, choose Paragraph, set the options that you want, for example, the background color, and then click OK. Select the text, and then choose Insert - Frame. - Use the Text tool on the Drawing toolbar. + Use the Text tool on the Drawing toolbar. - Use Fontwork. To open the Fontwork window, click the Fontwork Gallery icon on the Drawing bar. + Use Fontwork. To open the Fontwork window, click the Fontwork Gallery icon on the Drawing bar. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/text_frame.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/text_frame.xhp index 833b7fa567..befb5894bb 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/text_frame.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/text_frame.xhp @@ -61,7 +61,7 @@ Select the text that you want to include in the frame. - Choose Insert - Frame, and click OK. + Choose Insert - Frame, and click OK. To edit the contents of a text frame, click in the frame, and make the changes that you want. - To edit a frame, select the frame, right-click, and then choose a formatting option. You can also right-click the selected frame, and choose Frame. + To edit a frame, select the frame, right-click, and then choose a formatting option. You can also right-click the selected frame, and choose Frame. To resize a text frame, click an edge of the frame, and drag one of the edges or corners of the frame. Hold down Shift while you drag to maintain the proportion of the frame. @@ -85,10 +85,10 @@ Select the text frame (you see the eight handles). - Choose Format - Frame/Object - Options. + Choose Format - Frame/Object - Options. - In the Properties area, unmark the Print check box and click OK. + In the Properties area, unmark the Print check box and click OK. Moves the cursor up or down one line. - (Command+Option + (Command+Option Ctrl+Alt) Moves the current paragraph up or down. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/text_rotate.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/text_rotate.xhp index 78a7202e70..09eb30e54c 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/text_rotate.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/text_rotate.xhp @@ -70,7 +70,7 @@ Drag one of the corner handles of the text object. - You can also right-click the text object, choose Position and Size, click the Rotation tab, and then enter a rotation angle or a new position for the object. + You can also right-click the text object, choose Position and Size, click the Rotation tab, and then enter a rotation angle or a new position for the object.
Show Draw Functions diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/textdoc_inframe.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/textdoc_inframe.xhp index 52a4d32b88..0cb7bd94de 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/textdoc_inframe.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/textdoc_inframe.xhp @@ -55,10 +55,10 @@ Place the cursor in the document where you want to insert the file. - Choose Insert - File. + Choose Insert - File. - Locate the text document that you want to insert, and then click OK. + Locate the text document that you want to insert, and then click OK. The contents of the text document are embedded into the current document and are not updated if the source file is changed. If you want the contents to automatically update when you change the source document, insert the file as a link. @@ -69,10 +69,10 @@ Place the cursor in the document where you want to insert the file. - Choose Insert - Section. + Choose Insert - Section. - Type a name in the New Section box, and then select the Link check box. + Type a name in the New Section box, and then select the Link check box. In the File Name @@ -84,10 +84,10 @@ If you want, set the formatting options for the section. - Click Insert. + Click Insert. - $[officename] automatically updates the contents of the inserted section whenever the source document is changed. To manually update the contents of the section, choose Tools - Update - Update All. + $[officename] automatically updates the contents of the inserted section whenever the source document is changed. To manually update the contents of the section, choose Tools - Update - Update All. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/using_hyphen.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/using_hyphen.xhp index fd1d87a730..e96843c607 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/using_hyphen.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/using_hyphen.xhp @@ -57,17 +57,17 @@ oldref="51">To Automatically Hyphenate Text in a Paragraph - Right-click in a paragraph, and choose Paragraph. + Right-click in a paragraph, and choose Paragraph. - Click the Text Flow tab. + Click the Text Flow tab. In the Hyphenation area, select the Automatically check box. - Click OK. + Click OK. For example, enable the automatic hyphenation option for the "Default" paragraph style, and then apply the style to the paragraphs that you want to hyphenate. - Choose Format - Styles and Formatting, and then click the Paragraph Styles icon. + Choose Format - Styles and Formatting, and then click the Paragraph Styles icon. - Right-click the paragraph style that you want to hyphenate, and then choose Modify. + Right-click the paragraph style that you want to hyphenate, and then choose Modify. Click the Text Flow tab. - In the Hyphenation area, select the Automatically check box. + In the Hyphenation area, select the Automatically check box. - Click OK. + Click OK. Apply the style to the paragraphs that you want to hyphenate. @@ -101,7 +101,7 @@ To Manually Hyphenate Single Words To quickly insert a hyphen, click in the word where you want to add the hyphen, and then press Command Ctrl+Hyphen(-). - If you insert a manual hyphen in a word, the word is only hyphenated at the manual hyphen. No additional automatic hyphenation is applied for this word. A word with a manual hyphen will be hyphenated without regard to the settings on the Text Flow tab page. + If you insert a manual hyphen in a word, the word is only hyphenated at the manual hyphen. No additional automatic hyphenation is applied for this word. A word with a manual hyphen will be hyphenated without regard to the settings on the Text Flow tab page. To Manually Hyphenate Text in a Selection @@ -109,7 +109,7 @@ Select the text that you want to hyphenate. - Choose Tools - Language - Hyphenation. + Choose Tools - Language - Hyphenation. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/using_numbered_lists.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/using_numbered_lists.xhp index 3652480b01..7652c55fa2 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/using_numbered_lists.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/using_numbered_lists.xhp @@ -61,7 +61,7 @@ . - To remove bullets, select the bulleted paragraphs, and then click the Bullets On/Off icon on the Formatting Bar. + To remove bullets, select the bulleted paragraphs, and then click the Bullets On/Off icon on the Formatting Bar. To Format Bullets To change the formatting of a bulleted list, choose Format - Bullets and Numbering. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/using_numbered_lists2.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/using_numbered_lists2.xhp index 24aed3fb93..d3330fb0d9 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/using_numbered_lists2.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/using_numbered_lists2.xhp @@ -48,7 +48,7 @@ inserting;numbering MW changed "adding;" to "inserting;" Adding Numbering + oldref="15">Adding Numbering To Add Numbering to a List @@ -61,13 +61,13 @@ . - To change the formatting and the hierarchy of a numbered list, click in the list, and then open the Bullets and Numbering toolbar. + To change the formatting and the hierarchy of a numbered list, click in the list, and then open the Bullets and Numbering toolbar. - To remove numbering, select the numbered paragraphs, and then click the Numbering On/Off icon on the Formatting Bar. + To remove numbering, select the numbered paragraphs, and then click the Numbering On/Off icon on the Formatting Bar. To Format a Numbered List - To change the formatting of a numbered list, click in the list, then choose Format - Bullets and Numbering. + To change the formatting of a numbered list, click in the list, then choose Format - Bullets and Numbering.
diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/using_numbering.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/using_numbering.xhp index 4d604e87a3..9811318db1 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/using_numbering.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/using_numbering.xhp @@ -46,7 +46,7 @@ paragraph styles;numbering MW deleted "applying;" Numbering and Numbering Styles + oldref="30">Numbering and Numbering Styles You can apply numbering to a paragraph manually or with a paragraph style. To Apply Numbering Manually @@ -70,7 +70,7 @@ To apply the same bullet or numbering format to all paragraphs in the list, select all paragraphs, choose Format - Bullets and Numbering, and then click a format. - You can also use the commands on the Bullets and Numbering toolbar to edit a numbered or bulleted list. To change the numbering or bullet format, click the Bullets and Numbering icon. + You can also use the commands on the Bullets and Numbering toolbar to edit a numbered or bulleted list. To change the numbering or bullet format, click the Bullets and Numbering icon. To Apply Numbering With a Paragraph Style Paragraph Styles give you greater control over numbering that you apply in a document. When you change the numbering format of the style, all paragraphs using the style are automatically updated. @@ -80,7 +80,7 @@ icon. - Right-click the paragraph style that you want to apply numbering to, and then choose Modify. + Right-click the paragraph style that you want to apply numbering to, and then choose Modify. Click the Outline & Numbering @@ -90,7 +90,7 @@ In the Numbering Style box, select the type of numbering that you want to use. - Click OK. + Click OK. Apply the style to the paragraphs that you want to add numbering to. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/using_thesaurus.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/using_thesaurus.xhp index e0d4fbde93..e3617d5430 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/using_thesaurus.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/using_thesaurus.xhp @@ -58,7 +58,7 @@ Click in the word that you want to look up. - Choose Tools - Language - Thesaurus, or press Command + Choose Tools - Language - Thesaurus, or press Command Ctrl+F7. @@ -72,7 +72,7 @@ list. - Click OK. + Click OK. To look up the word in a different language, click Language diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/word_completion.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/word_completion.xhp index df829b50a3..c56698ce8c 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/word_completion.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/word_completion.xhp @@ -72,7 +72,7 @@ Choose Tools - AutoCorrect Options - Word Completion. - Clear Enable word completion. + Clear Enable word completion .
diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/word_completion_adjust.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/word_completion_adjust.xhp index efa0e97417..61b47f8df9 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/word_completion_adjust.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/word_completion_adjust.xhp @@ -48,19 +48,19 @@ weekdays; automatically completing months; automatically completing mw copied two entries from word_completion.xhp and created three new entries -Fine-Tuning the Word Completion for Text Documents +Fine-Tuning the Word Completion for Text Documents MW created this guide by splitting word_completion.xhp If you like it that $[officename] automatically completes the words that you frequently use, you can make further adjustments to refine that behavior. If you want, you can also save the current list of collected words so that it can be used in the next session. To fine-tune the word completion choose Tools – AutoCorrect Options - Word Completion and select any of the following options: To Insert an Additional Space Character - Select Append space. + Select Append space. The space character is appended after you type the first character of the next word after the auto-completed word. The space character is suppressed if the next character is a delimiter, such as a full stop or a new line character. To Define the Accept Key - Choose the key to accept the suggested word using the Accept with list box. + Choose the key to accept the suggested word using the Accept with list box. To Select the Minimum Number of Characters - Use the Min. word length box to set the minimum number of characters a word must have to be collected into the list. + Use the Min. word length box to set the minimum number of characters a word must have to be collected into the list. To Select the Scope of Collected Words - Select When closing a document, save the list for later use in other documents. + Select When closing a document, save the list for later use in other documents. Now the list is also valid for other documents that you open. When you close the last %PRODUCTNAME document, the word list is deleted. If you do not select the checkbox, the list is only valid as long as the current document is open. If you want the word list to exist longer than the current %PRODUCTNAME session, save it as a document, as described in the following section. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/words_count.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/words_count.xhp index a99997f2f5..2ccd09e0a6 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/words_count.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/words_count.xhp @@ -57,10 +57,10 @@ If you want to count only some text of your document, select the text. - Choose Tools - Word Count. + Choose Tools - Word Count. - To get some more statistics about the document, choose File - Properties - Statistics. + To get some more statistics about the document, choose File - Properties - Statistics. File - Properties - Statistics diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/wrap.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/wrap.xhp index b09bf35860..9504d77fc7 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/wrap.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/wrap.xhp @@ -58,7 +58,7 @@ Select the object. - Choose Format - Wrap, and then choose the wrapping style that you want to apply. + Choose Format - Wrap, and then choose the wrapping style that you want to apply. The current wrapping style is indicated by a bullet. @@ -69,7 +69,7 @@ Select the object. - Choose Format - Graphics, and then click the Wrap tab. + Choose Format - Graphics, and then click the Wrap tab. @@ -77,7 +77,7 @@ Set the options that you want. - Click OK. + Click OK. You can change the shape that the text wraps around. - Select the graphic, right-click, and then choose Wrap - Edit Contour. + Select the graphic, right-click, and then choose Wrap - Edit Contour. -- cgit v1.2.3